JP7078143B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game area is provided in which the game ball can move, and the game area is guided to the game area on which the game ball launched by the launching device is applied. Further, in general, the pachinko machine is provided with various winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110

By the way, among the game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls that have entered any winning means and the number of game balls that are discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. There may be a relatively large variation in the ratio, which may lead to a decline in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a function capable of suppressing variations in ball entry into a winning means of a gaming ball. To do.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
A first winning means that can change the state between an allowable state in which a game ball moving in the game area is allowed to enter and a restricted state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted.
The state can be changed between an allowable state in which the game ball is arranged on the downstream side of the game area and is allowed to enter the game area and a restricted state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted from the first winning means. Second prize-winning means
The first prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the first prize means, and the first prize detection means.
It is provided with a second prize detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second prize means.
Because the first winning means was in the restricted state even though the first winning means reached the first winning position where the ball could be entered in the first winning means if the first winning means was in the permissible state. The game ball that could not enter the first winning means is guided to the second winning position where the second winning means can enter the second winning means if the second winning means is in the allowable state. Equipped with a ball entry guidance means
The second prize-winning means is configured to be reachable only when the game ball is guided by the ball-entry guidance means.
An accessory provided at a position corresponding to the approach path of the game ball to the first winning means, and
An accessory driving means capable of changing the state of the accessory,
It is characterized in that it is provided on the upstream side of the first winning means and is provided with a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball.

According to claim 1, it is possible to suppress variations in the entry of the game ball into the winning means.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, a game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the main electric composition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows the end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows the receive interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for the determination of a decorative pattern and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit display process. It is a perspective view of the 2nd start winning apparatus. It is a perspective view of the 2nd start winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd start winning apparatus. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, the game board and the like in 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd variable winning apparatus and the like in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 2nd start winning apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a plan view which shows a part of the 2nd start winning apparatus as a modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows a part of the 2nd start winning apparatus as a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a plan view which shows a part of the 2nd start winning apparatus as a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the 2nd start winning apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which includes a partial cross section which shows the 2nd start winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which includes a partial cross section which shows the 2nd start winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which includes a partial cross section which shows the 2nd start winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which includes a partial cross section which shows the 2nd start winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 47 showing a second starting winning device according to a fourth embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd start winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view (front side) of the 2nd start winning apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view (rear surface side) of the 2nd start winning apparatus in 4th Embodiment. As a modification of the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view including a partial cross section for explaining the upper surface shape of the shutter, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a second variable winning device and the like. .. It is a front view which shows the 2nd variable winning apparatus and the like as a modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the 2nd variable winning apparatus and the like as a modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of 5th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the right-handed prize-winning unit, etc. of 5th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the right-handed prize-winning unit, etc. of 5th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which includes a partial cross section which shows the right-handed prize-winning unit of 5th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a part of the cover unit of the right-handed winning unit of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a front view showing an entrance accessory or the like in a normal position, (b) is a front view showing an entrance accessory or the like in a high entrance position, and (c) is an entrance in a winning position. It is a front view which shows the accessory and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed winning switch processing in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed hold icon display process in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of the decorative symbol display device in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial perspective view which shows the entrance accessory and the like as a modification of the 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the entrance accessory and the like as a modification of the 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the entrance accessory and the like as a modification of the 5th Embodiment. As a modification of the fifth embodiment, it is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of the decorative symbol display device (holding display area). As a modification of the fifth embodiment, it is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of the decorative symbol display device (holding display area). As a modification of the fifth embodiment, it is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of the decorative symbol display device (holding display area). As a modification of the fifth embodiment, it is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of the decorative symbol display device (holding display area).

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame constituting the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 11 as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In FIG. 3, for convenience, the game members (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as the front frame, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame component 11c and the right side frame component 11d are extruded from an aluminum alloy. It is made of a material, and each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame constituent portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 for locking the locking member of the locking device 600 are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, is projected from the lower receiving portion 85 toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame constituent portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed between the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened to the front side with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38.

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with the opening / closing axis set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly openly supported by the outer frame 11 instead of being supported via the inner frame 12.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided on the front side of the front frame set 14 at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 16 is the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 25 for ejecting a game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect can be performed by the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like described later. It may be damaged or the content of the production may be changed.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launch handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) protruding toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detecting means (variable resistor) (variable resistor) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 as a launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed and operated by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launching of the game ball by the launching device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while holding the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball receiving plate that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward the launching device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be discharged are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate connecting passage 71 and the discharge port 16 which will be described later.

The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated according to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) that is provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicates with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Further, various lamps and other light emitting means are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the gaming state or the like. For example, on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Further, error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. A large number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14 are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 in the annular illumination portion 102. ..

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses attached separately in a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and is attached after being assembled.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 in a state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39. There is. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides a game ball guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 has a general winning opening 31, a first variable winning device 32a, a second variable winning device 32b, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, and a first. 1 Special display device 43L, 2nd special display device 43R, fluctuation specifying lamp 40, etc. are arranged. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, variable winning devices 32a, 32b, and starting winning devices 33a, 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 19 or the lower. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15.

In the present embodiment, 10 balls are entered in the general winning opening 31 and 14 balls are entered in the first variable winning device 32a, and 10 balls are entered in the second variable winning device 32b. 13 games if there is a ball, 2 if there is a ball in the first start winning device 33a, 1 if there is a ball in the second start winning device 33b Is configured to be paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (which is discharged to the back surface side of the game board 30) and does not enter the game ball only through the game ball, the game ball is not paid out. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b constitutes the variable winning means, the second starting winning device 33b constitutes the special starting means, and the through gate 34 constitutes the normal starting means.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out opening 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and a game ball that does not win a prize in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 uses the out opening 36. It is discharged to the outside of the game area through it. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42 described later.

A ball entry port 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 151 is provided with a decorative pattern via the warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47. It is guided on the stage 153 formed below the display device 42. The game ball guided on the stage 153 rolls on the stage 153 and falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends back and forth formed in the center of the stage 153 to move the game ball. It may fall into the lead-out groove 154 that guides forward.

A first start winning device 33a is arranged at a lower position of the variable display device unit 35. The first start winning device 33a projects forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening at which the game ball can always win is opened on the upper side thereof. In particular, the game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first start winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. The first starting winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning device 33a.

A first variable winning device 32a is arranged at a position below the first starting winning device 33a. The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which the game ball can be won in a jackpot state of the corresponding type. Although not shown, the first variable winning device 32a has a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a large winning shutter for opening and closing the large winning opening, and a large winning shutter for operating the large winning shutter. The first variable winning device is equipped with a solenoid for the mouth and a first count switch 223a that detects a game ball that has entered the winning opening, drives and controls the solenoid for the winning opening, and opens and closes the winning shutter. The 32a (large winning opening) is switched between the closed state and the open state.

Hereinafter, for convenience, the area of the game area located on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “left side area”, and the area located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “right side area”. Further, a region located on the downstream side of the left side region and located on the left side of the substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the game board 30 in which the first start winning device 33a and the first variable winning device 32a are arranged is referred to as a "lower left region". That is, the area on the downstream side of the right side area and located on the right side of the substantially central part in the left-right direction of the game board 30 is called the "lower right area".

At the lower part of the lower left region, three general winning openings 31 are arranged diagonally along the peripheral edge portion (inner rail component portion 51) of the game region at predetermined intervals. Each general winning opening 31 projects forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening at which a game ball can always win is opened on the upper side thereof.

A through gate 34 is arranged in the right side region. The through gate 34 is configured so that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass through one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and a normal symbol display device 41 is performed. In order to teach the result of the ball entry support lottery, a variable display is performed. Then, when the ball is won in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

Further, a second variable winning device 32b is arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 34 in the right side region. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which the game ball can be won in the jackpot state of the corresponding type. Although not shown, the second variable winning device 32b has a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a large winning shutter for opening and closing the large winning opening, and a large winning shutter for operating the large winning shutter. A second variable winning device equipped with a solenoid for the mouth and a second count switch 223b that detects a game ball that has entered the winning opening, drives and controls the solenoid for the winning opening, and opens and closes the winning shutter. The 32b (large winning opening) is switched between the closed state and the open state.

Incidentally, in the large winning shutters of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b of the present embodiment, the lower edge portion of the large winning shutter is rotatably supported along the lower edge portion of the large winning opening. In the closed state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the big winning shutter extends up and down to close the big winning opening, and the game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the big winning shutter rotates forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is slightly inclined downward toward the rear), and the big winning opening The game ball that has flowed forward is received by the back surface (upper surface) of the large prize shutter and guided to the large prize opening.

A second starting winning device 33b is arranged on the downstream side of the second variable winning device 32b in the lower right region. The second start winning device 33b is also configured so that the state can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. The details of the second start winning device 33b will be described later.

As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b for detecting the winning game balls, respectively. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a big hit state, and special display devices 43L, 43R (and decorative symbol display) described later are performed. The device 42) is configured to display variations. Then, when the winner is won by the winning or losing lottery, a jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened is given.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in a winning / failing lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a higher probability than a low probability state in a winning / failing lottery. Further, as will be described in detail later, the second start winning device 33b is provided with a start winning shutter 405 as an opening / closing member for opening and closing the second starting winning device 33b (starting winning opening 402 described later). In the embodiment, the start winning shutter 405 is opened relatively frequently, and the "high entry state" that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b, and the start winning shutter 405 is hardly in the open position. , There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the state of low probability and low ball entry is referred to as "normal mode", and the state of low probability and high ball entry is referred to as "time reduction mode", and the state of high probability and high ball entry is high. A certain state is referred to as a "probability variation mode", and a state of a high probability state and a low ball entry state is referred to as a "latent probability mode".

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the probability variation mode, and the latent probability mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the special display device 43L even if the jackpot state does not occur. When the variable display on the 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times, the process ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

In the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode, the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently to facilitate the entry of a ball, while the first start winning device 33a receives a ball. Since it is not easy to do so, the player fires a game ball toward the right side region (so-called "right-handed") in the probability change mode or the time reduction mode. Further, at the timing of such right-handed strike, an announcement urging right-handed strike is made on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game is won in the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a (so-called "navel") and the case where the second starting winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip") is won. , Electric tulip "), the type of hit given changes depending on whether the game ball is won or not in the winning or losing lottery (type judgment referred to when determining the type of winning state). The tables are different).

More specifically, the jackpot types when the jackpot state is won based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a are 16 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "16RS") and 8 round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "16RS"). Hereinafter, there are an 8-round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "8RN") and a 2-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "2RS"). Regarding "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN", the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or after the first variable winning device 32a is opened, eight pieces are sent to the first variable winning device 32a. For "16RS", it is repeated 16 times, and for "8RS" and "8RN", it is repeated 8 times, and then the jackpot state ends. .. On the other hand, regarding "2RS", the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and after this is repeated twice, the jackpot state ends. That is, although "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN" are big hits (so-called "big hits with balls") in which a large increase in game balls can be expected during the big hit state, "2RS" is a game ball. It is a big hit (so-called "big hit without a ball") that is not expected to increase significantly.

In addition, after the jackpot state of "16RS" and "8RS" ends, the "probability change mode" is given, after the jackpot state of "2RS" ends, the "latent mode" is given, and after the jackpot state of "8RN" ends, the jackpot state ends. A "time reduction mode" (in this example, 90 variable displays) is provided. That is, after the jackpot state of "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN" is completed, the second start winning device 33b is in a high-entry state in which the second start winning device 33b is likely to be opened. The ball will be fired. In the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, the ratio becomes "16RS" at a rate of 5%, "8RS" at a rate of 55%, and the rate of 30%. Will be "8RN" and will be "2RS" at a rate of 10%.

Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit may be won in a winning / losing lottery based on winning a ball into the first starting winning device 33a. In the winning / failing lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, if a small hit is made, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and this is repeated twice. From, the small hit state ends. That is, the first variable winning device 32a is apparently the same as "2RS". However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, if "2RS" is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the latent mode, but even if the small hit is won, the normal mode is continued. As a result, in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, the first variable winning is not performed so as to win the two-round jackpot (two-round normal jackpot) to which the high probability state is not given. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is found that the device 32a has always transitioned to the high probability state by being opened twice for a short time.

On the other hand, when the jackpot state is won based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b, the jackpot types are 16 round probability variable jackpot, 8 round probability variable jackpot, and 2 round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "2RN"). There is. If the player wins the winning / failing lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is opened instead of the first variable winning device 32a (in this example, the round ends). Although the conditions are the same, the number of payouts (14 and 13) when a game ball enters the variable winning devices 32a and 32b is different, but for convenience of explanation, the second starting winning device 33b. For the sake of convenience, the same name ("16RS", "8RS") will be used for the type of jackpot when the player wins the winning or losing lottery based on the entry into the ball. In addition, in the present embodiment, the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state and the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state are the same. There are (8 prizes, or 1 round after 30 seconds have passed), but they may be different (for example, the maximum prizes of the game balls in the round are 8 and 9).

Further, regarding "2RS", the jackpot state ends after the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round and repeated twice. That is, for "16RS" and "8RS", a large increase in the number of game balls can be expected during the big hit state, but for "2RN", a large increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected.

Further, after the end of the jackpot state of "2RN", the "time reduction mode" is given. In this example, "2RN" is also divided into three, "2RN30" to which the time reduction mode for 30 times of variation display is given, and "2RN60" to which the time reduction mode for 60 times of variation display is given. There is "2RN90" to which the time reduction mode for 90 times of display is given. In the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery based on the winning / failing of the second starting winning device 33b, the rate becomes "16RS" at a rate of 35%, "8RS" at a rate of 35%, and the rate of 20%. Will be "2RN30", 5% will be "2RN60", and 5% will be "2RN90".

Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit may be won in a winning / losing lottery based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. In the winning / failing lottery based on the entry into the second starting winning device 33b, if a small hit is made, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and this is repeated twice. From, the small hit state ends. That is, the second variable winning device 32b is apparently the same as "2RN". However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, a high-probability state such as a probabilistic mode basically shifts to a low-probability state (time reduction mode, etc.) by winning "2RN", but even if a small hit is won in the probabilistic mode, the probability changes. The mode continues. As a result, the second variable winning device 32b is opened twice in a short time without sorting to win the two-round probability variation jackpot "2RS" in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry into the second starting winning device 33b. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is always known that the state has shifted to a low probability state.

In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning ball to the first starting winning device 33a, and the second special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning ball to the second starting winning device 33b. The two special display devices 43R are each composed of two segment display devices, and are configured to be capable of displaying symbols, characters, numbers and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are installed at a position visible to the player (in this example, a position where the game ball in the left side region cannot pass).

Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, the special symbol is switched and displayed (variable display) on the first special display device 43L, and the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b. The second special display device 43R is configured to switch and display (variable display) a special symbol when the ball enters the ball. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261 as the main control means described later.

Further, after the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the winning / failing lottery, that is, "big hit", " It is definitely displayed that it is a "small hit" or "missing". For example, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, the special symbol (combination of lit segments) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variable display). ), And when the predetermined time elapses, one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, for example, when the "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, the corresponding special symbol is displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and the big hit state occurs.

Further, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, it is also taught whether the jackpot type is "16RS", "8RS", "8RN", "2RS", or "2RN" depending on the special symbol to be stopped. To. Further, there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type, and one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. Further, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing the variable display or the decision display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed. If the variable display and the decision display are not performed in either case, "-" is displayed in both cases.

Further, when a game ball newly enters the first or second start winning device 33a, 33b during the variation display of the first or second special display devices 43L, 43R, the variation display for that amount is the same. It is configured to be performed after the end of the fluctuation display performed at the time. That is, the variable display is put on standby (held). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model, but in the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b have won a prize. Depending on the game ball, up to 4 fluctuation displays (8 fluctuation displays in total) are reserved.

Further, the reserved number of the variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first variation display") based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a is arranged above the first special display device 43L and is blue. The number of holdes of the variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second variable display") based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b, which is lit and displayed by the first hold lamp 46a capable of emitting light, is the first. 2 It is arranged above the special display device 43R, and is lit by a second holding lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided with four holding lamps 46a and 46b, which are the same as the maximum number of holdings for each of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display, and are the same number as the number of the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display held. Light. The display contents of the holding lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub control device 262 as a sub control means described later. If a game ball newly wins a prize in the start winning units 33a and 33b during the big hit state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved. Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved number of the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (when the variable display is performed, the screen is displayed). It is displayed at the bottom).

The reserved variable display is basically digested in the reserved order, but when both the first variable display and the second variable display are reserved (hold lamp 46a, When one or more of 46b are lit), the second variation display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by the winning of the second starting winning device 33b is not completely digested, the first variation display triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting winning device 33a is performed. There is no configuration. For example, when one of the first holding lamps 46a is lit, a game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, and one of the second holding lamps 46b is lit, the first variation display is postponed. Then, the second variation display is performed first.

In the variation identification lamp 40, which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b corresponds to the variation display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 (No. 1). It is intended to indicate (whether it is a 1-variable display or a 2nd variable display), and is arranged at a position visible to the player (in this example, a position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47). The fluctuation specifying lamp 40 includes an LED having a blue emission color and an LED having a red emission color, and when the first variation display is performed in the decorative pattern display device 42, the variation identification lamp 40 emits light in blue and the second variation. When displayed, it emits red light.

The variable display device unit 35 has a normal symbol display device 41 (position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) that variablely displays when the through gate 34 passes, and variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. A decorative pattern display device 42 for variable display according to the above is provided.

The ordinary symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to lightly display "○" or "×" as an ordinary symbol, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the ordinary symbol is changed from "○" to "×". → "○" → ... and so on, switching display (variable display) at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation display is stopped at the "○" symbol (winning symbol) for several seconds, the second start winning device 33b (starting winning shutter 405) is opened for a predetermined time. The display content of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later.

Further, when the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 41, the variation display for that amount is performed after the end of the variation display performed at that time. It is configured to be done. That is, the variable display is put on standby (held). The maximum number of times the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol to be suspended is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it is suspended up to 4 times. In addition, the number of times of holding the variable display of the normal symbol is arranged in the variable display device unit 35, and is lit and displayed by the holding lamp 44 capable of emitting white light. The holding lamps 44 are provided with four holding lamps 44, which is the same as the maximum number of holdings for each fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and are lit by the same number as the number of holding fluctuation displays.

The high ball entry state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, and (2) a single opening time of the second start winning device 33b (2). (Specified time) is longer than in the low entry state, (3) The specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low entry state. (4) The number of times the second start winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball entry support lottery is larger than that in the low ball entry state, and (5) The winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is higher than in the low ball entry state. For example, it should be in a high state. The high ball entry state in this embodiment adopts the configurations of (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high support mode". As a result, the game ball is likely to be frequently won in the second start winning device 33b, the number of times the winning / failing lottery is executed increases, and the player's holding ball is suppressed from being reduced. ..

The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be capable of variable display of decorative symbols as identification information. Further, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub control device 262 assists the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The display content is determined, and the display is displayed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas of upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are provided in each symbol display area. It is displayed sequentially (variably displayed), and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area). .. For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed by the main control device 261, the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R display the jackpot, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the jackpot. (For example, decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to (for example, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area) are variablely displayed so that the same decorative symbols are lined up on a predetermined effective line. It will be stopped and displayed), and the jackpot state will start.

Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to the jackpot, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in, for example, the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area as a preliminary step. In this way, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area, which is the reach state. Of course, just because a reach state occurs does not necessarily mean that it will be a big hit, and it may come off.

In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If doublet is displayed (when doublet is stopped), the jackpot state is given. Further, in the case of odd-numbered doublets, "16RS" or "8RS" is generated, and in the case of even-numbered doublets, either "16RS", "8RS", or "8RN" is generated.

The combination of decorative symbols other than doublets basically teaches "off", but in this embodiment, even if it is a big hit, the decorative symbols are doublets for "2RS" and "2RN". It is not displayed as a stop in combination, but is displayed as a stop in a combination that is out of reach. In addition, "small hit" is also stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of reach even though it is a reach symbol.

For example, in the probabilistic mode, a dedicated probabilistic stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect corresponding to the game mode (suggesting the staying game mode), but the probabilistic change is won by winning "2RN". When the mode ends, or when the "small hit" is won, the probability change stage ends, and a pullback stage in which it cannot be determined whether or not the mode is in the probability change mode is displayed. Then, if the player wins "2RN" and the period of the granted time reduction mode ends, the pullback stage is ended and the normal mode (very likely) is indicated. Start displaying the stage. Further, when the "small hit" is won, the game mode does not change before and after the "small hit", so that the probabilistic mode remains. Therefore, although it shifts to the pullback stage, it is easy to make a big hit, and if the period corresponding to the maximum of the time reduction mode (90 times of variable display of the special symbol) is exceeded, it is understood that the mode is the probability change mode. be able to.

As described above, the correspondence between the stop mode of the special symbol and the jackpot type in the special display devices 43L and 43R is grasped, and the stop mode of the special symbol variation display that teaches the occurrence of the jackpot or the small hit is confirmed. If so, it is possible to determine which type of jackpot was won. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the entry into the second starting winning device 33b, the jackpot types for displaying doublets on the decorative symbol display device 42 are "16RS" and "8RS". There is no choice. Therefore, basically (except when the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball entering the first start winning device 33a is digested), in the probabilistic mode or the time reduction mode, the decorative symbol display device 42 is doublet. When the jackpot is taught, the probability variation mode is confirmed.

Further, for example, in the normal mode, the normal stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect corresponding to the game mode, but when the player wins "2RS" and shifts to the probabilistic mode, or "small hit". If you win, the normal stage ends, and the precursor stage for which it is not possible to determine whether or not it is in the probabilistic mode is displayed. In the present embodiment, this precursor stage is a period of about 10 to 50 times in the variable display of the special symbol when the "small hit" is the transition trigger, that is, when staying in the normal mode. After being derived in, it returns to the normal stage. On the other hand, when "2RS" is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the latent mode, it is basically a precursor stage until a big hit. In addition, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to return to the normal stage from the precursory stage, or a lottery to determine whether or not to move to the precursory stage again after returning from the precursory stage to the normal stage (in the case of the latent mode). , It is desirable to increase the probability of returning to the precursory stage). In addition, if the player wins "8RN" in the winning / failing lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a, or if the player wins "8RS", the probability change mode is given until the end of the jackpot state. If it is not taught, the player moves to the pullback stage after the jackpot state ends.

Further, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is attached with a rail 50 that guides the game ball launched from the launcher 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball launched by the rotation operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component portion 52. The game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the rail 50 and the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launcher 60 may flow back through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. Be taken.

By the way, in this embodiment, the second start winning apparatus 33b is characterized. Hereinafter, the second start winning device 33b will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 and the like. The second start winning device 33b is a substantially box having a base plate 401 mounted along the front surface of the game board 30 and a starting winning opening 402 projecting toward the front surface side of the base plate 401 and opening upward. A winning box 403, a second starting winning switch 224b (see FIG. 40) that detects a game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 402, and a closing that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the starting winning opening 402. A start winning shutter 405 that can be displaced between a position and an open position that enables entry, a solenoid (not shown) that operates the start winning shutter 405, and a game ball are guided toward the start winning opening 402. It is equipped with a guide stand 407. In the present embodiment, the starting winning opening 402 corresponds to the specific winning opening, and the opening / closing member is configured by the starting winning shutter 405, the solenoid that operates the starting winning shutter 405, and the like.

The start winning shutter 405 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and is formed in the base plate 401 directly above the start winning opening 402 via an opening (hereinafter referred to as “accommodation opening 408”) in the gaming area. It is configured to open and close the start winning opening 402. As shown in FIG. 39, in the open state of the second start winning device 33b, the entire start winning shutter 405 is housed in the back side of the accommodating opening 408, and as shown in FIG. 38, the second starting winning device is accommodated. In the closed state of 33b, the start winning shutter 405 covers the entire starting winning opening 402. Further, in the start winning shutter 405 in a state where the starting winning opening 402 is closed, both side edges and leading edges of the lower surface thereof are supported by the peripheral edge portion of the starting winning opening 402. In the present embodiment, the peripheral portion of the starting winning opening 402 that supports the lower surface of the starting winning shutter 405 constitutes the receiving member. In addition, a reinforcing rib 409 is formed on the lower surface side of the start winning shutter 405.

The guide stand 407 is arranged on the upper right side of the starting winning opening 402, and the game ball that has reached the second starting winning device 33b from the upstream side of the gaming area is directed from a substantially fixed direction with respect to the starting winning opening 402 in this example. Then, it is provided to guide from the upper right. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the second start winning device 33b is provided with various game members such as a game nail disposed above the second start winning device 33b and a decorative object. First, the movement route of the game ball is limited so that the game ball that has reached the above can always enter the guide stand 407. That is, the game ball that enters the second start winning device 33b (which may enter the starting winning opening 402) always jumps out from the guide table 407 toward the upper position of the starting winning shutter 405 located at the lower left. It is designed to operate. In the present embodiment, the position where the game ball is guided by the guide table 407 and pops out corresponds to a specific point, and the start winning shutter 405 is arranged at the specific point.

Further, the various game members that guide the game ball to the guide table 407 are configured so that the momentum of the game ball reaching the guide table 407 is suppressed as much as possible (for example, the guide surface is not steep but has a gentle slope close to the horizontal direction). Etc.). As a result, the speed, the pop-out angle, and the like of the game ball guided by the guide base 407 are approximated as much as possible. In the present embodiment, the guide stand 407 and the game nails, decorative accessories, and the like that guide the game ball to the guide stand 407 constitute the rectifying means.

An opening through which a game ball can pass (hereinafter referred to as "discharge opening 411") is provided between the winning box 403 and the guide stand 407. That is, the game ball that does not enter the start winning opening 402 is discharged to the outside of the second starting winning device 33b through the discharge opening 411.

By the way, on the upper surface side of the winning box 403, an introduction path 412 for guiding the game ball to the rear (the back side of the game board 30) is formed adjacent to the left side of the starting winning opening 402. That is, when the start winning opening 402 is closed by the starting winning shutter 405 (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed position), the game guided from the upper right to the starting winning opening 402 side by the guide stand 407. The ball passes through the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 and is adjacent to the left side of the starting winning shutter 405 by the momentum guided from the guide stand 407 while the starting winning shutter 405 regulates the winning of the starting winning opening 402. It will enter the introduction road 412.

The upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 and the introduction path 412 of the present embodiment are inclined downward to the right, but the game ball guided from the guide base 407 is guided so as to run up and move. The inclination, length, relative position, etc. of the table 407 are designed.

Further, the base plate 401 is formed with an opening (hereinafter referred to as "detour opening 413") communicating with the introduction path 412. The detour opening 413 is formed from the introduction path 412 to the left portion of the starting winning opening 402.

Further, on the rear surface side of the base plate 401, a turn box 415 provided with a re-entry path 414 for discharging the game ball that has entered the detour opening 413 from the introduction path 412 above the starting winning opening 402 is attached. ing. The re-entry path 414 is composed of an outward path 416 on the left side and a return path 417 on the right side, with the central portion of the turn box 415 in the width direction as a boundary. The rear end portion of the outward route 416 and the return route 417 is continuous, but the strut rib 418 is formed so as not to be able to go back and forth between the outward route 416 and the return route 417 at the portion in front of it. The outward route 416 is continuous with the introduction route 412 via the detour opening 413, and is inclined backward and to the right. The return route 417 is continuous with the rear portion of the outward route 416 and is connected to the detour opening 413 located directly above the start winning opening 402, and is inclined forward.

When the flow of the game ball in the second start winning device 33b is confirmed, first, when the game ball guided by the guide stand 407 and jumps out to the start winning opening 402 side reaches directly above the starting winning opening 402. When the start winning opening 402 is open, the game ball jumps into the open starting winning opening 402 to win a prize, and is detected by the second starting winning switch 224b.

On the other hand, when the start winning opening 402 is closed by the starting winning shutter 405 at the time when the game ball that is guided by the guide stand 407 and jumps out to the starting winning opening 402 side reaches directly above the starting winning opening 402. When the game ball lands on the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405, it moves to the left as it is and enters the introduction path 412. Further, it will jump out from the introduction path 412 via the re-entry path 414 again above the start winning opening 402. At this time, if the starting winning opening 402 is open, the starting winning opening 402 is won, while if the starting winning opening 402 is closed by the starting winning shutter 405, the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405 Guided to the lower right, the product is discharged from the discharge opening 411 to the outside of the second start winning device 33b.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b (starting winning shutter 405) is almost open (the starting winning opening 402 is almost opened) in the high ball entry state of the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. ing). For example, in the high ball entry state, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is 99/100, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol displaying the result of the ball entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and when the ball entry support lottery is won. The 4-second opening is repeated 3 times with a 0.4-second closing period. Therefore, even if the start winning opening 402 happens to be closed when it jumps out of the guide stand 407 and is located directly above the starting winning opening 402, the starting winning opening is again via the introduction path 412 and the re-entry entry path 414. When it reaches directly above the 402, it is very likely that the starting winning opening 402 is open. In the present embodiment, the time from jumping out of the guide stand 407 to the upper part of the starting winning opening 402 via the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414 is approximately 1 second. It is assumed to be ~ 2 seconds.

Further, even if the predetermined game ball attempts to enter the start winning opening 402 for the second time and the start winning shutter 405 is closed and the starting winning opening 402 cannot be won, the game ball starts. While it is on the upper surface of the winning shutter 405, the ball enters the starting winning opening 402. In particular, in the present embodiment, the return path 417 of the re-entry path 414 is located on the left side portion on the upstream side of the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 that is inclined downward toward the right discharge opening 411. It is connected to the left part of the starting winning opening 402. Therefore, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position when the game ball jumps out from the re-entry path 414 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402, the game ball stays in the closed position for a relatively long time (starting winning shutter). It is configured to stay on the start winning shutter 405 (by rolling as long as possible from the left side to the right side of the top surface of the 405).

Therefore, in the high-entry state, when a right-handed hit is made, almost all the game balls enter the start winning opening 402 of the second starting winning device 33b. As a result, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out is one when there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (when the game ball is detected by the second start winning switch 224b). Although it is set to, it is possible to enjoy the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode without reducing the number of game balls held by the player. In addition, since the hold of the variable display of the special symbol is almost uninterrupted, the game can proceed in a pleasant manner.

On the other hand, in the low ball entry state, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is 1/100, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is 8 seconds, and when the ball entry support lottery is won, the opening for 0.4 seconds is 1 Only done once. Therefore, even if "right-handed" is performed in the normal mode or the latent mode, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b and receive a winning / losing lottery. Therefore, in the normal mode and the latent mode, the game ball has a firing strength such that the game ball flows in the "left side area" on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 for the purpose of entering the first start winning device 33a. Will be fired ("left-handed"). By the way, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is "left-handed", the game ball cannot be entered into the second variable winning device 32b and the second starting winning device 33b, and the game ball is passed through the gate. It cannot be passed through 34. Further, when the game ball is "right-handed", the game ball cannot be entered into the first variable winning device 32a and the first starting winning device 33a.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is provided on the downstream side of the game area with respect to the second variable winning device 32b. Further, in the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 32b is opened, almost all the game balls moving in the right side region are blocked by the shutter of the second variable winning device 32b, and the second variable winning device 32b is blocked. The device 32b is designed to win a prize. Therefore, during the round in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, the game ball hardly flows to the second starting winning device 33b side.

In the present embodiment, the start winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414 constitute a time difference passing opportunity granting means. Further, the ball entry support lottery corresponds to the opening / closing lottery, the first state corresponds to the low ball entry state, and the second state corresponds to the high ball entry state. Further, a function of performing a ball entry support lottery of the main control device 261, which will be described in detail later, constitutes an opening / closing lottery means.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the front frame set 14, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate continuous passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate continuous passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has a gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball that has fallen from the gap to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball returns to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. It is discharged.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and is a payout passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate and a passage leading to the lower plate continuous passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to almost close the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, in the state where the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear end portion of the lower plate connecting passage 71. It should be noted that the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate connecting passage 71 and the upper plate connecting passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance in the closed state of the front frame set 14. The game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate ream passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be discharged flow to the lower plate ream passage 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower plate ream passage 71), and the lower plate ream It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate continuous passage 71. By the presence of the fullness detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are stagnant in the lower plate continuous passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display and voice on the decorative symbol display device 42 is notified. Is controlled. When the stagnation of the game ball in the lower plate continuous passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally so as to be partially overlapped in the front-rear direction, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying the game balls. And a protective cover made of resin are attached. Since the payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind is on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. The 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The decorative design display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative design display device 42 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is housed in the back surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged. Further, the housing box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside is visible.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning unit 33, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings (not shown). The game ball collected by the ball collection mechanism is guided to the discharge passage portion 217, which will be described later, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main control device 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. As a result, it is possible to easily detect that the substrate box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the various winning openings corresponding to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b have a first count switch. 223a and a second count switch 223b are provided. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221, the first count switch 223a, the second count switch 223b, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. A 1-board relay board is provided. The first board surface relay board relays the winning port switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second starting winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are transmitted based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although not shown, the back surface of the game board 30 is provided with a solenoid for a large winning opening that opens the large winning opening in the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b. The start winning device 33b is provided with a solenoid for winning openings that drives the opening and closing of the starting winning shutter 405. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a combination of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with the open / close axis extending in the vertical direction as the axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current gaming state (big hit state, probability change mode, etc.), a front frame set 14 and an inner frame detected by the open detection switches 91 and 92 described later. A terminal for outputting information on the opening of 12, a terminal for outputting information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower plate full tank error, a tank ball no error, and a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information on the number of balls is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded with, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and forms a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the portion on the left side in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge portion of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism portion 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclining toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor or the like. Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 is supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, in the payout mechanism unit 352, a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power supply from the outside is installed. There is. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game ball collected by the above-mentioned ball recovery mechanism flows in, and the game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won in each winning opening such as the general winning opening 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251 the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back surface side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout motor section occurs, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery). can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power. Is thrown in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotated in one direction. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back surface side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided in the lower right portion of the inner frame 12 on the front side (right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in the above, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right (lower left in FIG. 5) on the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main control device 261 and the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body, and when the detection unit is immersed in the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 to turn off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by being pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11, and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) as the main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 is a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is turned off (including the time when a power failure occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. This is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, the value of I / O, etc. (same as above). Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and conversely, restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is the main process when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure resolution). Is executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input the power failure signal SK1 output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L, 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the above-mentioned special display devices 43L and 43R and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input / output port 505 has a winning port switch 221, a count switch 223a, 223b, a starting winning switch 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, and various switches of the handle 18. Various detection switches such as, various boards, and various electric parts such as solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output ports 505 are configured by these terminal portions and the like.

The sub control device 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, input / output port 554, bus line 555, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. It is equipped with. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected to the input / output port 554. Further, a speaker SP, hold lamps 46a and 46b, an effect button 125, various illumination units, and lamps 102 to 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 display that the jackpot has been won, and the sub control device 262. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, variable display (of the decorative symbol) is performed as an effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (in the special symbol).

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, and various flags and counters, similarly to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a includes a stack pointer at the time of power off, each register, and the like in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similar to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to input the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 There is a command buffer that stores the commands sent from.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and the initial setting is made. It is turned off when the process is restored or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261 to be restored. There are three payout return commands sent in case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the payout permission flag, initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main control device 261 and the emission control device 312, the payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 has a ball lending operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. It is electrically connected to each of the above, and it takes in the command of the ball lending operation by the player and outputs it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing prohibition button 18a (which stops firing). The launching device 60 is driven on condition that the launching device 60 is not operated (see FIG. 1), and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP526) is carried out. As a result, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies electric power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the operation power required for each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power via a control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure time processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volt, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power due to the elimination of a power failure), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. To.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means draws lots using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a winning / failing random number counter C1 used for a winning / failing lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot state, a type determination counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type (type lottery), and decoration. The variable selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not to generate a reach state in the symbol display device 42, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit / fail random number counter C1, and the first and second special display devices. Used for the lottery (ball entry support lottery) of the first variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 used for determining the variable display time of the 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and the normal symbol display device 41. It is decided to use the ordinary symbol random number counter C4. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for a lottery for each reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and varied. Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for the variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined by the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time, that is, the effect pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined.

The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counter returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 stores a special variable hold area as a hold storage area for storing the values of the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the change selection counter C3, and a normal symbol random number counter C4 for storing the values. There is a variable hold area. The normal variable hold area includes one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st to hold 4th areas). In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times.

Further, the special fluctuation holding area includes a first special fluctuation holding area and a second special fluctuation storage area having four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. Stored serially. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b. Stored serially. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R up to four times, respectively.

Explaining each counter in detail, for example, the winning / failing random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reaches the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 599), and then is the lower limit value 0 as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the hit / miss random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the hit / miss random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the hit / miss random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is "7,307", which is a high probability. The number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the state (probability variation mode, latency mode) is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two hit / fail determination tables that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 corresponds to a big hit, and "7,307" is a big hit. There is a first hit / fail determination table stored as a value and a second hit / fail determination table in which "8 to 16, 308 to 316" are stored as jackpot values.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning / failing random number counter C1 is used to draw a lottery as to whether or not a small hit is won when the big hit is not won. In the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), the number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a small hit is one, and the value is "404", and the high probability state (probability variation mode, latency mode). ), The number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a small hit is 10, and the value is “404 to 413”. For the winning / failing determination of the small hit, the first small hit determination table that stores "404" as the winning value and the second small hit determination table that stores "405 to 413" as the winning value are referred to.

In the normal mode, the probability of winning a big hit (big hit probability) is 1/300, the probability of winning a small hit (small hit probability) is 1/600, and the ball entry support lottery. The fluctuation time in the ordinary symbol display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and when the ball is won in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b (starting winning shutter 405) is 0.4 seconds. Be released.

In the probabilistic mode, the jackpot probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60, which makes it easier to hit a jackpot or a small hit as compared with the normal mode. Further, in the probabilistic mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the ball entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode, and when the ball entry support lottery is won, the second The start winning device 33b is opened three times, and each opening time is 4 seconds (the opening for 4 seconds is repeated 3 times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds). That is, in the probabilistic mode, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the normal mode, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is longer, and the number of times of opening is longer. Will increase. As a result, the time zone in which the second start winning device 33b is open becomes longer, so that the game ball frequently enters the second starting winning device 33b (high ball entry state). , The winning and failing lottery will be held continuously, and the ball will be in a good condition. In the high ball entry state, the probability that the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (probability of winning the ball entry support lottery) may be higher than in the normal mode.

In the time reduction mode, the jackpot probability is 1/300 and the small hit probability is 1/600. Further, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the ball entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and when the ball entry support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened three times. At the same time, each opening time is 4 seconds. That is, the time reduction mode has the same low probability as in the normal mode, but the jackpot probability is the same as the probability variation mode when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is seen. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot state of "8RN" or "2RN" is completed, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R display a total number of fluctuations (90 times uniformly after "8RN"). Therefore, the time reduction mode is set for 30 times (“2RN30”), 60 times (“2RN60”), and 90 times (“2RN90”) for “2RN”. Further, the time reduction mode ends when the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the fluctuation display of the specified number of times even if the jackpot state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In the latent probability mode, the jackpot probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60. Further, in the latent probability mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 8 seconds, and when the ball entry support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. That is, the latent probability mode has the same high probability as the probability variation mode in the jackpot probability, but it is the same as the normal mode when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is seen. In the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state of "2RS", the latent mode is set and continues until at least the jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, if the player wins the winning / failing lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, the latent mode ends quietly because there is no allocation to win the "2RN". Such a situation is avoided (it continues until the jackpot with a ball is won).

The type determination counter C2 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, reach the upper limit value (that is, 19), and then return to the lower limit value of 0. Further, the ROM 502 includes a first type determination table (corresponding to the first start winning device 33a) and a second type determination, which are referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. A table (corresponding to the second start winning device 33b) is provided. Then, when a jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery, the type of the jackpot state type given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (the type lottery is performed), and the determined type jackpot state is determined. It will be granted.

The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach the upper limit value (that is, 238), and then return to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, after the reach state is generated for the decorative symbol by the variable selection counter C3, the reach state is also generated as the "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. The lottery is to draw "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol, and "completely off" where the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. The value of "0 to 238" is stored in the reach judgment table, C3 = 0,1 corresponds to the front-back off reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than the front-back off, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It is configured to correspond to the disconnection.

The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

Further, of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 59, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then becomes the lower limit value. The other variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, for example, the variable type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 37, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 37), and then returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of the decorative symbol such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the reach occurs. A finer symbol variation mode such as the elapsed time until the (middle symbol in this example) is stopped is determined. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1 or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stopped symbol.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

The size and range of each counter are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 99, the lower limit value is returned to 0). The random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired. The number of winning random numbers in the ball state is one, and the range is "1". On the other hand, the number of winning random numbers in the high ball state is 99. The range is "1 to 99". Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the fluctuation display is performed in the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined time, and then the symbol corresponding to the winning is displayed. (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second start winning device 33b is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erasing switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

If there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. Further, in the external output processing of the normal processing described later, the prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and the prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (the game ball is paid out). Ru). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

Further, in step S303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (599 and 19 in the present embodiment, respectively). When it reaches 238, 99), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the starting winning unit 33 is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The RAM 503 has a first hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a, and a hold of the variable display triggered by the winning of the second start winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb for counting the number is provided.

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a winning / failing random number storage area for storing the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variation selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the hit / miss random number storage area uses 2 bytes to store the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1. Further, the winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area each use 1 byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, is it a variation display (first variation display) based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a, or is based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b. A variable storage area is provided in which information indicating whether the display is variable (second variable display) is stored. Hereinafter, "information indicating that the first variable display is stored in the variable storage area" is also referred to as "the first variable flag is set to ON", and "the second variable display is stored in the variable storage area". "The information indicating that the information is stored" is also referred to as "the second fluctuation flag is set on".

First, in step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined by the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the hit / miss random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 (the hit / fail random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer) updated in the random number update process of step S303 are used. Each stored value) is stored in the first area (win / fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) among the vacant hold areas of the special fluctuation hold area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, a hit / fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. The details of the pass / fail determination process will be described later.

In the following step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs type determination processing to determine the type of. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is used as a deviation. Performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the pass / fail determination process in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches with either "7" or "307", which is the value stored in the first hit / miss determination table. To determine. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is described in a simplified manner, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "307", and if a positive determination is made by either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in the step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made even in the above step S5101, a negative determination is made.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends. In this embodiment, in addition to the hit / miss random number storage area for storing the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1, the hit / miss flag is not separately provided, and information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs in the hit / miss random number storage area. Is memorized (overwritten). As described above, the hit / miss random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and in step S5102, for example, "1010101010101010" is set for the hit / miss random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting is made for the hit / miss random number storage area, which is described as turning on the first hit / miss flag.

When a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value stored in the second hit / miss determination table "8 to 16, 308". It is determined whether or not it is any of "~ 316". By the way, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" are values that are big hits only in the probabilistic mode. Even in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match, as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process ends. Note that turning on the second hit / miss flag here means that, for example, "110011001100100" is set for the hit / miss random number storage area.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is "off" even in a high probability state, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5105 is the first. It is determined whether or not it matches the value "404" stored in the small hit determination table. By the way, "404" is a value that is a small hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the first small hit flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process ends. In this embodiment, information on whether or not a small hit state occurs is also stored (overwritten) in the hit / miss random number storage area.

If a negative determination is made in step S5105, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5107 is the value stored in the second small hit determination table "405 to 413". It is determined whether or not it is one of the above. By the way, "405 to 413" is a value that becomes a big hit only in a high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5107, the second small hit flag is turned on in step S5108, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the information related to the pass / fail is stored using 2 bytes, so that the pass / fail flag (the stored content of the pass / fail random number storage area) is rewritten when noise occurs, for example. , It is possible to prevent a situation in which a big hit state occurs even though the player is not a winner, or a big hit state does not occur even though the player is a winner. Further, the pattern (combination of "1" and "0") set in the hit / miss random number storage area in the hit / fail determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is stored in the hit / miss random number storage area. be.

In addition to the hit / miss random number storage area for storing the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1, a hit / miss flag is separately provided to keep the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 stored at this point, and the fluctuation display described later is performed. In the variation display setting process performed at the start, the corresponding table may be referred to based on the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 and the hit / fail may be determined. Further, a random number counter for small hits may be provided separately from the hit / miss random number counter C1 used for the big hit determination.

Next, the second type determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first or second hit / fail flag is set to ON in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5401 (a big hit state may occur), the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration in the second type determination table in step S5402. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403, and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, the 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided, and the winning type random number storage area is "16RS" or the like. It is configured to store (overwrite) the information of. As described above, 1 byte is used for the winning type random number storage area, and in step S5403, for example, "10101010" is set for the winning type random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as "16RS" in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag indicating the jackpot type (16RS flag or the like). explain. The pattern (combination of "1" and "0") set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determination process is not used when the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5402, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to "8RS" in consideration of the second type determination table in step S5404. It is determined whether or not it matches any of "7 to 13". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, "00011111" is set for the winning type random number storage area) in step S5405, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5404, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to "2RN30" in consideration of the second type determination table in step S5406. It is determined whether or not it matches any of "14 to 17". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5406, the 2RN30 flag is turned on in step S5407, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5406, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to "2RN60" in consideration of the second type determination table in step S5408. It is determined whether or not it matches with "18". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, the 2RN60 flag is turned on in step S5409, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S5408, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value "19" corresponding to "2RN90". After turning on the flag, this process ends. In the type discrimination process, it suffices if the jackpot type can be discriminated. For example, instead of discriminating whether the value corresponding to "16RS", which has a large number of random numbers corresponding to winning, and the acquired random number value match. It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to "2RN90" and the acquired random number value match.

Next, the reach determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first pass / fail flag is set in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (a big hit state always occurs), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, when a jackpot state does not occur (may be out of order) at least in a low probability state, the reach determination table is newly taken into consideration in step S5302. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "front-back deviation reach". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5303, the front-back flag indicating the occurrence of the front-back off reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, the front and rear flags are not separately provided, and the information that the reach random number storage area is "out of front and back reach". Is memorized (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in step S5303, for example, "10101010" is set for the reach random number storage area. In this embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front and rear flags.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5302, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "reach other than front / rear deviation" by referring to the reach determination table in step S5304. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values "2 to 21". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, this process ends after turning on the flags other than before and after in step S5305. Note that turning on the flag other than before and after here means that, for example, "11001100" is set for the reach random number storage area.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the variation display ends without going through the reach state, the process is terminated as it is. The pattern set in the reach random number storage area (combination of "1" and "0") in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the reach random number storage area. be.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, the starting command setting process is performed. In the starting command, the hold-stored fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) is triggered by either the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. The information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination process, the type determination process, and the reach determination process is included, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). ..

After the process of step S508, or if a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch 224a. It is determined by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S509, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, in step S510, the value of the first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by winning the first starting winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S510, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S512, the values of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in an empty holding area (winning / failing random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) in the special fluctuation holding area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, a hit / fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the pass / fail determination process have already been described above.

In the following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The first type determination process for determining the type is performed. In the present embodiment, there is a case where a big hit is won in a winning / losing lottery based on a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, and a case where a big hit is won in a winning / losing lottery based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. So, the distribution of the jackpot types given is different.

Here, the first type determination process in step S514 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second hit / fail flag is set to ON in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (a big hit state may occur), the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration in the first type determination table in step S5202. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to "8RN" in consideration of the first type determination table in step S5204. It is determined whether or not it matches any of "12 to 17". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to "2RS" in consideration of the first type determination table in step S5206. It is determined whether or not it matches with either "18 or 19". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5207, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area Based on the value of the selection counter C3, the reach determination process for determining the reach type is performed. The details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

After step S515, in step S516, the starting command setting process is performed, and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and then the hit / fail determination process is performed. , The type determination process, and the reach determination process are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area (working area) for temporarily storing these counter values when the value of the random number counter C1 is acquired is provided, and the information stored in the temporary storage area is subjected to the pass / fail determination process and the type. After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the items are stored in the hold area of the corresponding special change hold area.

Next, the through-gate passage process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined by the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending fluctuation displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, on the condition that the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603 and the normal hold counter is reached. Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the following step S604, a random number related to the result is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passage process is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power supply cutoff occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt processing is performed. finish.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state. Wait processing is executed for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 in order to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, in the subsequent step S104, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so that the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well. If the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the following step S106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power cutoff. That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 or the like). Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like) in the same manner. That is, in step S113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the power cutoff occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. In addition, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of power failure restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power off is restored, and in step S108, the power off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S211 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S212 and S213 are executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the settings of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the start winning unit 33 updated in the previous normal processing are transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to the sub side. Executes external output processing such as sending to each control device.

For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, the variation pattern command, the symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the display effect according to the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the variation mode. Is instructed to the display control device 45 to be displayed (variable display) on the decorative symbol display device 42.

For convenience, fluctuation pattern commands and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative pattern such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. The fluctuation pattern command and the like are originally binary numbers of 2 bytes (the same output method as the hold information command), but are shown as hexadecimal numbers every 4 bits for convenience. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode and the latent mode, any one of "FF10", "FF11", "FF12", "FF13", "FF14", "FF15", and "FF16" is used as a fluctuation pattern command. Set. Further, in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode, "FD10", "FD11", "FD12", "FD13", "FD14", "FD15", and "FD16" are set. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation type of the decorative symbol in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variation display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, the voice, and the like.

Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative pattern and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

Normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effect is displayed except for changes in the decorative pattern. Then, "FF11" or "FD11" is set for the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach, depending on the mode. In the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened as compared with the normal mode and the latent mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is "15 seconds" in the normal mode and the latent mode, and "10 seconds" in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode.

The super reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. be. In the present embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. Then, "FF12" or "FD12" is set in the fluctuation pattern command for Super Reach SR1, "FF13" or "FD13" is set for Super Reach SR2, and "FF14" or "FD14" is set for Super Reach SR3. Is set.

Premium reach is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), characters with a pattern different from that of the super reach are displayed in addition to the decorative symbol. This is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of anticipation. Two types of premium reach, PR1 and PR2, are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time differs depending on the type of premium reach. Then, in the case of premium reach PR1, "FF15" or "FD15" is set as the fluctuation pattern command. For premium reach PR2, "FF16" or "FD16" is set.

In addition, "FF10" or "FD10" is set as the variation pattern command according to the mode for the variation pattern command corresponding to "complete deviation" that does not reach any reach state. In the present embodiment, the variable display time that is completely out of alignment is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and the latent mode, and "6 seconds" in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode.

Further, the sub control device 262 determines the stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command and displays it after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, such as a combination of probabilistic jackpot symbols, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of front / rear off symbols, a combination of symbols other than front / rear off, and a completely out of design. It specifies five categories of combinations of. These categories are indicated by, for example, "AA11", "AA12", "AA13", "AA14", and "AA15", and any one of them is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbol in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 stops and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol commands.

Hereinafter, the classification of the stop symbol and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described. If you win a probability variable jackpot (“16RS” and “8RS”; hereinafter also referred to as “probability variation jackpot with balls”) where you can expect an increase in the number of game balls, or when you win a normal jackpot (“8RN”” where you can expect an increase in the number of game balls. (Hereinafter, also referred to as "normal jackpot with balls"), the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays the decorative symbol with a number pattern in a doublet combination. It becomes. In the present embodiment, in the case of "probability change jackpot with balls", the probability variation jackpot symbol, which is a combination of decorative symbols consisting of odd numbers of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, or 2 , 4, 6, 8 The variable display is stopped and displayed in any combination of the normal jackpot symbols, which is a combination of even-numbered doublets, and in the case of "normal jackpot with balls" , Normally, the variable display will be stopped and displayed by the combination of jackpot symbols.

Then, "AA11" is set in the symbol command in the case of a probable change jackpot with a payout, and "AA12" is set in the symbol command in the case of a normal jackpot with a payout. Then, when "AA11" is set in the symbol command, the sub control device 262 determines one of the combinations of symbols consisting of doublets 1 to 9 as a stop symbol, and determines "AA12". Is set, one of the combinations of symbols consisting of doublets 2, 4, 6 and 8 is determined as a stop symbol.

The combination of front and rear off symbols corresponds to the "front and back off reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one to the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and corresponds to the combination of front and rear off symbols. "AA13" is set for the symbol command. In the present embodiment, the stop mode corresponding to "2RS", "2RN", and "small hit" is also a combination of front and rear off symbols. The combination of symbols other than the front and back deviation corresponds to the "reach other than the front and rear deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the combination of the symbols other than the front and rear deviation corresponds to the symbol. "AA14" is set in the command. The combination of completely out-of-design symbols corresponds to "completely out-of-order" in which even reach does not occur, and "AA15" is set for the symbol command corresponding to the combination of completely out-of-order symbols. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays the combination of the front / rear off symbols, the combination of the symbols other than the front / rear off, and the combination of the completely out of place symbols, it is "off".

As will be described in detail later, when "AA13" to "AA15" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. To be determined as. In this embodiment, three commands "AA13" to "AA15" are prepared as the symbol commands for disengagement, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, there is only one type of symbol command for disengagement. The sub-control device 262 may be configured to determine the combination of decorative symbols.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (59, 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, the special display control process is executed. In this process, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are controlled, and the jackpot determination and the setting of the variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. The details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, the first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control is performed with respect to the first variable winning device 32a. In the present embodiment, when a winning or losing lottery based on a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a is won, a big hit state or a small hit state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened is derived. There is. The details of the first variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the second variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control is performed with respect to the second variable winning device 32b. In the present embodiment, when a winning or losing lottery based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b is won, a big hit state or a small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is derived. There is. The details of this second variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S208, the normal display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this normal display control process will be described later.

In step S209, the start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the start winning unit 33 is performed. The details of this start winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S211, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (4 msec in this example). ) Has passed or not. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counters CINI and the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (step S212, step S213).

That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

Further, in step S213, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to the step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and the value varies as well. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

Further, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), the power supply is cut off, so that the process after step S214 is performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. Will be. In the power failure processing, first, the generation of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S215, and the value of the stack pointer is backed up in the backup area 503a in step S216. Remember in.

After that, in step S217, a power off notification command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S218 and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, RAM access is prohibited in step S219, and an infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

The process of step S210 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in steps S201 to S209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than that in the case where each processing is in progress. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S214), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and it is possible to reliably store the state before the power is cut off. ..

Next, the special display control process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, the hit situation storage area described later is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not the player is in a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state at present. During the jackpot state, the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R until the first or second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are opened, and A round period in which the first or second variable winning devices 32a, 32b are in the open state, an interval period in which the first or second variable winning devices 32a, 32b are closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started. During the small hit state, the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R until the first or second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are opened, and A round period in which the first or second variable winning devices 32a, 32b are in the open state, an interval period in which the first or second variable winning devices 32a, 32b are closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started.

In the hit situation storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state, and in the big hit state or the small hit state, "1" is stored in the opening period and the interval period. , "2" is stored during the round period, and "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the player is in the big hit state or the small hit state. It should be noted that it is for convenience that numerical values such as "0" to "3" are stored in the hit situation storage area, and actually, the hit situation storage area uses 2 bytes.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if a big hit state or a small hit state is in progress, the present process is terminated as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the details will be described later in step S802. By observing the setting status of the special figure display flag, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed by the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42). Specifically, when the special map display flag is on, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special map display flag is off, it is considered to be in stop display, which corresponds to the state in which variable display is stopped. .. As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are turned on. The variable display is turned off when it is stopped and displayed.

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if the player is not in the big hit state or the small hit state and is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S803, and the ball is entered into the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb, which counts the number of holds in the variable display (second variable display), is larger than 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if even one second variation display is reserved and stored, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S804. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is reserved and stored by the determination process in step S803, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. That is, even if the first variation display is stored earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is prioritized and digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

In the following step S805, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the second special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is the process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd in order. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. After step S805, in step S806, a process of causing the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. After that, in step S807, the variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no second variation display is reserved and stored, the variation display triggered by the entry into the first start winning device 33a in step S808 (in step S808). It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na, which counts the number of holds in the first variation display), is larger than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S808, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S809. In the following step S810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd in order. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. After step S810, in step S811, a process of causing the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. After that, the variable display setting process is performed in step S807, and then this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is one, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area is used when performing the fluctuation display based on the data. In addition, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, the mode storage area described later is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (probability variation mode or latency mode). In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, any one of "11", "12", "21", and "22" is stored in the mode storage area, and "11" corresponds to the normal mode and is "12". Corresponds to the time reduction mode, "21" corresponds to the probabilistic mode, and "22" corresponds to the latent mode. That is, in the step S901, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state by determining whether or not "21" or "22" is stored in the mode storage area.

In the case of affirmative determination in step S901, that is, in the high probability state (probability variation mode, latency mode), in step S902, the hit / miss random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation hold area is taken into consideration, and the first step is made. It is determined whether or not either the 1st or the 2nd hit / miss flag (see the hit / miss determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, in a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the hit / miss random number storage area is taken into consideration, and whether the first hit / miss flag is on. Determine if not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, the jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is turned on. In this embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the jackpot state in the hit / miss random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

In the following step S905, whether or not the second fluctuation flag is set to ON in consideration of the fluctuation storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, that is, the fluctuation display performed this time is displayed to the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not it is the second variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the 16RS flag (see the type determination process of FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to ON in step S906 in consideration of the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. Determine if it has been done.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if it is "16RS", the 16RS pattern setting process (process for setting the variation pattern command and the symbol command) is performed in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the occurrence of "16RS", and is special based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. The fluctuation pattern (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variable type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variable type counter CS2 and the variable time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S931, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If the affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is "8RS", the 8RS pattern setting process is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S931.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S908, it is determined in step S910 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S910, the 2RN30 pattern setting process is performed in step S911. After step S911, the process proceeds to step S931.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S912, 2RN60 pattern setting processing is performed in step S913. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S931.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the 2RN90 flag is set to ON, the 2RN90 pattern setting process is performed in step S914. After step S914, the process proceeds to step S931.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S905, that is, when the variation display performed this time is the first variation display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry into the first start winning device 33a. In step S915, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set on by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If affirmative determination is made in step S915, 16RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S916. After step S916, the process proceeds to step S931 described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S915, it is determined in step S917 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If the affirmative determination is made in step S917, that is, if it is "8RS", the 8RS pattern setting process is performed in step S918. After step S918, the process proceeds to step S931.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether or not the 8RN flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S919, the 8RN pattern setting process is performed in step S920. After step S920, the process proceeds to step S931.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S919, that is, when the 2RS flag is set to ON, the 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S921. After step S921, the process proceeds to step S931.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the hit / miss random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and the first or first or It is determined whether or not the second small hit flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S922, that is, if it is determined that a small hit has been won in the winning / failing lottery in a high probability state, a small amount indicating that the occurrence of the small hit state has been confirmed in step S923. Turn on the winning confirmation flag. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the small hit state in the hit / miss random number storage area is referred to as turning on the small hit confirmation flag. After that, in step S924, the small hit pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S925, the hit / miss random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and the first small Determines if the hit flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S925, that is, if it is determined that a small hit has been won in the winning / failing lottery in a low probability state, the small hit confirmation flag is set to ON in step S923, and the small hit confirmation flag is set in step S924. After performing the small hit pattern setting process, the process proceeds to step S931.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (FIG. 17) It is determined whether or not the reach determination process) is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S926, that is, if the reach is "out of front / rear reach", the process proceeds to step S931 after performing the front / rear reach pattern setting process in step S927.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S926, in step S928, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S928, that is, if the result is “reach other than front / rear deviation”, the reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S929, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S928, that is, if the result is "complete deviation", the deviation fluctuation pattern setting process is performed in step S930, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

In step S931, the special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variation display is being performed by the special display devices 43L and 43R is set to ON. As a result, it is shown that the condition for switching display (variable display) is satisfied in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the following step S932, a special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R is set. The special figure display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

The fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting of the special figure display timer. , The switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the special display device. At the same time as the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by combining the symbols based on the symbol commands. After the end of step S932, the variable display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 and storing it in the special fluctuation holding area, the pass / fail determination process of steps S505 and 513, and the variation display setting. In the processing, the winning / failing lottery is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903, S922, and S925 for determining the winning / failing based on the winning / failing flag and the small hit flag and the situation at that time.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when affirmative determination is made in step S802, that is, when variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S812 to perform subtraction processing of the special figure display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, step S813 is positively determined when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, the switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this process is terminated. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the special display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S814, and the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S815. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, the stop display is performed in the stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, deviation, and the like. Further, a control signal indicating that the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped is also output to the sub control device 262. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the symbol command and the fluctuation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, information on the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 again. There is no need to add. Further, again, the stop display by such special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for staging). There is.

Subsequently, in step S816, after performing the initial setting of the hit state and the discrimination information setting process for measuring the period of the time reduction mode, this process is terminated. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 21.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set by referring to the hit / miss random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, in step S1002, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set to ON.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1002, "16" is set in the round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) in step S1003. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether or not the 2RS flag or the 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set to ON.

When a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, when the 8RS flag or the 8RN flag is set to ON, “8” is set in the round number counter in step S1005. After step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, "1" is set for the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1007, the value "2000" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set for the special variable timer used for the control during the hit state (open / close control of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b). Set. Subsequently, in step S1008, eight balls, which is the maximum number of balls entered per round, are set against the winning counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b. Set the indicated "8". The value of the winning counter indicates whether or not the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b have been hit by the first and second count switches 223a during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing. , 223b is determined based on the detection information, and when it is determined that the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b have been hit, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information on the hit type, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state. After step S1009, this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the jackpot state, promotion of the appearance jackpot type, etc. (for example, when an even number of doublets is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, "8RS" or "16RS" is won in the jackpot state immediately after. You may teach that you have done this, or if the odd number of doublets is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, you may teach that you won "16RS" in the jackpot state immediately after that). ..

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the hit is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, the hit / miss random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the small hit confirmation flag is set to ON.

If an affirmative determination is made (small hit) in step S1010, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1004 (“2RS” or “2RN”), the round number counter is set to “2” in step S1011. To set. After step S1011, in step S1012, "1" is set for the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1013, the value "500" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 2 seconds is set for the special variable timer, "8" is set for the winning counter in step S1014, and the opening in step S1015. Set the command. After that, this process ends.

Further, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit and a negative determination is made in step S1010, whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area in step S1016, that is, the time reduction mode. Determine if it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1016, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S1016, the value of the fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1017 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state of "8RN", "2RN30", "2RN60", and "2RN90", the fluctuation display corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is displayed for the fluctuation count counter. The number of times is set, and each time the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in the step S1010.

In the following step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is still lined at the end degree of the hit state. If not, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1018, "11" indicating that the mode is in the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1019. That is, the time reduction mode ends when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After step S1019, in step S1020, a time saving end command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the process of initializing the small hit state and the process of initializing the 2RS and 2RN jackpot states are common, but they may be performed separately.

Next, the first variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is a state other than the big hit state and the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the player is not in the big hit state or the small hit state, the present process is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, "1" is set in the hit status storage area in the above-mentioned discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when a big hit state or a small hit state is in progress (when any of "1" to "3" is set in the hit situation storage area), step S1202 In, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuation flag is turned on in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203, and the value of the special variable timer is decremented by 1. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, "2000" or "500" is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

In the following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not "1" is set in the hit situation storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, "2" is set for the hit status storage area in step S1206. In the following step S1207, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. Here, one of "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN", which is a big hit with a payout that can be given when winning in the winning / losing lottery performed when the ball enters the first starting winning device 33a. Whether or not there is (whether or not it is other than "2RS") is determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a is set for the special variable timer. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1207, the value "100" corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a with respect to the special variable timer in step S1209. To set.

After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, a process for opening the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1211, a round for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start the round is transmitted. Set the command. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined whether or not "3" is set in the hit situation storage area in step S1212. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are completed and the ending period is started, "3" is set for the hit situation storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is not the time to end the big hit state or the small hit state, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1213.

In the following step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there is still a round to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1215, and "1" is set for the hit status storage area. After that, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S1216, the value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set for the special variable timer in step S1217. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer in step S1218.

After step S1217 or step S1218, in step S1219, "8" is set for the winning counter. Further, in step S1220, a process of closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1221, an interval command for transmitting information to the effect that the interval is started is set to the sub control device 262. After that, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, if there is time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or closed state of the first variable winning device 32a, the process proceeds to step S1222. , It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 32a is "0". The winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state and the start of the interval. Then, every time one game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a, one is subtracted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1222, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, that is, if the opportunity to end the round arrives without waiting for the elapse of the round setting period, the process proceeds to step S1213. As a result, if eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round will end promptly at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1214, that is, when all the rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are digested, the process proceeds to step S1223, and "3" is set for the hit situation storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. If the affirmative determination is made in step S1224, the value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer in step S1225. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1224, the value "250" corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer in step S1226.

After step S1225 or step S1226, in step S1227, "7" is set for the winning counter. When the process of setting the ending after step S1223 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is "0". Then, if the value of the winning counter is set to "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1222 in the first variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period may be completed. Can not. Therefore, by inputting a provisional numerical value other than "0" ("7" in this example) to the winning counter in step S1227, the ending period is completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1227, in step S1228, a process of closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in the following step S1229, an ending command for transmitting information to the effect that the ending is started is set to the sub control device 262. .. After that, this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1212, that is, when the ending period ends and the time to end the jackpot state comes, the process proceeds to step S1230 and the end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area is set and the fluctuation count counter is set.

Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the small hit confirmation flag is set on by referring to the hit / miss random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the 8RN flag is set to ON.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1403. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step S1404, "90" is set for the fluctuation count counter. The fluctuation count counter completes the fluctuation display for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for grasping that. After step S1404, in step S1415, a time saving start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 to start the time saving mode is set. After that, this process ends.

Further, when the negative determination is made in step S1402, in step S1405, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the 2RN90 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1403 as in the case where the 8RN flag is set to ON.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S1406, "12" is set in the mode storage area in step S1407, "60" is set for the fluctuation count counter in step S1408, and the time saving start command is set in step S1415. After setting, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S1409, "12" is set in the mode storage area in step S1410, "30" is set for the fluctuation count counter in step S1411, and the time saving start command is set in step S1415. After setting, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1412 whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, "22" is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. As a result, the latent mode is given after the jackpot state ends. After step S1413, in step S1416, a latent start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 to start the latent mode is set. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1412, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the probability change mode is given after the jackpot state ends. After step S1414, in step S1417, a probability change start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 to start the probability change mode is set. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after step S1230, in step S1231, "0" indicating that the hit situation storage area is not in the big hit state or the small hit state is set. After that, in step S1232, a hit end command for transmitting information to the effect that the big hit state or the small hit state is terminated is set to the sub control device 262, and then this process is terminated. The hit end command includes information on the number of times of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

In the second variable winning device control process in step S207 of the normal process (see FIG. 10), basically, the target of the open / close control is the second variable winning device 32b with respect to the first variable winning device control process. It is executed when the second fluctuation flag is set to ON, and the only difference is that it determines whether it is 16RS or 8RS when determining whether it is a big hit with a ball, so the explanation is omitted. do.

Next, the normal display control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the flag for displaying the normal map, which indicates whether or not the variable display is being displayed on the normal symbol display device 41, is on. When the flag for displaying a normal figure is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable value.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if no variation display of the normal symbol is reserved, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2103.

In the following step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area, and so on.

After that, in step S2105, the normal symbol fluctuation setting process for setting and starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 41 is executed.

Here, the normal map fluctuation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S2301, the flag displaying the normal symbol indicating that the normal symbol is being variablely displayed in the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In the following step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the state is other than the big hit state or the small hit state at present. If the affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if neither the big hit state nor the small hit state is obtained, whether or not the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303. That is, it is determined whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is set to the normal symbol display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41. Set "100" to 0.4 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is “0”. In the high-entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", is "1 to 99".

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is won, it is determined that the ball entry support lottery was won in step S2306. Turn on the incoming ball support flag to indicate. After step S2306, or when affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in a big hit state, a small hit state, or a low ball entry state, in step S2307, the normal symbol is displayed with respect to the normal symbol. Set "2000" to set the variable display time of to 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is “1”. In the low ball entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", is "1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the ball entry support lottery is won, the ball entry support flag indicating that the ball entry support lottery is won is set on in step S2309. After step S2309 or when a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2105, this process ends. If a control signal to start the variation display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the setting in the normal symbol variation setting process, the normal symbol display device is used. At 41, the variable display is started. As described above, the ordinary symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "×" as an ordinary symbol, and if the displayed "○" is "×", "×". If so, it is switched (variable) to "○" and displayed.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when the fluctuation display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2106 to subtract the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal map display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal map display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the flag for displaying the normal map is turned off in step S2108, and the normal map stop display setting for displaying the stop on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, if it is a win (when the ball entry support flag is set to ON), the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, it lights only for a few seconds), and if it is not, "×" is displayed. Stop and display the design.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the normal figure discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process is terminated. Here, the normal map discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is set on.

In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not either "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. If affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 4 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (residual time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set "1000" to the second.

Further, in step S2405, "3" is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (remaining number of times) the second start winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, in step S2408, the entry support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the flag during the support period is turned on. Further, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state, and then this process is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, when the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "100". Subsequently, in step S2407, "1" is set for the opening number counter to open the second start winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be open. This process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, the switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2111, and this process is performed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", it is switched to "x", and if it is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the timing of the normal display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms.

Next, the start winning device control process in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the flag is on during the support period. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the value of the normal variable timer is usually subtracted by 1 in step S2202. In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the normally variable flag is on. When the affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, when the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the opening time of the predetermined second start winning device 33b has not yet elapsed, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205 and the normally variable flag is turned off. In the following step S2206, the value of the open count counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S2207, the second start winning device 33b is set to be closed.

After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the open count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the support period flag is turned off in step S2209, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning ball support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times based on the result. If there is a remaining number of times, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, "100") is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the interval period is between the second start winning device 33b being opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normally variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, if the interval period has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value corresponding to the open time (“1000” in this example) is set for the normal variable timer in step S2213. In step S2214, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the receive interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting a command transmitted from the main control device 261 when the payout control device 311 receives the command. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the payout control device 311 waits for another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the receive interrupt process is executed. When the receive interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3001 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in order to store the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3002. Turn on the command reception flag to end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

In the present embodiment, the command reception process transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received, but is shown in FIG. 30, for example. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may be shifted to the command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First of all, in step S3101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, the external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, does the RAM determination value match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off? Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup error is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process of initializing the RAM 513 after step S3115 is performed. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, on condition that the power cutoff occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the processing at the time of power restoration (at the time of power failure recovery). Process) is executed. That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored, in step S3110, the power cut occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of the prize ball is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set, the power supply is cut off, so that the process after step S3123 is performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127, and the backup area 513a is calculated. The RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In the process of step S3122, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is larger than that in the case where each process is in progress. It is less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control unit 261 is acquired, and the determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 31.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of the command read from the RAM 513 in the processes of steps S3304 to S3306 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305, whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306, whether it is a prize ball command. Whether or not it is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main control unit is turned on when the power is turned on. Since the control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the initialization timing being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the harmful effects of. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be surely set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed with the payout permission flag turned on, the prize balls will not be paid out if they remain. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being inflicted with a loss.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power is cut off. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on in order to allow the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the number of prize balls received in step S3310 is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , The payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of the prize ball. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command instructing the payout of the prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out at an early stage for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command judgment process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the flow chart of FIG. 30 will be returned to the description. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this process ends as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state is determined when the state return operation is started. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, the payout motor is jammed, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state). ..

After that, in step S3205, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower plate 15 is full, the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set and the lower plate is not full. , Execute the setting of the lower plate full tank release state. Further, in step S3206, the setting of the tank ball-less state (ball out state) or the tank ball-less release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, the special state without a tank ball, the setting without a tank ball is executed, the special state without a tank ball disappears, and the state without a tank ball is released. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is made.

Subsequently, the payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, the payout quantity setting process is performed in step S3208, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibe motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a jammed state. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

In the following step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed in which the information of the starting command output from the main control device 261 is stored in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553. As described above, the starting command indicates whether the variable display is triggered by the entry of the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b, and indicates whether the variable information corresponds to the jackpot. Information, information indicating the jackpot type, and information indicating the reach type are included.

The hold information storage area includes a first hold information storage area and a second hold information storage area each having four hold areas (hold 1st to hold 4 areas), similarly to the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. It has one execution area. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a jackpot is made, whether it is a big hit type, or whether it is a small hit, according to the reception history of the starting command based on the first fluctuation display (information stored in the first special fluctuation hold area). Information on whether or not, and information on fluctuation display such as reach type (variation information) are stored in chronological order. Further, in the second hold information storage area, change information is stored in time series according to the reception history of the starting command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the fluctuation information regarding the first variation display triggered by the entry into the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by the entry into the second start winning device 33b. It is possible to hold and store four fluctuation information about each. As a result, not only the execution area of the first and second special fluctuation holding areas of the main control device 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in the holding area can be grasped by the sub control device 262. ..

Hereinafter, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. 35. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S4101, is the starting command corresponding to the entry into the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area) in step S4102? Determine if not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the winning ball of the first starting winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special fluctuation holding area), in step S4103. , The first variable hold counter Nd, which counts the number of variable information held in the first hold information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step S4104, information on whether or not the starting command is a big hit, information on the type of big hit, information on whether or not it is a small hit, information on the reach type, and the like are stored in the vacant hold area of the first hold information storage area. Remember in the first area.

Further, in the following step S4105, the advance notice information storage process is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a staging display related to each other is intentionally derived (so-called "continuous notice" is performed) in a plurality of continuous variable displays. Here, the value of the continuous advance notice counter for determining whether or not to perform continuous advance notice and the value of the advance notice type counter for determining the type of continuous advance notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information storage. Of the areas, the fluctuation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

The continuous warning counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 49), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The continuous advance notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous advance notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous advance notice counter buffer) each time.

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, reaches an upper limit value (that is, 9), and then returns to 0, which is a lower limit value. The notice type counter is updated periodically, and the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer) each time.

Then, when the fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area in the advance notice information storage process, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is to be derived.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice adequacy determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give a continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the mode of the continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice pass / fail determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice pass / fail determination table and the advance notice table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the fluctuation information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first holding lamps 46a that is in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost one among the four first holding lamps 46a that are extinguished) is turned on. Make it a state. The first holding lamp 46a of the present embodiment emits blue light. In the following step S4107, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed, and then this process is terminated.

In the continuous advance notice lottery process of step S4107, when the value of the first variable hold counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, Refer to the advance notice hit / fail judgment table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type, and game mode, and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode is based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first reserved information storage area. Refer to and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag of all the holding areas in which the fluctuation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area is turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area). , Step S4108, and the second variable hold counter Ne, which counts the number of variable information held in the second reserved information storage area, is incremented by one.

After that, in step S4109, information on whether or not the starting command is a big hit, information on the type of big hit, information on whether or not it is a small hit, information on the reach type, and the like are stored in a vacant hold area in the second hold information storage area. Store in the first area of the. In the following step S4110, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the hold area in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in step S4109 of the second hold information storage area.

After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second hold lamps 46b in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost of the four second lamps 46b that are extinguished) is turned on. And. The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light. In the following step S4112, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed, and this process is terminated. The continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4112 only makes the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4107 correspond to the entry into the second start winning device 33b, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, if a negative determination is made after step S3903 or in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3912.

In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper / middle / lower upper / middle / lower symbols used for setting the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of a big hit and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (big hit symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped when the jackpot state occurs, and in the present embodiment, it is used as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. Is prepared with 9 (0 to 8) counter values. That is, the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of a big hit is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, reach the upper limit value (that is, 8), and then return to 0.

When the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is "AA11" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stopped, it is based on a table (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) that is not shown. For example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1" (doublet), if it is 1, it is "2" (doublet), and so on. The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub control device 262 receives the symbol command, as will be described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. You may do it.

Further, when the symbol command is "AA12" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is "2" (doublet), and if it is 2 to 4. Determine the combination of jackpot symbols, such as "4" (doublet), "6" (doublet) for 5, 6 and "8" (doublet) for 7,8. ..

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / failing lottery is missed. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. .. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the front-rear reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front-rear, and the complete. It is stored in one of the outlier symbol buffers.

Here, the update processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4001. Further, when the upper symbol counter CL is updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4002. Then, if the update time of the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the middle symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Further, if the update time of the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the CL, CM, CR update process, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. As a result, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined and it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), and in step S4007, whether or not the combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). To determine. If affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is terminated as it is without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front-back and out-of-order symbols. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear out-of-bounds symbols (front and back out reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is before and after the RAM 553. It is stored in the out-of-reach symbol buffer, and this process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of symbols other than front and rear deviation (reach other than front and rear deviation) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is performed. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the front and rear deviations of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

Further, when the combination is other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the out-of-design counters CL, CM, and CR is the out-of-design (completely out-of-design) combination. The combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at the time is stored in the completely missing symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, the hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received (whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored on hold, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first fluctuation hold counter Nd is subtracted by 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is reserved and stored, the first variation display is digested. There is no such thing. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is reserved and stored in the second reserved information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0", the fluctuation pattern command displays the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. Which of the fluctuation information is possessed is determined. Of course, the fluctuation pattern command is provided with information on which of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation information corresponds to, and the fluctuation pattern command is based on the fluctuation pattern command and the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. It may be determined which fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is possessed.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the first hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is the hold first area. → Execution area, Hold 2nd area → Hold 1st area, Hold 3rd area → Hold 2nd area, Hold 4th area → Hold 3rd area, and so on.

In the following step S4205, one of the lit first hold lamps 46a (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first hold lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, when even one fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is reserved and stored, the value of the second fluctuation holding counter Ne is subtracted by 1 in step S4206.

In the following step S4207, a process of shifting the data stored in the second reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the second hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold second. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. In the present embodiment, the reserved information storage area has only one execution area, and the data stored in the first reserved information storage area and the second reserved information storage area are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the data. When it is done, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

In the following step S4208, one of the lit second hold lamps 46b (for example, the rightmost one of the lit second hold lamps 46b) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

In step S4209, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107) of the execution area of the reserved information storage area is on, and if it is negatively determined, the continuous notice is given. Is not performed, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative judgment is made, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, what is the type, and if it is not a big hit, what is the reach type, etc., based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. , Refer to the corresponding table to determine the type of continuous notice. The continuous notice of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing in the corresponding variation display. After step S4209, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display. Therefore, when a continuous notice is given regarding the first variation display a plurality of times, the first variation is displayed. If there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b during the display variation display, the second variation display may interrupt between the plurality of first variation displays, and the continuous advance notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the staging used as the continuous notice is a display staging that can be derived even in the case of a normal variable display when the continuous notice is not performed (a staging that can be derived for a single variable display). Is used. Therefore, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, no discomfort will occur.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, the display setting process is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol, and the like, and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command is performed.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is designed in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses. The variable display of is continued.

Further, when starting the variation display, when the continuous advance notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4105) is on, each situation is based on the variation information of the variation pattern command. With reference to the table corresponding to, the type of continuous advance notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of the advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or something. Further, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process of performing effect control during a big hit or a small hit (hit display process) is also performed, which will be described later.

In the lamp setting process of step S3908, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the voice setting process of step S3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3909.

In step S3910, control settings for a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses without variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42; energy saving mode), etc. Process.

In step 3911, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents of steps S3905 to 3910 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

After the processes of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 2 msec are executed, or if a negative determination is made in the above step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3912, and whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. To determine. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3913, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, the power-off process is executed in step S3914. In the power off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased. After executing the power off processing, the processing loops infinitely.

Next, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command indicating the start of a big hit state or a small hit state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, "16" is set for "16RS" based on the information included in the opening command for the round grasping counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds. Set, set "8" for "8RS" and "8RN", and set "2" for "2RS", "2RN" and "small hit".

After that, in step S4703, if there is a big hit with a ball, the opening effect is set for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the setting of the lighting mode of various lamps), and then this process is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like for storing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various production modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding production can be performed with reference to the table. You will have to select and execute it.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an interval command has been received in step S4704. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if there is a big hit with a ball, a maximum of 30 seconds is set for the effect during the round, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if there is a big hit with a ball in step S4708, the effect is set during the 4-second interval, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received in step S4709. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if there is a big hit with a ball in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then this process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit or a small hit other than the big hit with a ball, the opening period (2 seconds), the round period (0.4 seconds), the interval period (1 second), and the ending period ( Instead of setting the production by dividing it into each period such as 1 second), the setting is made so that the production (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not a hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4712, the ending display is immediately terminated in step S4713, and the setting is made so that the mode is in the normal gaming state in which the variable display is performed. After that, this process ends.

As described in detail above, according to the first embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is provided with a start winning shutter 405 that opens and closes the starting winning opening 402, and the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position. In some cases, the starting winning opening 402 is closed, and the game ball cannot be entered into the starting winning opening 402. For this reason, conventionally, the game ball whose entry to the start winning opening 402 is refused by the starting winning shutter 405 is not directly entered into the starting winning opening 402, but is placed on the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b. It will flow down. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second starting winning device 33b is set in the introduction path 412 and the introduction path 412 where the game ball whose entry to the starting winning opening 402 is refused by the starting winning shutter 405 is guided. It is equipped with a re-entry path 414 that guides the guided game ball to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402, and even if the entry to the starting winning opening 402 is once refused, the entry to the starting winning opening 402 will be performed again later. It is configured so that you can try to enter the ball.

Therefore, among the game balls hit right to enter the start winning opening 402 of the second starting winning device 33b in the high entry state in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the starting winning opening 402 is entered. The number of game balls to be played and the number of game balls restricted by the start winning shutter 405 and excluded from the discharge opening 411 to the outside of the second start winning device 33b without entering the starting winning opening 402. In terms of ratio, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the starting winning opening 402 can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the high-entry state, the start winning shutter 405 is set to the open position almost all the time (if the right-handed ball is continuously hit), so that almost all the right-handed game balls are started. The ball is designed to enter the winning opening 402.

As a result, the game ball launched in the game area to enter the starting winning opening 402 can be efficiently entered into the starting winning opening 402, and the ball launched aiming at the starting winning opening 402 can be entered. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls that cannot be reached as much as possible, and to suppress a situation in which a large number of game balls need to be fired in order to enter the starting winning opening 402. As a result, the burden on the player is reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game (in this example, even if one ball is paid out for entering the starting winning opening 402). Regardless of the high ball entry state, it is possible to play without reducing the number of game balls on hand), and the game balls can be efficiently entered into the starting winning opening 402 to play the game. It is possible to proceed in a pleasant manner (the hold of the variable display is not cut off, and the tempo of the variable display can be increased).

Further, in general, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the open position, the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the second start winning device 33b, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the second start winning shutter 405 is launched. By performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching the game ball at the timing reaching the start winning device 33b, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the start winning opening 402. On the other hand, even if there are a player who performs such a technical operation and a player who does not perform such a technical operation, and the number of game balls entered into the second start winning device 33b is the same per predetermined time, There is a concern that there will be a difference in the number of game balls fired, and in the long run, there is a risk that there will be a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls acquired by the player. Furthermore, in the development of the pachinko machine 10 and the like, the design was made based on the actual situation in the game hall and the like, and the ratio of the total number of launched game balls to the total number of paid out game balls (so-called). The payout rate) is designed to include the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players performing the above technical operations increases, the probability of winning such as a winning / losing lottery is lowered or various types of game balls are paid out in order to prevent the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the players. There is a tendency for the game ball to reach the winning opening and reduce the possibility of entering the ball, which may increase the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation. For these reasons, there is probably a sense of unfairness between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the second start winning device 33b when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball enters the start winning opening 402. Since there is a possibility of a ball, even if the game ball is continuously fired, the generation of a waste ball that does not enter the starting winning opening 402 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the acquired game ball between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical disparity of the players and reduce or eliminate the feeling of unfairness with the players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well, or do not intentionally). can. In addition, even for a player who always pays attention to the fact that it will be a loss if the above technical operation is not performed, the player can play the game without worrying about such a thing. , You can proceed with the game more easily.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second starting winning device 33b, a guide stand 407 for guiding the game ball to the starting winning opening 402 from a substantially fixed direction is provided on the upstream side of the starting winning opening 402, and the game area is provided. A game nail or an accessory provided on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b is configured to guide the game ball that has been hit to the right to the guide table 407. As a result, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball are adjusted before the game ball reaches the upper position of the starting winning opening 402, and the moving direction and movement of the game ball entering the upper position of the starting winning opening 402. Irregularities related to speed can be reduced. Therefore, when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball whose entry to the starting winning opening 402 is refused by the starting winning shutter 405 is made to wrap around the introduction path 412 and the re-entry entry path 414. It is possible to provide an opportunity to bring the game ball to an upper position of the starting winning opening 402 at a later timing, and to further secure the action effect such as improving the probability of entering the starting winning opening 402.

Further, since the start winning shutter 405 is configured to slide in the front-rear direction, the starting winning opening 402 can be smoothly entered into the starting winning opening 402 by the action of the game ball falling. It is possible to realize a ball entry. In addition, the game ball can be guided to the introduction path 412 on the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405. That is, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the start winning shutter 405 can guide the game ball to the introduction path 412, so that the game ball can be guided to the introduction path 412. It is not necessary to separately provide the members of the above, and it is possible to simplify the configuration, suppress the increase in size, suppress the increase in cost, and the like.

Further, for example, when the start winning shutter extending back and forth is rotated upward to open the starting winning opening 402, the game ball thought to have entered the starting winning opening 402 is launched to the start winning shutter to the outside. It is possible to avoid a situation where the person is blown away. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the start winning shutter extending back and forth is rotated downward to open the starting winning opening 402, even when a large number of game balls fall on the starting winning shutter at one time and the starting winning shutter is opened. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is opened and enters the starting winning opening 402 even though it is not present.

Further, the starting winning shutter 405 that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the game ball when in the closed position tends to be relatively heavily burdened, but as in the present embodiment, the starting winning shutter 405 By configuring the front end portion of the lower surface to be supported by the opening peripheral edge portion of the starting winning opening 402, it is possible to reduce the burden on the root portion side of the starting winning shutter 405, and the starting winning shutter 405 is the root portion. It is possible to prevent a situation where the product breaks on the side. In addition, a reinforcing rib 409 is provided on the lower surface side of the starting winning shutter 405 to improve the strength of the starting winning shutter 405 and prevent the starting winning shutter 405 from being damaged when a game ball collides. can do.

Further, in the big hit state or the small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, the ball is in a low ball entry state, it is difficult to win the ball entry support lottery, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, and the ball is entered. Even if the support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b (starting winning shutter 405) is almost closed due to the short time that the second starting winning device 33b is opened, and most of the game balls are in the open state. It will go through the introduction route 412 and the re-entry route 414. On the other hand, for example, when the second variable winning device 32b is on the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, the game ball passes through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry entry path 414, so that the second variable winning device of the game ball is used. The approach to 32b is delayed. In particular, in the re-entry route of the game ball from the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 via the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414, even if the position is above the starting winning opening 402. Even so, if the re-entry routes intersect, the game balls will come into contact with each other on the start winning shutter 405, which is a closed position above the starting winning opening 402, and the residence time will become longer. Therefore, the second variable winning device 32b may make it difficult for the game ball to enter. In this respect, by arranging the second variable winning device 32b on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, it is possible to smoothly enter the second variable winning device 32b. Further, by reducing the number of game balls that enter the second start winning device 33b (the start winning shutter 405 prevents the ball from entering the starting winning opening 402), the burden on the starting winning shutter 405 can be reduced. can. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being congested in the second start winning device 33b during the jackpot state and the flow from becoming poor, and it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize such an unsightly mode. ..

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b has a feature, and the feature portion will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted and the same member names and member numbers will be used.

The second variable winning device 32b is provided on the front side of the mounting plate 431 mounted on the front side of the game board 30 and is provided on the front side of the mounting plate 431 and opens upward between the mounting plate 431 (FIG. 42). A ball receiving member 433 forming (see), a rectangular flat plate-shaped large winning shutter 434 as an opening / closing member for opening / closing the large winning opening 432, and a solenoid 435 for the large winning opening that drives the opening / closing of the large winning shutter 434 (FIG. 42). See) and. Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the mounting plate 431 is formed with a communication hole 436 that allows the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 432 to pass through, and the game ball is connected to the communication hole 436. A winning passage 437 is provided to guide the game board 30 to the rear surface side (discharge passage portion 217). The count switch 223b is provided so as to be able to detect a game ball passing through the winning passage 437. Further, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening 432 corresponds to the specific winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 42, the large winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction. When the solenoid for the big prize opening 435 is in the non-excited state, the big prize opening shutter 434 projects toward the game area side and closes the big winning opening 432. On the other hand, when the solenoid for the big prize opening 435 is in the exemplary state, the big prize opening shutter 434 slides so as to be located behind the front surface of the mounting plate 431, and the big winning opening 432 is opened. ing.

Further, when the large winning shutter 434 is in the closed position in which the second variable winning device 32b is closed, the large winning shutter 434 regulates the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 432. Since the grand prize shutter 434 of the embodiment extends back and forth, the regulated game ball is placed on the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434. As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, at least the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434 is slightly inclined downward to the right. Further, the upper surface of the prize-winning shutter 434 has no step at least in the left-right direction, and is a flat surface in this example. Therefore, the prize-winning to the prize-winning opening 432 is restricted by the prize-winning shutter 434 in the closed position, and the game ball placed on the upper surface of the prize-winning shutter 434 is guided to the upper surface of the prize-winning shutter 434 and moves to the left. Will be done.

Further, when the big prize shutter 434 is set to the open position when the game ball is placed on the big prize shutter 434 in the closed position, all the game balls on the big prize shutter 434 at that time are lowered. It is designed to win a prize in the large prize opening 432.

The upper edge of the left wall portion of the ball receiving member 433 is at the same height as the left side portion of the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434 or at a position lower than the grand prize shutter 434, and is located on the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434. The game ball that reaches the left side of the second variable winning device 32b is discharged to the left side. Further, the upper edge portion (falling prevention means) of the front wall portion of the ball receiving member 433 is located above the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434, and the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434 is the grand prize shutter. It is not located in front of 434.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the game ball is guided to the right end side of the second variable winning device 32b by a game nail or an accessory located on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b. It has become so. That is, the game ball that has moved to just above the second variable winning device 32b falls to the right side, which is a portion on the upstream side of the large winning shutter 434 that tilts to the lower left when the large winning shutter 434 is in the closed position. It is configured to do. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position, the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b is configured to roll from the right side to the left side of the big winning shutter 434.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434 is relatively gentle (for example, 1 degree to 9 degrees), and the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434 is relatively slowly moved to the left. Become. Further, the width of the entrance of the large winning opening 432 of the present embodiment is configured to be as large as possible (for example, 100 mm to 135 mm), and the game ball placed on the upper surface of the large winning shutter 434 in the closed position has a relatively long time. It is designed to be placed on the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434.

Further, the second start winning device 33b of the present embodiment has a shape called a general electronic tulip, unlike the second start winning device 33b of the first embodiment. That is, a pair of blade members 438 are provided adjacent to the left and right sides of the starting winning opening where the game ball can enter. In the present embodiment, when the game nail is arranged at a position directly above the start winning opening of the second start winning device 33b and the blade member 438 is in a closed position extending vertically, (the game nail). There is no room for the game ball to pass between the blade member 438 and the blade member 438), and the starting winning opening is closed, making it impossible to enter the starting winning opening. On the other hand, the blade member 438 is displaced to the open position where it opens outward, so that the game ball can enter the starting winning opening.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the second start winning device 33b is arranged on the upstream side of the game area (lower right area) with respect to the second start winning device 33b. When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, most of the right-handed game balls will enter the second start winning device 33b. Further, when the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state, the game ball that moves to the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b without entering the second starting winning device 33b is the second variable winning device 32b. The structure is such that it is easy to enter the ball (arrangement of game nails arranged in the game area, relative positional relationship between the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, etc.). In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b (the large winning opening) constitutes the specific winning opening, and the large winning shutter 434 constitutes the opening / closing member and the time difference passing opportunity giving means.

As described in detail above, according to the second embodiment, when the large winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is in the closed position, the game ball reaching the second variable winning device 32b is the large winning shutter 434. The prize entry to the grand prize opening 432 is restricted, and the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434 is rolled as it is. Then, when the large winning shutter 434 is set to the open position, the game ball that has been rolling on the large winning shutter 434 will enter the large winning opening 432. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, it is possible to wait for the timing when the big winning shutter 434 is next opened in the state where the ball can be entered in the big winning opening 432. In particular, in the present embodiment, the width in the longitudinal direction of the prize-winning shutter 434, that is, the width in the left-right direction which is the movement direction of the game ball mounted on the prize-winning shutter 434 is configured to be as long as possible, and the inclination is relatively gentle. The game ball guided to the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434 is configured to stay on the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434 as long as possible if the grand prize shutter 434 is not in the open position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the case where the game ball hit to the right is discharged from the out opening 36 without entering the big winning opening 432 while the second variable winning device 32b is opened, and the big winning can be achieved. A game ball launched into the game area to be entered into the mouth 432 can be efficiently entered into the large winning opening 432.

Further, even if the opening time, which is the opening position of the large winning shutter 434, is relatively short, the game ball mounted on the large winning shutter 434 can be entered into the large winning opening 432. That is, when the big prize shutter 434 is closed, the game ball can be placed on the big prize shutter 434, and all of them can be put into the big prize opening 432 by a short opening of the big prize shutter 434. Therefore, it is possible to intensively enter a predetermined number of game balls without lengthening the total opening time of the large winning shutter 434. For example, a game ball is stored on the big prize shutter 434 during the interval of the big hit state, and the big prize shutter 434 is opened at the same time as the start of the round to allow the game ball to enter the big prize opening 432 at once (in an instant). The round end condition (for example, 8 prizes may be achieved) can be achieved. Therefore, time efficiency can be improved.

In addition, the large winning shutter 434 in the closed position that closes the large winning opening 432 of the second variable winning device 32b extends back and forth, and when the large winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the game ball is moved downward. By moving it, you can win a prize in the big prize opening 432. For this reason, for example, the movement / reaction of the game ball until the game ball is won in the big prize opening 432 is more than the case where the big prize shutter extends up and down and the game ball is moved backward to win the big prize opening. It will be faster. Therefore, by setting the large prize shutter 434 in the closed position to the open position, the game ball whose prize is restricted to the large prize opening 432 by the large prize shutter 434 can be won in the large prize opening 432 relatively quickly. Can be done.

Further, the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b due to the game nails or accessories arranged on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b tilts to the lower left, and the right side of the upstream side of the large winning shutter 434. It is designed to be guided to the part of. As a result, the above-mentioned effects such as allowing the game ball to stay on the grand prize shutter 434 for as long as possible can be more reliably achieved.

Further, the large winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state must support the lower surface side of the game ball, which places a heavy burden on receiving the falling game ball. In this respect, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the second variable winning device 32b on the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b as much as the ball enters the second starting winning device 33b. The number of game balls moving toward the target can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the grand prize shutter 434 can be reduced.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43, focusing on the second start winning device 33b, which is a characteristic portion. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted and the same member names and member numbers will be used.

The second variable winning device 32b of the third embodiment is basically the same as the second variable winning device 32b of the first embodiment, and includes a base plate 401, a starting winning opening 402 (not shown in FIG. 43), and a starting winning opening 402 (not shown in FIG. 43). It is provided with a guide stand 407 and a start winning shutter 405. However, the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 are omitted, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball once dropped on the starting winning shutter 405 is discharged to the discharge opening 411 as it is. It has become like.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the guide table 407 is provided with a switching plate 451 that changes its state between an open state that allows the game ball to pass to the starting winning opening 402 side and a closed state that restricts the passage. A rotation shaft 452 is provided on one long side of the switching plate 451 so that the rotation shaft 452 extends back and forth at a position near the tip edge of the guide base 407. A motor 453 (another driving means may be used) is connected to the back surface side of the base plate 401 of the rotating shaft 452.

The switching plate 451 of the present embodiment is closed during the variable display of the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 41, and is opened in the stopped display state. That is, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed position in the variable display of the normal symbol, even if the game ball moves to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402, the starting winning opening 402 is won. Since it is impossible, the game ball is blocked on the upstream side of the starting winning opening 402. Then, when the ball is won in the ball entry support lottery, the change display of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the switching plate 451 is opened, so that the game ball blocked by the switching plate 451 is released. , The ball will enter the open start winning opening 402. If the ball is not won in the ball entry support lottery, the start winning shutter 405 is not opened, so that the ball is discharged from the discharge opening 411.

Further, the second start winning device 33b is formed with an accommodating recess 455 adjacent to the rear of the guide base 407. That is, when the amount of the game ball blocked by the switching plate 451 closed is exceeded a certain amount, the game ball is guided to the accommodating recess 455 on which the game ball is placed. The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 455 is slightly inclined downward toward the guide base 407. Further, in the present embodiment, the switching plate 451 constitutes a time difference passing opportunity giving means (stopper).

As described in detail above, according to the third embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed position, the game ball that has reached the guide base 407 moves as it is on the guide base 407. Even if it jumps out to the upper position of the start winning opening 402, it cannot win the starting winning opening 402 because it is blocked by the starting winning shutter 405 in the closed position. In such a case, according to the present embodiment, the game ball that has fallen on the guide stand 407 is not brought to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 at the normal timing, but the game ball is moved to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402. By delaying the arrival timing, the game ball reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402 when the start winning shutter 405 is not in the closed position, that is, when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the open state. Can be configured. In particular, in the present embodiment, the switching plate 451 that has blocked the game ball by the guide stand 407 is opened at the timing of the stop display of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and the game ball is allowed to flow down. In the ball entry mode, the start winning shutter 405 is almost in the open position at this timing, and the game ball that has been blocked is almost entered into the starting winning opening 402. Therefore, the effect of efficiently entering the game ball launched into the game area to enter the start winning opening 402 is surely achieved.

Further, here, a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44. That is, the second start winning device 33b of this embodiment is provided with a detour passage 456 adjacent to the back side of the guide base 407. The detour passage 456 includes an inlet 457 and an exit 458 that are connected to the guide pedestal 407, respectively, and the inlet 457 is connected to a portion upstream of the guide pedestal 407 from the exit 458.

Further, although the switching plate 459 is also provided in this embodiment, in the switching plate 459 of the present embodiment, the rotation shaft 460 extends vertically in the vicinity of the boundary between the inlet 457 and the exit 458 of the detour passage 456. An open state in which the game ball moving on the guide stand 407 is guided to the downstream side of the guide stand 407 as it is, and a closed state in which the game ball moving on the guide stand 407 is guided to the entrance 457 of the detour passage 456. It is configured to be variable. When the switching plate 459 is in the open state, the game ball that has fallen to the portion on the upstream side of the guide base 407 moves straight down the guide base 407 and moves to the upper position of the start winning opening 402.

On the other hand, when the switching plate 459 is in the closed state, the game ball that has fallen to the upstream portion of the guide stand 407 passes through the detour passage 456 and then moves from the guide stand 407 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402. It will move. That is, the time from when the game ball falls on the guide table 407 until it reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402 is delayed. Also in this example, the switching plate 459 is closed during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 41, and is opened in the stopped display state. In this embodiment, the switching plate 459 and the detour passage 456 constitute a time difference passage opportunity granting means, and the switching plate 459 constitutes a route changing means.

As described above, also in this embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed position, the game ball is started with a slight timing shift (slightly delayed). By configuring the game ball to reach the upper position of the 402, the possibility of winning the game ball in the starting winning opening 402 can be increased.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 55, focusing on the second start winning device 33b, which is a characteristic portion. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted and the same member names and member numbers will be used.

In the fourth embodiment, the configuration other than the second start winning device 33b is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the arrangement of the second start winning device 33b is also the same as that of the first embodiment, and the second start is made. The winning device 33b is arranged on the downstream side of the gaming area with respect to the second variable winning device 32b.

As shown in FIGS. 47, 48, 50, etc., the second start winning device 33b includes a base plate 471 attached to the game board 30, a first specific winning opening, and a first starting winning opening as a second specific winning opening. A first shutter 474 as a first opening / closing member for opening / closing the opening 472 and a second starting winning opening 473, a first opening / closing member for opening / closing the first starting winning opening 472, and a second shutter as a second opening / closing member for opening / closing the second starting winning opening 473. It is equipped with 475. Further, a start winning switch 224b is provided corresponding to each of the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. In the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 are provided. Regardless of which one is won, the same treatment is performed as if the second start winning device 33b had been won (so that the second variable display is suspended).

Further, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are configured to be slidable back and forth, and are in a closed position so as to project into the gaming area and close the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 (FIG. 48, FIG. 50 etc.) and the open position (see FIGS. 49, 51, etc.) that exits the gaming area and opens the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. There is. Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, in the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are integrated and operated by one solenoid 476 (closed position in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53). It can be displaced to the open position). As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first shutter 474 and the opening / closing operation of the second shutter 475 are configured to be exactly the same, and one of the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 is opened. It is configured so that one does not have the situation where the other is closed. Also in this embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are set to the open positions when the ball entry support lottery (opening / closing lottery) performed by the main control device 261 (opening / closing lottery means) is won. It has become. The first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 may be provided individually, and each may be configured to be operated by a solenoid provided individually.

As shown in FIG. 47 and the like, the first starting winning opening 472 is located to the right and above the second starting winning opening 473. Further, in the present embodiment, the second starting winning device 33b includes a connecting passage 477 provided between the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. The connecting passage 477 meanders back and forth and slopes downward to the left. Further, the upper surfaces of the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are also inclined downward to the left. In the present embodiment, when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position when the game ball moves to the upper position of the first start winning opening 472, the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 472 is the first. The game ball is regulated by one shutter 474, and the game ball is guided to the draft communication passage 477 by the upper surface of the first shutter 474.

The game ball that has entered the connecting passage 477 is guided to a position above the second starting winning opening 473 while meandering along the connecting passage 477. At this time, if the second shutter 475 is in the open position, the game ball wins the second start winning opening 473. On the other hand, if the second shutter 475 is in the closed position, the game ball is restricted from winning the second start winning opening 473 by the second shutter 475, and is guided to the left by the upper surface of the second shutter 475. It will be discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the connecting passage 477 constitute the ball entry opportunity granting means. Further, in the present embodiment, the connecting passage 477 corresponds to the second specific entry route.

The connecting passage 477 meandering back and forth in the present embodiment receives the game ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 at the front position of the base plate 471, and then moves the game ball to the rear position of the base plate 471. After moving to the front position of the base plate 471, and further moving the game ball to the rear position of the base plate 471, the second start winning opening 473 in front of the base plate 471. The game ball is guided to the upper position.

Further, a roof member 478 that closes the upper side of the connecting passage 477 is provided so that the game ball cannot enter the connecting passage 477 from the middle. Further, the roof member 478 extends to a position above the second start winning opening 473, whereby basically only the game ball via the connecting passage 477 wins the second starting winning opening 473. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

On the right side of the first start winning opening 472 (first shutter 474), a reception stand 479 that is inclined downward to the left and is connected to the upper surface of the first shutter 474 in the closed position is provided. The game ball that has fallen on the reception stand 479 will be guided to the first start winning opening 472 side. Further, an eaves 481 extending forward from the base plate 471 is provided at a position above the boundary portion between the first shutter 474 and the reception stand 479. The eaves portion 481 is configured such that the upper surface thereof is inclined to the left and right so that the game ball does not stay on the upper surface thereof.

Although not shown, the game ball that has reached the second start winning device 33b by the game nails or accessories arranged on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment is basically a game ball. It is designed to be guided to the reception desk 479 on the right side of the eaves 481 and the eaves 481. Further, a gap through which the game ball can pass is also formed between the eaves portion 481 and the roof member 478, and the game ball may reach the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 through such a gap. be. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, a first start winning opening 472, a second starting winning opening 473, a roof member 478, a reception stand 479, and a front wall portion 480 that closes the front of the eaves portion 481 are provided. The roof member 478, the reception stand 479, the eaves portion 481, and the front wall portion 480 are integrally formed of a transparent resin material.

In addition, for example, in the roof member 478, above the portion of the connecting passage 477 that is connected to the first starting winning opening 472 and guides the game ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 to the rear of the base plate 471. When the portion covering the portion is configured so that the game ball may fall on the upper surface thereof, the upper surface of the portion may be configured to be slightly inclined downward toward the right side.

In addition, the second starting winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment is provided with an assist winning opening 482 protruding forward from the base plate 471 at the upper right side of the eaves portion 481. When a game ball is detected by a detection switch (not shown) that counts the game balls that have entered the assist winning opening 482, three game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15. Due to the presence of the assist winning opening 482, the number of winning openings to be entered when the game ball is launched toward the right side region (striking to the right) increases. Therefore, in the time reduction mode, the game is played without reducing the number of game balls (even if the number of prize balls when entering the second start prize device 33b is less than that of the first start prize device 33a). It can be carried out. Further, in the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, more game balls are acquired (or the winning ball when the ball is entered is the first variable winning ball) as compared with the case where the assist winning opening 482 is not provided. Although it is less than the device 32a, it is possible to make up for it, and even to make it more than possible).

Further, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the assist winning opening 482 and the eaves portion 481. Most or all of the game balls flowing into the lower right region are guided to a position above the assist winning opening 482 by a game nail or the like. Then, the game ball that did not enter the assist winning opening 482 falls and is guided to the eaves 481 or the reception stand 479, and moves to the upper position of the first starting winning opening 472.

As described in detail above, according to the fourth embodiment, when the first shutter 474 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position, it is caused by the fact that the first shutter 474 is in the closed position. Then, the game ball that could not win the first start winning opening 472 is guided to the second starting winning opening 473. Therefore, the game ball that could not enter the first start winning opening 472 will be given an opportunity to try to enter the second starting winning opening 473, and the game ball will be given the second starting winning device 33b ( It is possible to increase the possibility of entering the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473). Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the second start winning device 33b, the number of game balls entering the second start winning device 33b and the number of the game balls reaching the second starting winning device 33b are reached. The ratio of the number of game balls that do not enter the second start winning device 33b can be increased in the ratio of the number of game balls that do not enter the second start winning device 33b. As a result, the game ball launched in the game area to be entered in the second start winning device 33b can be efficiently entered into the second starting winning device 33b, and is launched aiming at the second starting winning device 33b. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the wasted balls that did not reach the ball, and to suppress the situation where it is necessary to launch a large number of game balls in order to enter the second start winning device 33b. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls can efficiently enter the second start winning device 33b. Then, the game can be progressed in a pleasant manner (the game is performed without reducing the number of balls held and without interrupting the fluctuation display (so that the fluctuation starts immediately after the stop display)).

Further, also in the present embodiment, even if the game ball is launched at a timing such that when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position and the game ball reaches the upper position of the first start winning opening 472, the game ball is second-started. Since there is a possibility of entering the winning device 33b, a useless ball that does not enter the second starting winning device 33b (first starting winning opening 472 and second starting winning opening 473) even if the game ball is continuously fired. Will be suppressed. Therefore, the difference between the player who performs the technical operation such as measuring the timing of launching the game ball described in the first embodiment and the player who does not perform the technical operation is reduced. Can be (virtually eliminated). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical disparity of the players and reduce or eliminate the feeling of unfairness with the players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well, or do not intentionally). can. In addition, even for a player who always pays attention to the fact that it will be a loss if the above technical operation is not performed, the player can play the game without worrying about such a thing. , You can proceed with the game more easily.

Further, the reception table 479, the eaves 481, and the game nails and accessories arranged on the upstream side of the first start winning opening 472 are configured to adjust the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball. Has been done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce irregularities regarding the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball entering the position above the first starting winning opening 472. Therefore, when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position, the first shutter 474 sends the game ball to the connecting passage 477 to improve the probability of entering the second starting winning opening 473. Can be made even more reliable.

In addition, by sliding the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 in the front-rear direction, the game ball can be dropped to enter the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. Above, for example, when the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 are closed by the rotating shutter, the game ball that is thought to have entered the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 is It is possible to avoid a situation in which the shutter is launched to the outside and is thrown to the outside.

Further, the game ball that has reached the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 is guided to the connecting passage 477 by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 that is closed. As a result, when the first shutter 474 that opens and closes the first start winning opening 472 is in the closed position, the first shutter 474 can guide the game ball to the communication passage 477, so that the game ball can be guided to the communication passage 477. It is not necessary to separately provide a movable member for guiding to the 477, and it is possible to simplify the configuration, suppress the increase in size, suppress the increase in cost, and the like.

Further, the second start winning opening 473 is configured to be able to enter the ball only when the game ball passes through the connecting passage 477, and the connecting passage 477 is configured when the game ball is guided by the first shutter 474. Only accessible. That is, there is a possibility that a game ball that could not enter the first start winning opening 472 may enter the second starting winning opening 473, but a game ball that could not enter the second starting winning opening 473 may enter the first. Since there is no possibility of entering the starting winning opening 472, for example, if the game ball is configured to be able to directly enter the second starting winning opening 473 side without going through the first shutter 474 or the like ( (Because there will be one chance instead of two chances), the possibility that the game ball will enter the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 will decrease. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, first, the ball is entered into the first starting winning opening 472, and if that is not the case, the order of entering the second starting winning opening 473 is observed. This makes it possible to more reliably achieve the effect of improving the possibility of entering a ball into the second starting winning device 33b (first starting winning opening 472 and second starting winning opening 473).

Further, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is arranged on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the second starting winning device 33b. That is, with respect to the second start winning device 33b of the present embodiment, it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b and be discharged. More specifically, it is first rectified by a game nail or an accessory on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b, and further rectified by the eaves 481 and the reception stand 479, and the first shutter 474 in the closed position. The second start winning device is finally passed by passing through the connecting passage 477 that meanders back and forth, and passing downstream while changing the course in the orthogonal direction on the second shutter 475 in the closed position. The game ball will be discharged from 33b. Therefore, when the second start winning device 33b is on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b, the game ball is won in the big hit state or the small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state. (In particular, almost all of the game balls that pass through the right game area (excluding the game balls that win the second variable winning device 32b) as in this example) may not go smoothly, but the second starting winning device 33b It becomes more remarkable in the case of the configuration guided by the above), and in the present embodiment, such a defect or the like can be eliminated. The second start winning device 33b of this example takes a longer time (long distance) between the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 than when both are linearly connected. Since the connecting passage 477 that guides the game ball from the first starting winning device 33a side to the second starting winning device 33b side is provided, such an action effect is further achieved.

In addition, in the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the number of game balls falling on the second starting winning device 33b can be reduced, and the falling game ball is received. It is possible to reduce the burden on the start winning device 33b (eaves 481, reception stand 479, first shutter 474, etc.) and the risk of damage.

(Fifth Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63, focusing on the characteristic portions. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted and the same member names and member numbers will be used. In FIG. 60, for convenience, the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 described later are shown by dotted lines.

As shown in FIG. 60 and the like, in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b as the starting winning means and the first opening / closing type winning means, and the second variable winning means as the variable winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means. The device 32b is unitized and attached to the game board 30. Hereinafter, a unitization of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b will be referred to as a "right-handed winning unit 901".

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the right-handed winning unit 901 is provided on the downstream side of the through gate 34 as a normal starting means in the right side region. In the present embodiment, not all right-handed game balls pass through the through gate 34, but all (almost) right-handed game balls are configured to enter the right-handed winning unit 901. There is. In the present embodiment, in the right-handed winning unit 901, the second starting winning device 33b is arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable winning device 32b is arranged on the downstream side thereof.

Further, the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b of the fifth embodiment basically have a schematic configuration similar to the second starting winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60, 62 and the like, the second start winning device 33b of the fifth embodiment has a start winning opening 911 in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and a start winning opening 911. A start shutter 912 as a start opening / closing member for opening / closing the winning opening 911, a starting solenoid 913 (see FIG. 61) for operating the starting shutter 912, and a starting winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the starting winning opening 911. It is provided with a second start winning switch 224b as a first winning detecting means.

The start shutter 912 is configured to be slidable back and forth, and is displaced between a closed position that protrudes into the game area and closes the start winning opening 911 and an open position that exits the game area and opens the start winning opening 911. It is configured to do. Also in this embodiment, when the ball entry support lottery performed by the main control device 261 is won based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225 as the normal start detection means, the start shutter 912 is set to the open position. The second start winning device 33b is set to the open state.

Further, the width of the starting winning opening 911 of the present embodiment is relatively wide, and is, for example, about 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball. Further, the right end portion of the start winning opening 911 is located above the left end portion. Correspondingly, the starting shutter 912 includes a connecting plate 912a extending vertically, an upper closing plate 912b extending to the right from the upper side of the connecting plate 912a, and a lower closing plate extending to the left from the lower side of the connecting plate 912a. It is provided with 912c and is configured in a stepped shape. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, all the game balls that have been hit right and entered the right side area of the game area will enter the right-handed winning unit 901 and will enter the right-handed winning unit 901. The game ball falls to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912 of the second start winning device 33b, and if the start shutter 912 is in the open position, the ball enters the start winning opening 911 and the start shutter 912 If it is in the closed position, it can be placed on the upper closing plate 912b. Further, the upper surfaces of the upper block plate 912b and the lower block plate 912c of the start shutter 912 are relatively gently inclined downward (for example, about 3 to 10 degrees) toward the left.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 and the like, in the second starting winning device 33b of the present embodiment, if the starting shutter 912 is in the open position, a winning point (first winning point) capable of winning a prize in the starting winning opening 911. That is, a game ball that has reached the upper position of the starting winning opening 911 (the position directly above the upper closing plate 912b), but cannot enter the starting winning opening 911 because the starting shutter 912 is in the closed position. Is once guided to a position behind the starting winning opening 911, and then again, if the starting shutter 912 is in the open position, a winning point (second winning point) that can win a prize in the starting winning opening 911, that is, A detour member 915 that guides the player to an upper position of the starting winning opening 911 (a position directly above the lower closing plate 912c) is provided.

More specifically, the detour member 915 rests on the upper block plate 912b of the start shutter 912 in the closed position, is guided by the upper block plate 912b that inclines downward to the left, and falls from the upper block plate 912b to the left. If the start shutter 912 is in the closed position, the introduction path 915a guided by the introduction path 915a and the introduction path 915a that receives the game ball and guides it to the rear (the back side of the game board 30) are dropped onto the lower block plate 912c. It is equipped with a re-entry path 915b that guides the vehicle to the desired position.

The front end of the introduction path 915a projects to a position above the starting winning opening 911. Further, the front end of the introduction path 915a is located at a substantially intermediate point in the width direction of the start winning opening 911, and a game ball enters the start winning opening 911 on either the right side or the left side of the introduction path 915a. The space where the ball can be played is secured. That is, when the start shutter 912 is in the closed position, the introduction path 915a of the present embodiment covers the upper part of the lower closing plate 912c on the connecting plate 912a side to the upper position of the start winning opening 911. It is shaped so that it overhangs and is located below the upper block plate 912b. Further, the introduction path 915a is a standing wall so that when the game ball that has fallen from the upper block plate 912b of the start shutter 912 in the closed position is received, the game ball does not fall to the left lower block plate 912c side as it is. It is equipped with. Further, the game ball guide surface (the surface that supports the lower surface side of the game ball) of the introduction path 915a is relatively gently inclined downward toward the rear and left.

The rear end of the re-entry path 915b is connected to the rear end of the introduction path 915, and the game ball guided to the rear end of the introduction path 915 enters the rear end of the re-entry path 915b. It will be. Further, the game ball guide surface (the surface that supports the lower surface side of the game ball) of the re-entry path 915 is inclined downward relatively gently toward the front and left. Further, the front end of the re-entry entry path 915b is located behind the start winning opening 911, and if the start shutter 912 is in the closed position, the game ball discharged from the re-entry entry path 915b is placed on the lower closing plate 912c. If it is mounted and the start shutter 912 is in the open position, the game ball discharged from the re-entry entry path 915b is configured to enter the start winning opening 911. The game ball mounted on the lower block plate 912c is guided to the upper surface of the lower block plate 912c that is inclined downward to the left, and is discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, the start shutter 912 (particularly, the upper block plate 912b) and the detour member 915 constitute a ball entry opportunity granting means (starting ball entry opportunity granting means).

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 and the like, the second start winning device 33b has a roof that covers the introduction path 915a of the detour member 915 and the portion of the starting winning opening 911 that is covered by the lower closing plate 912c of the starting shutter 912. A member 917 is provided. The roof member 917 is configured to prevent the game ball from entering the introduction path 915a and the re-entry entry path 915b from an intermediate position, and the upper closing plate is applied to the portion of the starting winning opening 911 covered by the lower closing plate 912c. It is configured so that only game balls can enter via the 912b, the introduction path 915a, and the re-entry path 915b. The roof member 917 is extended to the right of the introduction path 915a so that the game ball can be more reliably prevented from entering the introduction path 915a when the start shutter 912 is in the open position. You may.

Further, the upper surface of the roof member 917 is inclined downward toward the right, and the game ball mounted on the roof member 917 is guided to the right, and if the start shutter 912 is in the closed position, the upper block plate 912b It is designed to fall into. In addition, a game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 by a game nail or an accessory arranged on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b (enters the game area covered in front by the right-handed winning unit 901). The game ball) is guided to the upper surface of the roof member 917 or a portion of the starting winning opening 911 that is blocked by the upper closing plate 912b.

Then, in the high ball entry state (probability variation mode and time reduction mode), the right-handed game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 and is in a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the second starting winning device 33b. If the start shutter 912 is in the open position, the game ball enters the start winning opening 911. On the other hand, if the start shutter 912 is in the closed position, the game ball is restricted from entering the start winning opening 911 by the upper surface of the upper block plate 912b, and is guided to the introduction path 915a. The game ball guided to the introduction path 915a falls to a position corresponding to the lower block plate 912c via the re-entry path 915b. In the present embodiment, the standard time from when the game ball enters the introduction path 915a until it is discharged from the re-entry path 915b, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the entry support lottery in the high entry state. Or, based on winning the ball entry support lottery in the high ball entry state, the interval time when the second start winning device 33b is closed when a plurality of the second starting winning device 33b is opened is almost the same. It is designed to be the same.

Therefore, even if the upper block plate 912b restricts the entry of the game ball into the start winning opening 911, by the time the game ball reaches the portion corresponding to the lower block plate 912c via the detour member 915. , The start shutter 912 is located in the open position. As a result, almost all of the game balls that have entered the right-handed winning unit 901 in the high-pitching state are to win the second starting winning device 33b (the ball enters the starting winning opening 911), which is high. In the ball-in state, the game can be played with almost no reduction in the number of game balls.

The number of the second start winning switch 224b provided in the second starting winning device 33b of the present embodiment is one, and no matter which part of the starting winning opening 911 the game ball enters, such a game The ball is guided by the second start winning switch 224b and is detected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 and the like, the second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment basically has the same configuration as the second starting winning device 33b. That is, the second variable winning device 32b includes a large winning opening 921 as a specific winning opening in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and a large winning shutter 922 as a specific opening / closing member for opening and closing the large winning opening 921. , The large prize solenoid 923 (see FIG. 61) that operates the large prize shutter 922, the variable prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 921, and the second count switch 223b as the second prize detection means. It is equipped with. Then, based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b, when the big winning state or the like is won in the winning / losing lottery performed by the main control device 261, the big winning shutter 922 is set to the open position and the second variable winning device is set. 32b is set to the open state.

In addition, regarding the grand prize shutter 922, the connecting plate 922a extending up and down, the upper closing plate 922b extending slightly upward from the upper side of the connecting plate 922a to the right, and the left side from the lower side of the connecting plate 922a. It is provided with a lower closing plate 922c extending slightly downward toward the direction, and is configured in a stepped shape. Further, the second variable winning device 32b is introduced to guide the game ball placed on the upper block plate 922b of the large winning shutter 922 in the closed position and to guide the game ball to the rear (the back side of the game board 30). A detour member comprising a road 925a and a re-entry road 925b that guides the game ball guided by the introduction road 925a to a position where it will fall to the lower block plate 922c if the grand prize shutter 922 is in the closed position. It is equipped with 925. In the present embodiment, the large winning shutter 922 (particularly, the upper block plate 922b) and the detour member 925 constitute a ball entry opportunity granting means (specific ball entry opportunity granting means).

Further, the second variable winning device 32b is also provided with a roof member 927 that covers the introduction path 925a of the detour member 925 and the portion of the large winning opening 921 that is covered by the lower block plate 922c of the large winning shutter 922. There is. However, since the right-handed game ball always reaches the second variable winning device 32b after passing through the second starting winning device 33b, the position of the game ball reaching the second variable winning device 32b and the position of the game ball. The moving direction and the like are almost constant, and in this example, the game ball is not configured to be guided on the roof member 927 of the second variable winning device 32b. Therefore, the roof member 927 does not have a function of guiding the game ball to the upper block plate 922b of the second variable winning device 32b by the upper surface thereof. It is also possible to omit the roof member 927.

In the case of a big hit with a ball coming out, a right-handed game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901, passes through the second starting winning device 33b, and enters the upper closing plate 922b of the second variable winning device 32b. If the big prize shutter 922 is in the open position when it falls to the corresponding position, the game ball enters the big prize opening 921. On the other hand, if the large winning shutter 922 is in the closed position, the upper surface of the upper blocking plate 922b restricts the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 921 and guides the game ball to the introduction path 925a. .. The game ball guided to the introduction path 925a falls to a position corresponding to the lower block plate 922c via the re-entry path 925b. In the present embodiment, the standard time from when the game ball enters the introduction path 925a to when it is discharged from the re-entry path 925b is designed so that the interval time in the jackpot state is substantially the same.

Therefore, even if the upper block plate 922b restricts the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 921, by the time the game ball reaches the portion corresponding to the lower block plate 922c via the detour member 925. , The big prize shutter 922 is located in the open position. As a result, almost all of the game balls that have entered the right-handed winning unit 901 in the big hit state with a ball (in the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the second starting winning device 33b before reaching the second variable winning device 32b. However, the second variable winning device 32b is to be won (the ball is entered into the big winning opening 921), and in the big hit state with a payout, the game ball is smoothly hit without wasting it. Can proceed. The interval time in the jackpot state is larger than the variable display time of the normal symbol display device 41 or the interval time when the second start winning device 33b is opened a plurality of times by winning in one ball entry support lottery. The length of the introduction path 925a and the re-entry path 925b of the second variable winning device 32b, which is long and designed according to the interval time of the jackpot state, is the length of the introduction path 915a and the re-entry path 915b of the second starting winning device 33b. It is configured longer than that (see FIG. 61).

As shown in FIG. 60 and the like, the right-handed winning unit 901 of the present embodiment has entered the second starting winning device 33b, but since the starting shutter 912 is in the closed position, the starting winning opening 911 is won. It is provided with a guide plate 919 that guides the game ball discharged from the second starting winning device 33b to the second variable winning device 32b. The guide plate 919 of the present embodiment is provided so as to extend downward from the left end portion of the start winning opening 911 of the second starting winning device 33b toward the left. Then, the game ball guided by the guide plate 919 falls to a position corresponding to the upper block plate 922b of the large winning shutter 922 of the second variable winning device 32b. Further, as described above, since the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 always enters the second starting winning device 33b, the game ball is guided to the second variable winning device 32b by the guide plate 919. The game ball guided to the guide plate 919 will surely fall to the position corresponding to the upper closing plate 922b of the large winning shutter 922 of the second variable winning device 32b.

The game ball guided by the guide plate 919 enters the large prize opening 921 if the large prize shutter 922 is in the open position, and if the large prize shutter 922 is in the closed position, the large prize is won by the upper closing plate 922b. The entry of the ball into the mouth 921 is restricted, and the upper surface of the upper closing plate 922b guides the ball to the introduction path 925a of the detour member 925. Further, in the present embodiment, the guide plate 919 constitutes a ball entry guide means together with the start shutter 912.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 60, 61 and the like, the right-handed winning unit 901 has a substantially plate-shaped base plate 902 attached to the front surface of the game board 30 in a contact state, and a base plate 902 in front of the base plate 902. A substantially plate-like shape provided so as to cover the front of at least the second start winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b, and the guide plate 919, which are provided at a distance between the two and the game ball. It is equipped with a front decorative plate 903.

The front decorative plate 903 is made of a transparent or translucent material, and a game ball moving between the front decorative plate 903 and the base plate 902 or the game board 30 is configured to be visible through the front decorative plate 903. Has been done. Further, the front side of the front decorative plate 903 has an uneven shape that matches the motif of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 63).

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 62, the base plate 902 communicates with the opening formed in the game board 30, enters the starting winning opening 911 and the large winning opening 921, and is the second starting winning switch. A discharge hole 904 for discharging the detected game ball to the rear of the game board 30 is formed in the 224b and the second count switch 223b.

Further, the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b receive the game ball entered in the starting winning opening 911 and the large winning opening 921, and guide the game ball to the rear discharge hole 904. It is provided with a U-shaped ball receiving portion 905. As shown in FIG. 63, in the present embodiment, the front side of the ball receiving portion 905 is closed by the front decorative plate 903 (the front wall portion of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b is the front decorative plate. 903). In the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 905 of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, the roof members 917 and 927, and the guide plate 919 are integrally formed with the front decorative plate 903. Hereinafter, the member in which the front decorative plate 903, the ball receiving portion 905, the roof members 917, 927, and the guide plate 919 are integrated is referred to as a "cover unit 907".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, in the cover unit 907, a mounting boss 908 for mounting the cover unit 907 to the base plate 902 is integrally provided with each ball receiving portion 905 and each roof member 917,927. It is provided. The boss hole of the mounting boss 908 is open rearward. For convenience, the lead wire of the mounting boss 908 in FIGS. 60 and 63 is drawn from the boss hole. On the other hand, the base plate 902 is formed with a mounting hole 906 (see FIG. 61) corresponding to the mounting boss 908, and the mounting boss 908 and the mounting hole 906 are aligned to the rear surface of the base plate 902. By fixing the screws from the side, the cover unit 907 can be attached to the base plate 902. The base plate 902 is provided with a support rib 909 that projects forward and supports the lower surface side of the ball receiving portion 905.

Further, the detour members 915 and 925 of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are integrally formed with the base plate 902 (see FIG. 62 and the like). In addition, the base plate 902 is formed with an opening for inserting the start shutter 912 and the large prize shutter 922, and installing the second start prize switch 224b and the second count switch 223b.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the right-handed winning unit 901 corresponds to a position corresponding to the approach path of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b, that is, the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 901. At the site, an entrance accessory 931 which has a substantially disk-shaped front view and is arranged in front of the front decorative plate 903 is provided. Further, a rotary shaft 932 connected to the central portion on the rear surface side of the inlet accessory 931 and a bonus motor 933 as a bonus drive means for rotating the rotary shaft 932 are provided to drive the bonus motor 933. As a result, the entrance accessory 931 can be rotationally displaced. In addition, a cylindrical bearing portion 934 that protrudes forward from the base plate 902 and supports the rotating shaft 932 is integrally formed with the base plate 902.

Further, the entrance accessory 931 is formed with a substantially triangular notch portion 931a. In the present embodiment, the entrance accessory 931 is configured to stop at three positions. That is, the normal position where the notch portion 931a as shown in FIG. 64 (a) faces downward, the position corresponding to the high entry ball where the notch portion 931a as shown in FIG. 64 (b) faces toward the upper left, and FIG. 64. The notch 931a as shown in (c) is configured to be displaced from the winning position facing upward to the right. Then, in the time reduction mode and the probability variation mode (first ball entry possible state), the entrance accessory 931 is in the high ball entry compatible position (first ball entry state) in FIG. 64 (b), and is in the jackpot state with balls (second ball entry state). The entrance accessory 931 is in the winning position (second corresponding state) shown in FIG. 64 (c) in the entry-possible state), and the entrance accessory 931 is in the normal position (normal corresponding state) in FIG. 64 (a) in other states. ). As a result, if the entrance accessory 931 is visually recognized, it is possible to enter the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, or it is impossible to enter either of them. It is possible to grasp whether it is a difficult situation. The accessory motor 933 is electrically connected to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 controls the drive of the accessory motor 933 based on the command from the main control device 261.

Further, the front of the portion of the base plate 902 in which the bearing portion 934 is formed is not covered with the front decorative plate 903, whereby the entrance accessory 931 can be positioned in front of the front decorative plate 903. .. As described above, the entrance accessory 931 is located in front of the front decorative plate 903, and the rotating shaft 932 for displace the rotating entrance accessory 931 and the bearing portion 934 that supports the rotating shaft 932 are located in the vertical and horizontal directions. Therefore, even if the entrance accessory 931 is displaced, the movement path of the game ball hardly changes. By filling the notch 931a of the entrance accessory 931 with a transparent material and forming the entrance accessory 931 completely in a disk shape, the entrance accessory 931 is configured so as not to change depending on the movement path of the game ball. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 64, the front surface of the front decorative plate 903 continuously extends from the lower position of the entrance accessory 931 to the position corresponding to the front of the starting winning opening 911, and the tip has an arrow shape. The first guide line 951 that is Is drawn. The first lead line 951 and the second lead line 952 have a translucent hue different from the other parts of the front decorative plate 903. Further, as shown in FIG. 59, a chance seal 953 described as "chance" is attached to the front surface of the front decorative plate 903 at the tip of the arrow of the first guide line 951, and the second guide line 952 is attached. At the tip of the arrow, a V-seal 954 marked with "V" is attached.

Correspondingly, the front surface of the entrance accessory 941 extends continuously from the first guide line 951 in front view when it is in the high entrance ball corresponding position in FIG. 64 (b), and is shown in FIG. 64 (b). In the case of the winning position of c), the line-of-sight introduction line 955 that extends continuously with the second guide line 952 in front view is drawn. That is, when the entrance accessory 941 is in the position corresponding to the high ball entry in FIG. 64 (b), the game ball is the second start winning device 33b by tracing the line of sight from the line of sight introduction line 955 to the first guide line 951. If the entrance accessory 941 is in the winning position shown in FIG. 64 (c), the game is played by following the line of sight from the line of sight introduction line 955 to the second guide line 952. It can be inferred that the ball is in a state of entering the second variable winning device 32b. When the entrance accessory 931 is in the normal position shown in FIG. 64 (a), the line-of-sight introduction line 955 is not continuous with either the first lead line 951 or the second lead line 952.

In the present embodiment, a part of the entrance accessory 931 is configured to overlap the front decorative plate 903 in the front-rear direction, but it may be configured to be in the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the front decoration portion is composed of the front decoration plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931. Further, the entrance accessory 931 (and the first lead line 951, the second lead line 952, the chance seal 953, the V seal 954, and the line-of-sight introduction line 955) constitutes the state suggestion means.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60, the portion of the base plate 902 on the right side of the bearing portion 934 and whose front is covered by the entrance accessory 931 is entered as a destination detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball. The detection switch 941 is mounted (in FIG. 61, the approach detection switch 941 is not shown for convenience). In the present embodiment, the game ball hit right in the jackpot state with a ball output, the probability variation mode, and the time reduction mode is generally the notch portion 931a of the entrance accessory 931 at the high entry corresponding position or the winning corresponding position. Game nails and the like are arranged so as to take a route that leads to the entrance. Further, all the game balls that have entered the game area on the back side of the right-handed winning unit 901 from the entrance accessory 931, in particular, all the game balls that have been right-handed and entered the right-hand area in this example, press the entry detection switch 941. An induction rib 942 integrally formed with the base plate 902 is provided so as to project forward from the left portion of the bearing portion 934 in the base plate 902 so that the base plate 902 can pass through, or a game nail is arranged. ing. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the approach detection switch 941 is configured to always fall to a position corresponding to the upper block plate 912b of the second start winning device 33b as described above.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball is guided toward the notch portion 931a of the entrance accessory 931 at the high entry-compatible position or the winning position, and the right-handed winning is won from the entrance accessory 931. Various members (game nails, roof member 917 of the second start winning device 33b, and various members for guiding all the game balls that have entered (entered) into the unit 901 to the portion corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912, and The induction rib 942) constitutes the rectifying means. By the way, these rectifying means are configured to meander the right-handed game ball as much as possible so that its moving speed does not become too fast, and reach the starting shutter 912 of the second starting winning device 33b. ..

Further, in the base plate 902, the left (downstream side) portion of the detour member 925 of the second variable winning device 32b does not enter either the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b. An emission detection switch 943 is attached as an emission detection means for detecting the game ball. In the present embodiment, the approach detection switch 941 and the emission detection switch 943 are electrically connected to the main control device 261. Further, the main control device 261 is provided with a remaining ball counter for counting the number of game balls existing inside the right-handed winning unit 901, and the remaining ball counter is set based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941. It counts up and counts down the remaining ball counter based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b, the detection of the second count switch 223b, and the detection of the discharge detection switch 943.

In addition, when the approach detection switch 941 is detected in the jackpot state with a payout, the probability change mode, and the time reduction mode, the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 (entry). Generates a sound effect. That is, when the approach detection switch 941 is detected, the main control device 261 outputs a command to the sub control device 262 indicating that the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901, and sub-controls. The device 262 performs a process of deriving a corresponding sound effect from the speaker SP based on the command. In the present embodiment, the function of generating the sound effect of the main control device 261 and the sub control device 262 and the speaker SP constitute the approach sound effect generating means.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60, the base plate 902 is formed with screw holes 945 for screwing the base plate 902 to the game board 30. Although the screw holes 945 are formed at a plurality of places, the screw holes 945 are also formed at the places where the front is covered by the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931. In the present embodiment, the cover unit 907 including the front decorative plate 903 and the like is attached to the base plate 902, and then the right-handed winning unit 901 is attached to the game board 30. Therefore, when the screw hole 945 is formed in the portion of the base plate 902 whose front is covered by the front decorative plate 903, it becomes difficult or impossible to attach the base plate 902.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, a tool hole 947 is formed in a portion of the front decorative plate 903 corresponding to the front of the screw hole 945 so that a driver as a tool can be inserted. Therefore, the base plate 902 can be reliably attached (screw-fixed) to the game board 30 from the front side of the game board 30 without any trouble. Since the inlet accessory 931 is attached by attaching the base plate 902 to the game board 30 and then inserting the rotating shaft 932 into the bearing portion 934, the front of the screw hole 945 is covered with the inlet accessory 931. Screw fixing can be performed normally for those provided in the parts to be damaged.

Further, the front decorative plate 903 extends over a relatively wide area and extends to the area where the game nails are provided. The front-back position of the head of an ordinary game nail is almost the same as the front-back position of the front decoration plate 903, and it is impossible to place the front decoration plate 903 in the place where the game nail is installed. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the front decorative plate 903 is formed with a nail exposure hole 948 for exposing the game nail to the front. As a result, the front decorative plate 903 can be arranged in the area where the game nails are installed, and when maintenance or the like is required for the game nails provided within the installation range of the front decorative plate 903, the front decorative plate 903 can be arranged. It is possible to perform maintenance of the game nails without removing the right-handed winning unit 901.

A game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 but has not won either the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b is pre-decorated after being detected by the discharge detection switch 943. It is designed to move to a game area not covered by the front decorative board 903 by being repelled by a game nail provided within the installation range of the board 903. That is, the game ball is configured to pop out from the area covered with the front decorative plate 903 before the game ball enters the out opening 36, so that the game ball is configured to pop out from the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 33b. It is easy to understand that neither of the devices 32b has won a prize.

In addition, the front decorative plate 903 has a start shutter 912 of the second start winning device 33b, a detour member 915, and a guide plate 919, a large winning shutter 922 of the second variable winning device 32b, and a detour member 925. At the corresponding positions, a ball clogging clearing hole 949 (confirmation hole) is formed. If it is considered that a ball jam has occurred in the right-handed winning unit 901, look into the passage of the game ball in the right-handed winning unit 901 through the ball jam clearing hole 949 and confirm that the ball jam has occurred. If so, the ball clogging is cleared through the ball clogging clearing hole 949. If the ball clogging clearing hole 949 and the nail exposed hole 948 are not so separated from each other and are located on a straight line, they are formed in succession.

In this embodiment, the game nail is also arranged in the area where the entrance accessory 931 is installed. The protrusion length of the game nail from the front surface of the game board 30 is short, and the game nail is configured so as not to hinder the rotational displacement of the entrance accessory 931. Further, the game nails provided on the game board 30 are all the same, and the game nails arranged in the installation area of the entrance accessory 931 have a longer driving amount into the game board 30 than other game nails. The forward protrusion length is shortened by that amount. However, with respect to the game nails provided corresponding to the nail exposure holes 948, the amount of driving into the game board 30 is the same as that of general game nails, and the protruding length is not shortened.

Further, in the jackpot state with balls, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b for each jackpot round at a predetermined portion (second display means) of the decorative symbol display device 42. A display is made to teach the number of. The counting of the number of incoming balls of the game ball is not triggered by the detection of the game ball by the approach detection switch 941, but the detection of the game ball by the first count switch 223a and the second count switch 223b. It is done with the opportunity.

In the present embodiment, the function of deriving the count display constitutes the ball entry teaching means. Further, while the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is not performed during the jackpot state, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed even during the jackpot state, and the result of winning the ball entry support lottery is taught. If this is the case, the second start winning device 33b is opened and the game ball can be won. Further, even in the jackpot state, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 or wins the second start winning device 33b, the corresponding variation display (information regarding) is held and stored, and the corresponding hold is held. The lamps 46a, 46b, 44 will be turned on.

Here, the right-handed winning switch process executed at predetermined time intervals in the normal process of the main control device 261 will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of the approach detection switch 941. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball counter in step S4802. Subsequently, in step S4803, it is determined whether or not the second variable winning device 32b is open during a big hit with a ball (hereinafter, simply referred to as a big hit with a ball). If affirmative judgment is made in step S4803, in step S4804, a sound effect (entry sound effect A) corresponding to the entry (entry) of the game ball into the right-handed winning unit 901 during the big hit with a ball is output. Set the command to make it (entry sound effect A output processing). In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 during a big hit state with a payout, almost all of the game balls (when the ball entry support lottery is won during the big hit state). There is a possibility that the ball will enter the second variable winning device 33b), so that the "entry sound effect A" will enter the second variable winning device 32b. It can also be said to be a sound effect that corresponds to the entry of a ball.

After step S4804, in step S4805, the game ball is detected by the approach detection switch 941 with respect to the remaining ball monitoring timer used for confirming whether the game ball is jammed inside the right-handed winning unit 901. It is assumed that the time from the time until the emission detection switch 943 is detected is about this at the longest, and the value corresponding to the preset scheduled stay time is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S4803, it is determined in step S4806 whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state (probability variation mode or time reduction mode). If affirmative determination is made in step S4806, in step S4807, the right-handed winning unit 901 is made to output a sound effect (entry sound effect B) corresponding to the (entry) of the game ball in the high-entry state. Set the command for this (entry sound effect B output processing). After step S4807, the process proceeds to step S4805 described above.

The sound effect B for entering the right-handed winning unit 901 in the high-entry state is different from the sound effect A for entering the ball in the big hit state with a ball. Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 during a high-entry state, almost all of the game balls (timing shifts due to ball jamming, unexpected bounce, etc.) Since (except when jumping over the start winning opening 911) enters the second starting winning device 33b, the "entry sound effect B" is "entering the second starting winning device 33b". It can also be said to be a sound effect corresponding to a sphere.

If a negative determination is made in step S4806, in step S4808, a command is set to output a left-handed announcement instructing the player that the player is in a state of left-handed by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like. I do. That is, in a state other than a big hit state with a ball coming out or a high ball entry state, the game proceeds even if the game ball is hit to the right (the game ball is inserted into the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b). ) Is difficult, and the game can be advanced relatively smoothly by hitting the game ball to the left. For this reason, when it is detected that a right-handed strike is being performed in such a state, a left-handed announcement that urges the player to strike left is derived. After step S4808, the process proceeds to step S4805 described above.

After step S4805, or when a negative determination is made in step S4801, the process proceeds to step S4809 to determine whether or not there is detection information of the emission detection switch 943. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4809, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining ball counter in step S4810. In this embodiment, when the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b and the second count switch 223b is confirmed in the switch reading process (step S301 in FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process of the main control device 261. Is also configured to perform a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining ball counter.

After step S4810 or when a negative determination is made in step S4809, the process proceeds to step S4811 to determine whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter is 0 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S4811, that is, if the number of game balls ejected from the right-handed winning unit 901 is larger than the number of game balls that have entered the right-handed winning unit 901. In step S4812, the count error process is executed, and then this process ends. The content of the count error processing can be appropriately set for each model of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the pachinko machine 10 is notified by a decorative symbol display device 42, a lamp, a voice, or the like, and the game of the pachinko machine 10 is paused ( (New fluctuation display, jackpot round is not started, etc.), error information is output from the pachinko machine 10 to the outside of the hall computer, island equipment, etc. via the external terminal board 240.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4811, it is determined in step S4813 whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter exceeds 0. If a negative determination is made in step S4813, that is, if the value of the remaining ball counter is 0, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4813, it is determined in step S4814 whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0. If a negative determination is made in step S4814, the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 in step S4815, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4814, that is, if there is a high possibility that ball clogging has occurred inside the right-handed winning unit 901, the timer error processing is performed in step S4816, and then this processing is performed. To finish. The content of the time error processing can be appropriately set for each model of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the pachinko machine 10 is notified by a decorative symbol display device 42, a lamp, a voice, or the like, and the game of the pachinko machine 10 is paused ( (New fluctuation display, jackpot round is not started, etc.), error information is output from the pachinko machine 10 to the outside of the hall computer, island equipment, etc. via the external terminal board 240.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is suspended, it is taught by the lighting mode of the holding lamps 46a and 46b (see FIG. 59) that the variable display is suspended. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), a ball entry detection compatible display and a hold icon 962 as a hold information object are displayed at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 42 (hereinafter, also referred to as “hold display area 961”). But I am teaching. Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub control device 262 receives a signal from the main control device 261 that the approach detection switch 941 has been detected in the high ball entry state, the sub control device 262 is sent to the second start winning device 33b. In addition to generating a sound effect corresponding to the entry of the ball, the display process (right-handed hold icon display process) of the temporary hold icon (pseudo hold icon 963) in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. When the main control device 261 detects the start winning switch 224a, 224b, the count switch 223a, 223b, the approach detection switch 941, and the emission detection switch 943 from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, a signal indicating that fact. Is configured to be output.

Hereinafter, the right-handed hold icon display process will be described with reference to FIG. 66. First, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of the approach detection switch 941. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state (probability variation mode or time reduction mode). If a negative determination is made in step S4902, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4902, in step S4903, the number of holdings of the variation display (second variation display) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b is less than four, which is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is. If a negative determination is made in step S4903, that is, if the second variation display cannot be held any further, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S4903, in step S4904, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the first-in ball detection correspondence display and the pseudo hold icon 963 for displaying the pseudo hold icon 963 as the pseudo hold information object. Perform processing. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the hold icon 962 of the present embodiment is an image object imitating a floating ring, and the pseudo hold icon 963 is an image object that looks like a blurred (thinned) hold icon 962. It has become. Further, in the pseudo hold icon display process, the number of fluctuation displays (variation information) currently held is confirmed, and the corresponding position in the hold display area (the game ball detected by the approach detection switch 941 this time) is displayed. When detected by the second start winning switch 224b, the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed at the position where the hold icon 962 indicating the hold of the corresponding variable display is displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, accompanying the pseudo-holding icon 963, a bubble display 964 in which a large number of bubbles are springing up from the bottom to the top is performed in front of the pseudo-holding icon 963. The player is informed that the mode of the pseudo-holding icon 963 may be changed by performing a fluid display such as the bubble display 964 that reduces the visibility of the pseudo-holding icon 963. You can guess.

By performing the process of displaying the pseudo hold icon 963, in the present embodiment, when the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 (entrance accessory 931) is detected by the approach detection switch 941, it is high. When the ball is in the winning state, the entry sound effect B (meaning winning) corresponding to the entry into the second starting winning device 33b is output, and the second starting winning device is output in the decorative symbol display device 42. A pseudo hold icon 963 indicating that the variable display is (will) be held based on the entry into 33b will be displayed. By the way, the time from when the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 (entrance accessory 931) until it is detected by the approach detection switch 941 is approximately 0.1 to 0.5 seconds, whereas it is approximately 0.1 to 0.5 seconds. In the high-entry state, it takes about 1 to 8 seconds from the time when the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 (entrance accessory 931) until it is detected by the second starting winning switch 224b. ing.

After step S4904, in step S4905, the pseudo hold flag indicating that the pseudo hold icon 963 is being displayed is set to be turned on, and then this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4906 whether or not the pseudo hold flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4906, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4906, it is determined in step S4907 whether or not there is detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4907, the pseudo hold flag is turned off in step S4908, and then this process ends. That is, the case where the second start winning switch 224b is detected is the case where the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b as planned in the high ball entry state, and the second start. If the winning switch 224b is detected, various lottery (win / fail lottery, etc.) is performed, and information indicating the result, etc. is output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262 as a starting command. .. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the mode of the hold icon 962 based on the information included in the starting command, the result of various lottery performed triggered by the reception of the starting command, and the like, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to determine the mode. Display. Of course, when the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed at the position where the hold icon 962 should be displayed, the hold icon 962 is displayed instead of the pseudo hold icon 963.

For example, in the high ball entry state, when the ball has entered the second start winning device 33b from the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) and the corresponding second variation display is suspended, FIG. 67 is shown. As shown in (b), the bubble display 964 disappears and the pseudo hold icon 963 is switched to the hold icon 962 (in this example, the pseudo hold icon 963 blurs the (normal) hold icon 962). Therefore, if the outline and hue of the pseudo hold icon 963 are clarified, the hold icon 962 will be obtained). Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), as the hold icon 962, the content of the corresponding variable display may be suggested by changing the visual mode from that of the normal one. The third hold icon 962 from the left in FIG. 67 (c) is an embodiment for teaching that a jackpot state occurs.

If a negative determination is made in step S4907, it is determined in step S4909 whether or not there is detection information of the emission detection switch 943. If a negative determination is made in step S4909, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4909, a display for erasing the pseudo hold icon 963 is performed in step S4910. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 and is detected by the approach detection switch 941 always has the second start winning switch 224b, the second count switch 223b, and the discharge detection switch 943. It will be detected by either. Therefore, in the case where the discharge detection switch 943 is detected while the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed, the game ball detected by the approach detection switch 941 in the high entry state is the second start winning switch. The pseudo hold icon 963 displayed in anticipation that the game ball is detected by the second start winning switch 224b, which is not detected by 224b, is deleted in step S4910. .. Incidentally, in the decorative pattern display device 42, the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 67 (d).

Then, in step S4911, the pseudo hold flag is turned off, and then this process ends. Instead of the determination in steps S4901 and S4902, it may be determined whether or not a signal to output the approach sound effect B has been received. It may be configured to shift to step S4903 in the affirmative judgment and move to step S4906 in the negative judgment.

As described in detail above, in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are unitized as the right-handed winning unit 901, and the second starting winning device 33b is started. Because the starting shutter 912 was in the closed position even though the ball entry point (in this example, the position above the starting winning opening 911) where the starting winning opening 911 could be won if the shutter 912 was in the open position was reached. A game ball that could not be won in the start winning opening 911 can be entered in the large winning opening 921 if the large winning shutter 922 of the second variable winning device 32b is in the open position (this example). Then, a guide plate 919 is provided to guide the player to the position above the big winning opening 921).

Therefore, of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, the game ball that could not enter one of them because one of them was in the closed state is placed at the other entry point (entrance). It is possible to prevent a situation such as being discharged from the game area without reaching. As a result, it is possible to surely increase the possibility that the game ball that could not enter one of the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b will enter the other. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game ball launched (right-struck) in the area on the right side of the game area is discharged from the game area without winning any winning device. As a result, among the right-handed game balls, the number of game balls that have entered a winning device somewhere and the number of game balls that are discharged from the game area without entering any winning device. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a relatively large variation in the ratio, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by such variation.

Further, the second start winning device 33b is a game ball at the first entry point (position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912) in which the ball can enter the start winning opening 911 if the start shutter 912 is in the open position. When the start shutter 912 is in the closed position when the entry is reached, the game ball can be entered into the start winning opening 911 if the start shutter 912 is in the open position. It is provided with a detour member 915 (introduction path 915a and re-entry entry path 915b) that guides the player to the position corresponding to the plate 912c.

In addition, regarding the second variable winning device 32b, if the large winning shutter 922 is in the open position, the first winning point (position corresponding to the upper closing plate 922b of the large winning shutter 922) can be entered into the large winning opening 921. ) When the large prize shutter 922 is in the closed position, the second entry point (2) where the game ball can be entered into the large prize opening 921 if the large prize shutter 922 is in the open position. It is provided with detour members 925 (introduction path 915a and re-entry entry path 925b) that guide to the lower closing plate 922c of the grand prize shutter 922).

Therefore, although the position just above the starting winning opening 911 and the large winning opening 921 was reached, the starting winning opening 911 and the large winning opening 921 could not be won because the starting shutter 912 and the large winning shutter 922 were in the closed position. The game ball will be given the opportunity to try to win the starting prize opening 911 and the big winning opening 921 again, and the possibility that the game ball will enter the starting winning opening 911 and the big winning opening 921 will be increased. Can be done. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the starting winning opening 911 and the large winning opening 921 in the high winning state or the big hit state with the ball being opened when the second variable winning device 32b is opened. The ratio of the number of game balls that enter the starting prize opening 911 or the large winning opening 921 to the number of game balls that did not enter the starting winning opening 911 or the large winning opening 921 is the starting winning opening 911 or the large winning opening 911. The ratio of the number of game balls entering the mouth 921 can be increased. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls can be efficiently inserted into the starting winning opening 911 and the large winning opening 921. By playing a ball, the game can be advanced in a pleasant manner.

In particular, in the present embodiment, if a game ball enters (wins) the right-handed winning unit 901 in a high-entry state, (almost) all the game balls will win the second start winning device 33b. , If the game ball is entered (entry) into the right-handed winning unit 901 in the big hit state with the ball being released when the second variable winning device 32b is opened, almost all the game balls are entered into the second variable winning device 32b. Will win a prize. Therefore, the above-mentioned action and effect are more reliably achieved, and the difference in ball ejection between the players in the high ball-entry state and the ball-discharging jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is open is less likely to occur. , It is possible to avoid a situation in which the interest is lowered due to the difference in the number of balls (unfairness). In addition, in a high entry state or a big hit state with a ball output, the game can be advanced more easily because the player just hits right without worrying about the decrease in the number of game balls.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the game ball is hit to the right, it is possible to suppress the generation of a waste ball (the game ball does not win a prize in any of the winning devices) and allow the game to proceed smoothly (at a good tempo). Although the effect of being able to do so is achieved, the behavior of the game ball when hitting to the right is almost the same once it reaches the right-handed winning unit 901. In this respect, also in this embodiment, not only the right-handed route (right-hand side area) but also the left-handed route (left-hand side area) is prepared. By adjusting the position to put out, the behavior of the game ball changes relatively greatly. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the behavior of the pachinko ball becomes almost constant, which causes a decrease in interest, and the behavior of the pachinko ball is enjoyed in a state where the pachinko ball is launched in the left side region. It is possible to maintain the original fun of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, despite the fact that the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b can be expected to win by launching the game ball in the right side region when the player is in an advantageous state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b well. Therefore, in the state where the game ball is hit to the right, the stress that the game ball does not enter the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b can be eliminated, and the game can proceed comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is located on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the second variable winning device 32b, and the game ball that has not entered the second starting winning device 33b is the second variable. It is configured to be guided by the winning device 32b. That is, since the second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment includes the detour member 925, the second variable winning device 32b in which the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state maintains the closed state. It will take a relatively large amount of time to get out of. Therefore, when the second start winning device 33b is located on the downstream side of the second variable winning device 32b via the guide plate 919, the game ball may not easily reach the second variable winning device 32b. become. In particular, in general, the interval when the second start winning device 33b is opened a plurality of times (the period during which the second start winning device 33b is closed) and the second variable winning device 32b are opened a plurality of times. Even when compared with the interval of the jackpot state, the interval of the jackpot state is longer, and when the detour member 925 of the second variable winning device 32b is designed accordingly, this tendency becomes more remarkable.

In this regard, by arranging the second start winning device 33b on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b as in the present embodiment, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting winning device 33b, and then the game ball is launched. The time required to reach the second start winning device 33b can be relatively shortened, and the smooth progress of the game can be achieved. In addition, for example, when the second start winning device 33b is on the downstream side of the second variable winning device 32b via the guide plate 919, the game ball is attached to the second variable winning device 32b in a closed state. Is reached, it is almost certain that the ball will enter the second start winning device 33b, but from there until the ball actually enters the second starting winning device 33b (detected by the second starting winning device 33b). Since it takes a relatively large amount of time (up to), there is a concern that the time lag may be uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of discomfort.

In the big hit state, the game ball may also win the second start winning device 33b located upstream of the second variable winning device 32b, but in the present embodiment, the second starting winning device 33b is used. There is only one prize ball based on the prize, and it is not related to the increase or decrease of the game ball possessed by the player. However, it is possible to suspend the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43L and 43R, and it is possible to suppress the situation where the length of the jackpot round becomes too short.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball always enters (enters) the right-handed winning unit 901 by a game nail or the like, and at the same time, the game nail, the guide rib 942, and the second start winning device 33b. The roof member 917 or the like guides the second start winning device 33b to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912. That is, the second variable winning device 32b is configured to be reachable only when the game ball is guided by the guide plate 919 via the detour member 915 of the second starting winning device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the game ball reaches the second variable winning device 32b without passing through the second starting winning device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to comply with the order of first trying to enter the second start winning device 33b and, if that is not the case, trying to enter the second variable winning device 32b, and the second starting winning device. The action and effect of improving the possibility of entering the ball into the 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are more reliably achieved.

Further, the right-handed game ball moves in the game area while being meandered by a game nail, a guide rib 942, or the like before being guided by the second start winning device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the fact that the speed of the game ball becomes too high, and it is possible to reduce the irregularity regarding the movement direction and the movement speed of the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b. Therefore, the flow of the game ball in the second start winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b, and the guide plate 919 can be made relatively smooth.

Further, in the present embodiment, the base plate 902 of the right-handed winning unit 901 and the front surface of the game board 30 are provided at a distance through which the game ball can pass, and the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable are provided. A winning device 32b and a transparent or translucent front decorative plate 903 that covers the front of the guide plate 919 are provided. The front decorative plate 903 can enhance the sense of unity of the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b, and the guide plate 919. That is, the second start winning device 33b is relatively free from being confused by the structures of the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b, and the guide plate 919, and the complicated movement of the game ball moving them. If the game ball reaches the part covered with the front decorative plate 903 in the high-entry state where the ball is frequently opened or the jackpot state where the second variable winning device 32b is opened (on the back side of the front decorative plate 903). (If a game ball enters), it can be a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that the ball enters either the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b. Further, since the portion covered with the front decorative plate 903 has the functions of both the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 33b are provided. Compared to the conventional pachinko machine 10, which has only a configuration in which the device 32b exists separately, it is possible to impart novelty and derive a new effect or the like using the novelty.

Further, in the present embodiment, the entrance accessory 931 is provided at a portion corresponding to the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 901. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand where the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 901 is. Further, the entrance accessory 931 is provided so as to be rotatable and displaceable, and the posture changes depending on the high ball entry state, the big hit state with a ball ejection, and the other states. Therefore, even if the entrance accessory 931 is continuously visually recognized, whether the game ball is in the state of entering the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, or both of them cannot be entered. It is possible to grasp whether it is in a state. In addition, the rotating entrance accessory 931 can be used to improve the decorativeness and directing effect, and the entrance accessory 931 can be displaced to make it more conspicuous as a mark for the launch position of the game ball. You can also do it.

The entrance accessory 931 is configured so that the movement path of the game ball in the game area does not change even if it is in a displaced state. That is, the entrance accessory 931 is merely an accessory (decoration), and although it is configured to be displaceable, the displacement does not affect the movement path of the game ball. Therefore, even if the entrance accessory 931 is moved in a complicated manner, it is possible to satisfactorily enter the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, and it is relatively free. Various information can be suggested and taught depending on the aspect of the entrance accessory 931 that can be designed. Further, since the entrance accessory 931 is configured to be rotationally displaced, a mechanism for rotating the entrance accessory 931 while being configured so that the movement path of the game ball does not change due to the displacement of the entrance accessory 931. It is possible to avoid the increase in size and complexity of the.

Further, the front decorative plate 903 of the present embodiment is a part of the right-handed winning unit 901, and is integrally formed with the ball receiving portion 905 of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, and is a game board. It is screwed and fixed to the base plate 902 which is screwed and fixed to 30. Therefore, in order to attach the front decorative plate 903 to the resin base 38 of the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14, it is not necessary to change the shapes of the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be smoothly reused by replacing only the game board 30 and various members attached to the game board 30 and reusing the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14, and the like as they are. Since the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are unitized and attached to the game board 30, the pachinko machine 10 of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b can be used. In addition to improving the workability of attaching and detaching the slingshot, the relative position between the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b can be determined more accurately.

Further, the front decorative plate 903 is formed with a nail exposure hole 948 that penetrates back and forth and exposes the game nail erected on the front side of the game board to the front. With the nail exposed hole 948, the front decorative plate 903 can be spread over a relatively wide range without providing a game nail in the vicinity of the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b or worrying about the arrangement of the game nail. The outer peripheral edge of the front decorative plate 903 may be provided (so as to be as far away as possible from the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b). In particular, since the front decorative plate 903 (and the entrance accessory 931) is located in front of the portion where the game ball in the game area passes, it is closer to the player, and is located in front of the game board 30 or around the game area. , Along with the front surface of the front frame set 14, three-dimensional decoration and expression of a motif straddling the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side of the game area can be performed. As a result, it is possible to realize a highly original visual mode.

Moreover, since the nail exposed hole 948 is formed in the front decorative plate 903, it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative plate 903 so as to avoid the game nails, so that the design of the front decorative plate 903 is as good as possible. It is possible to achieve both the improvement of the above and the formation of the movement route of the game ball by the game nail. In addition, a game nail having a relatively short protrusion length from the game board 30 is arranged behind the entrance accessory 931 by making the amount of driving into the game board 30 deeper than that of other game nails. ing. By providing these configurations, the movable area of the game ball (when the game board 30 is viewed from the front) is narrowed in exchange for the installation of the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931. In addition to avoiding such a situation, the game nails can be arranged even in the installation range of the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 by avoiding the game nails (the game nails do not need to be arranged so as to avoid the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931). (Already done), improved design of the right-handed winning unit 901 (eg, a wider range of dynamic decoration including the front range of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, as in the above embodiment). And the formation of the movement route of the game ball by the game nail can be compatible with each other.

Further, even if maintenance (angle adjustment, etc.) of the game nail is required due to a change in the angle of the game nail due to long-term use or the like, the work can be performed without removing the front decorative plate 903. Further, for example, as compared with the case where a resin rod-shaped body integrally formed with the front decorative plate 903 is provided instead of the game nail, the durability can be improved and the front is improved. There is no need to increase the distance between the game board 30 and the plate glass of the glass unit 137 in order to install the decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931. The front-rear width of the 10 is widened (the installation space for the pachinko machine 10 is fixed in the game hall, etc., and when the front-rear width increases, the front of the pachinko machine 10 moves toward the player in front and the entire game area is overlooked. It may be difficult).

Further, since the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 are provided at positions that cannot be contacted from the player side behind the glass unit 137, the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 are provided at a position where they cannot be contacted from the player side behind the glass unit 137. It is possible to prevent the object 931 from being damaged or being separated from the pachinko machine 10. Further, since the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 are separated from the plate glass of the glass unit 137, an abnormal noise is generated due to the vibration of the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 being transmitted to the transparent body. The front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 are damaged due to the appearance that the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 and the glass unit 137 are in pressure contact with each other due to manufacturing errors or the like. It can be prevented.

Further, the front decorative plate 903 is formed with a ball clogging clearing hole 949 that penetrates back and forth corresponding to the path of the game ball. Therefore, even if a ball clogging occurs on the back side of the front decorative plate 903, it can be eliminated without removing the front decorative plate 903 via the ball clogging clearing hole 949. Further, the visibility of the game ball passing through the back side of the front decorative plate 903 can be improved.

In addition, the cover unit 907 including the front decorative plate 903 and the ball receiving portion 905 is provided with a mounting boss 908 having a boss hole that opens rearward, and the cover unit 907 is used as a base plate 902. The cover unit 907 and the base plate 902 are mounted by aligning the mounting boss 908 and the mounting hole formed in the base plate 902 with the front surface and screwing them from the rear surface side of the base plate 902. Has been done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screws and the like used for mounting the front decorative plate 903 from being visually recognized on the back surface side of the front decorative plate 903, and to avoid deterioration of the design due to the visual recognition. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the base plate 902 is fixed with screws when it is attached to the game board 30, but basically, the front of the base plate 902 is covered with the front decorative plate 903, and the base plate is covered. Some of the screw holes 945 formed in the base plate 902 for fixing the screws to the game board 30 of the 902 are also formed in the portion covered by the front decorative plate 903. On the other hand, the front decorative plate 903 is formed with a tool hole 947 at a position corresponding to the front of the screw hole 945 of the base plate 902. Therefore, even if the front decorative plate 903 covers the front of the base plate 902, a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted through the tool hole 947, and the work of attaching the base plate 902 to the game board 30 is relatively easy. be able to. Further, although the tool hole 947 is formed, since the tool hole 947 and the screw hole 945 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, basically, the screws and the like screwed into the screw hole 945 are the front decorative plate 903. It will be visible through. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the screw or the like screwed into the screw hole 945 to be visually recognized from the front, and it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the design due to the visual recognition of such a screw.

The right-handed winning unit 901 is locked to the game board 30 by the locking means, or the cover unit 907 is locked to the base plate 902 attached to the game board 30 by the locking means. It is possible, but there is a concern that the mounting condition may become unstable or that once mounted, it cannot be removed. In this respect, as in the fifth embodiment, after the base plate 902 and the cover unit 907 are attached, the base plate 902 is fixed to the game board 30 with screws via the tool holes 497 of the front decorative plate 903. By doing so, the right-handed winning unit 901 can be firmly attached to the game board 30 (it does not rattle even if the game ball collides), and the right-handed winning unit 901 can be removed relatively easily. can.

In addition, an approach detection switch 941 for detecting a game ball that has entered (entered) the right-handed winning unit 901 is provided at the entrance portion of the right-handed winning unit 901 (behind the entrance accessory 931). In the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball always enters the right-handed winning unit 901, and all the game balls that have entered the right-handed winning unit 901 are detected by the approach detection switch 941 and always the second variable winning. The device 32b is guided to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 912b of the start shutter 912. By providing the approach detection switch 941 in this way, a reaction to the entry of the game ball into the right-handed winning unit 901, which is an area covered by the entrance accessory 931 and the front decorative plate 903, is generated relatively quickly. (In this example, a sound effect is generated), and the image that the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 can be strengthened. Therefore, the area covered with the entrance accessory 931 and the front decorative plate 903 (right-handed winning unit 901) is more reliably recognized as a winning area in which the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are combined. At the same time, the image that the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 can be further strengthened.

Further, after the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 (entrance accessory 931), the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b (particularly, the second variable winning device located on the downstream side of the game area). There is a concern that a relatively long time lag will occur before the game ball is detected in 32b), and it is assumed that the ball entry is notified at the timing of detection by the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b. However, it is difficult to grasp what the notification corresponds to (the memory that the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 is a little far away), and what is the point when the right-handed winning unit 901 is entered? However, if there is no reaction, the player feels uneasy. In this regard, by showing a predetermined reaction based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941, the player firmly recognizes (counts) the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 on the pachinko machine 10 side. ), You can get a sense of security. Since the ball entry detection sound based on the detection information of the approach detection switch 941 differs between the high ball entry state and the big hit with a ball ejection, the game ball is the first depending on the posture of the entrance accessory 931 and the voice mode. It is possible to teach whether the ball is entered in the two starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, or both of them cannot be entered. Further, based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect (pseudo-hold icon 963) such that the fluctuation display may be held (the hold icon 962 may be displayed). Can be diversified.

Further, also in the present embodiment, the game ball is launched (leftward) to the left side (left side area) of the variable display device unit 35 or to the right side (right side) of the variable display device unit 35 according to the game situation. You can hit the ball (hit right) in the square area), but by providing the approach detection switch 941, you need to know that you are hitting right when you should hit left. Can be done. Therefore, based on such information, it is possible to perform a notification (left-handed announcement) indicating the correct movement route.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the game balls that have entered the right-handed winning unit 901 and have been detected by the approach detection switch 941, both the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b have entered the ball. A discharge detection switch 943 that detects a game ball that has not been played is provided, and a remaining ball counter that can count the number of game balls remaining in the right-handed winning unit 901 is provided. Therefore, based on the detection information of the approach detection switch 941, the second start winning switch 224b, the second count switch 223b, and the discharge detection switch 943, there is no illegal entry, or the right-handed winning unit 901. It is possible to check whether or not ball clogging has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 32b during each big hit round (second count switch 223b) in the big hit state with a payout in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state. The number of detections) is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Therefore, the game ball entered the second variable winning device 32b among the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b of the right-handed winning unit 901 by the count display on the decorative symbol display device 42. You can grasp that more clearly.

When there are two or more prize balls based on winning the second starting prize device 33b, the more the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b in the big hit state with a payout, the more the game ball can be acquired by the player. Will increase. When such a configuration is adopted, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the total number of game balls that have won a prize in the second start winning device 33b during the big hit state with a payout, so that the increase of the game balls can be visually recognized. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the total number of prize balls based on the entry.

In addition, for the game ball that was hit right and entered the right-handed winning unit 901 but did not enter either the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, the front decorative plate 903 or the entrance. It is configured to move (discharged) to a game area not covered by the accessory 931 and then enter the out opening 36. Therefore, it can be relatively easily understood that the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901, but has not won either the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b. That is, for example, when the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b is not in the open state (for example, the normal mode or the latent mode), the game ball is placed in the right-handed winning unit 901. Even if they enter, the game ball should not enter either the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b. At this time, the front is covered with the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 until the game ball that has not entered either the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b is discharged out of the game area. If the part is continuously moved, it is difficult to visually recognize whether the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b has won a prize, or whether either of them has won a prize.

In this regard, for the game ball that entered the right-handed winning unit 901 but did not enter either the second starting winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, the front decorative plate 903 or the entrance role is again used. A state in which the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are opened by being configured to move to the game area outside the right-handed winning unit 901 not covered with the object 931. Even though the game ball has entered the part covered by the right-handed prize unit 901 due to a temporary jam of the game ball inside the right-handed prize unit 901, the corresponding prize ball (game ball) It is possible to avoid troubles caused by misunderstanding that there is no payout) and the occurrence of a decline in interest.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, from the time when the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 (the game area on the back side of the right-handed winning unit 901) as a specific area until the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, and by extension, the second. A relatively long time lag will occur before the start winning switch 224b is detected (although the second starting winning device 33b is located upstream of the second variable winning device 32, it is a right-handed winning unit. There is a slight distance from the entrance of 901, and compared to the case of directly seeing the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b, there is still a long time lag, and the corresponding reaction may be felt to be slow. Even in such a case (high), the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 is on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b (the back side of the entrance accessory 931 which is the entrance part of the right-handed winning unit 901). Pseudo-hold icon 963 imitating the hold icon 962 that will be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 when the second start winning switch 224b is detected at the stage detected by the approach detection switch 941 arranged in Is configured to display. In other words, although the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901, there is no reaction to it, giving the player anxiety such as whether it makes sense to let the game ball enter the right-handed winning unit 901. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is forced to enter the game ball into the second start winning switch 224b, or to suppress a situation in which the player does not feel that the game ball is being inserted into the second start winning switch 224b. Therefore, in a configuration having a right-handed winning unit 901 provided with a plurality of winning devices (second starting winning device 33b and second variable winning device 32b), more suitable progress of the game can be achieved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the approach detection switch 941 is detected, it is determined whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state, and only when it is determined that the ball is in a high ball entry state, that is, right-handed. Only when the game ball that has entered the winning unit 901 is detected by the second start winning switch 224b and the hold icon 962 may be derived, the pseudo hold icon 963 is derived based on the detection of the entry detection switch 941. It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, the pseudo hold icon 963 is derived based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941 even in a state other than the high ball entry state (for example, the normal state of hitting left) (although the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed). , The variable display is not performed at all, and the pseudo hold icon 963 itself is erased), which causes confusion to the player and makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to more reliably prevent such a situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed, the detection of the discharge detection switch 943 that detects the game ball discharged from the right-handed winning unit 901, or the detection of the second count switch 223b is performed. If done, it is configured to erase (one) the pseudo hold icon 963. As a result, the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 in a high-entry state, and although it is detected by the approach detection switch 941, it is discharged from the right-handed winning unit 901 without entering the second starting winning device 33b. There is no possibility that the pseudo hold icon 963 will be switched to the hold icon 962 in the case where the high ball entry state has ended immediately after the detection of the approach detection switch 941. Nevertheless, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo hold icon 963 continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the approach detection switch 941 is detected in the high ball entry state, a sound effect (approach sound effect B) corresponding to the ball entering the second start winning device 33b is output. At the same time, the pseudo hold icon 963 will be displayed. In this way, the player causes the game ball to enter the approach detection switch 941 in the high entry state, thereby corresponding to the entry into the second variable winning device 33b (the entry into the second variable winning device 33b). Since the reaction (to be expected) is derived, it is possible to further strengthen the (pseudo) feeling that the player has made the game ball win the second start winning device 33b, and by extension, the game is proceeding. ..

In the present embodiment, when the approach detection switch 941 is detected and the ball is in a high entry state, the approach sound effect B is generated and the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed. When the second variable winning device 32b is in a big hit state with a ball being released, an approach sound effect A is generated, and in other states, for example, in a state of hitting left, left hit. It is configured to display an announcement such as "Please". That is, shortly after the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901, if the ball is in a high winning state, the ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, and the second variable winning device 32b is released. If so, it is necessary to grasp the entry into the second variable winning device 32b by the sound effect or the display mode in the decorative symbol display device 42, even if the inside of the right-handed winning unit 901 is not directly visually confirmed. Can be done. Therefore, even if the player plays the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are unitized as a right-handed winning unit 901, the player does not feel uncomfortable. Moreover, the game can be played relatively smoothly.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo hold icon 963 (basically a floating ring in the above example) of the hold display area 961 of the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed, the embodiment is different from the pseudo hold icon 963. The bubble display 964 as an additional display is displayed so as to overlap in front of the pseudo hold icon 963. Further, when the pseudo hold icon 963 is switched to the hold icon 962, the bubble display 964 displayed corresponding to the pseudo hold icon 963 is deleted.

As described above, by deriving the bubble display 964 together with the pseudo hold icon 963 and setting the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963 to a mode in which at least a part of the pseudo hold icon 963 has not been clarified, the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963 has not been determined. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impression that the pseudo hold icon 963 may be further changed (it becomes the hold icon 962). As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player confuses the pseudo hold icon 963 with the hold icon 962, and a trouble that may occur when the pseudo hold icon 963 is mistaken for the hold icon 963 (for example,). The pseudo hold icon 963 was only performed, but if the hold icon 962 is mistaken for the hold icon 962, the variable display process that can be executed when the hold icon 962 is displayed may not be executed, or the win / fail lottery is invalid. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles in which the player makes a protest such as the fact that the icon has been made into a game hall or the like.

The content is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(A) In the first embodiment, the game ball is re-entered from the position above the starting winning opening 402 as a specific point, through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414, and reaching the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again. The entry route is configured to intersect at an upper position of the starting winning opening 402 (corresponding to the left part of the starting winning shutter 405), but is configured so that it does not intersect (do not pass through the same place again). You may. In this case, the game ball that has jumped out from the guide stand 407 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 collides with the game ball that has jumped out to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again via the re-entry path 414, and pops. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the starting winning opening 402 does not win a prize. For example, the game ball falls from the guide stand 407 to the left portion of the starting winning shutter 405 on the introduction path 412 side, and the game ball falls from the reentry entry path 414 to the right portion of the starting winning shutter 405 on the discharge opening 411 side. It may be configured to be derived from.

In the above embodiment, although the re-entry routes intersect, the position is above the start winning opening 402, so even if the game balls collide with each other at that position, both game balls that collide with each other are the starting winning openings 402. There is a high possibility of entering. Therefore, as compared with the case where the re-entry routes intersect at positions other than the upper position of the starting winning opening 402, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game balls hinder each other from winning the starting winning opening 402.

(B) Further, in the first embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the starting winning opening 402 passes through the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry entry path 414, and only once again. Although it is configured to return to the upper position of, it may be configured so that one game ball can access the upper position of the start winning opening 402 three times or more. For example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the start winning opening 402 and the starting winning shutter 405 are configured in a stepped shape. That is, the start winning shutter 405 includes a connecting plate 491 extending vertically, an upper closing plate 492 extending left from the upper side portion of the connecting plate 491, and a lower closing plate 493 extending to the right from the lower side portion of the connecting plate 491. It is configured to be provided, and the starting winning opening 402 is also formed into a corresponding shape.

Further, in addition to the re-entry path (first entry path 494) located behind the start winning shutter 405, a re-entry path (second entry path 495) is also formed on the front side of the start winning shutter 405. When the game ball is guided from the guide stand 407 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball falls to the upper closing plate 492 of the starting winning shutter 405. Then, it enters the first entry road 494 via the introduction road 412. The game ball that has passed through the first entry path 494 will jump out to a position above the start winning opening 402, more specifically, a position corresponding to the upper block plate 492 of the start winning shutter 405. If the start winning shutter 405 is also in the closed position at this timing, the game ball crosses the upper block plate 492 forward and enters the second entry path 495. The game ball via the second entry path 495 will jump out to a position above the start winning opening 402, more specifically, to a position corresponding to the lower block plate 493 in the start winning shutter 405. When the start winning shutter 405 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins the start winning opening 402, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball is on the upper surface of the lower closing plate 493. It will be discharged from the discharge opening 411.

Since the second start winning device 33b of the embodiment does not fit in the space between the game board 30 and the glass frame unit 137, the game board 30 is scraped and the introduction path 412 is arranged further rearward to guide the player. The platform 407 is configured to allow the game ball to pop out diagonally backward.

(C) In the first embodiment, a propulsion force applying means for imparting a propulsion force to the game ball may be provided for at least one of the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414. For example, a roller whose upper portion is exposed from the lower surface of the introduction path 412 and a motor for rotating the roller may be provided. Further, for example, a transportation means such as a belt conveyor may be laid on the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414.

The introduction path 412 is from the start winning opening 402 because the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405 in the closed position located above the starting winning opening 402 is returned to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again. It is necessary to incline upward in the direction of separation, and the game ball looks like running up the introduction path 412.

(D) A cushioning that cushions the impact of receiving a game ball on, for example, the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405 of the first embodiment or the opening peripheral edge of the starting winning opening 402 that receives the lower surface of the starting winning shutter 405. A material (rubber, a relatively soft thermoplastic elastomer, etc.) may be installed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the generation of damage and collision noise. The cushioning material can also be applied to the large winning shutter 434 of the second embodiment and the starting winning shutter 405 of the third embodiment.

(E) In the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b embodies a configuration in which the game ball is moved to the winning opening in a state where the winning ball can be immediately won for a predetermined time. It is also possible to apply such a structure to the starting ball entering means used for a predetermined lottery such as the second starting winning device 33b. In this case, more game balls can be intensively entered into the starting entry means for a short period of time without lengthening the opening time, and the prize balls given when entering the starting entry means are reduced. Even so, since the number of balls entering the starting ball entry means increases (the ratio of balls entering the total number of shots increases), it is possible to prevent or suppress the speed at which the number of balls held decreases too fast. Furthermore, as the number of balls entered into the starting ball entry means increases, the chances of lottery increase, and it is possible to improve the interest by receiving more lottery and increasing the chances of directing. It is also possible to create new playability.

(F) In the second embodiment, the large winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is configured to slide back and forth, but is not particularly limited to such a configuration and slides up and down. The large winning opening that opens back and forth may be configured to open and close, or may be configured to be rotatable. Further, in the second embodiment, the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state is placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and is near the right end portion on the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434. It is configured to move from the site to the left end on the other end side in the longitudinal direction, but it is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and the grand prize opening is immediately opened when the grand prize shutter 434 is opened. It suffices if the game ball can be moved as long as possible while being able to enter the 432 ball.

For example, the second variable winning device 32b may be configured as shown in FIG. 58. That is, the large winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b in FIG. 58 extends vertically to close the large winning opening 432 and extends to the front and back to open the large winning opening 432. It is configured to be rotatable around the axial direction extending to the left and right along the upper edge portion when it is in the closed position. Further, the receiving member 801 for receiving the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b when the large winning shutter 434 is in the closed position is provided. The receiving member 801 includes a receiving plate 802 extending forward from the lower edge portion of the large winning opening 432 and a front plate 803 extending upward from the leading edge portion of the receiving plate 802, and is integrally formed of a transparent resin material. ing.

At least the upper surface (receiving surface) of the receiving plate 802 is slightly inclined downward toward the left and further inclined downward slightly toward the rear. Therefore, the game ball received by the receiving member 801 moves to the left on the receiving member 801 while maintaining the state of being in contact with the rear grand prize shutter 434. When the large prize shutter 434 is set to the open position, the game ball leaning against the large prize shutter 434 while moving the receiving member 801 is tilted backward because the support of the large prize shutter 434 is released. Guided by the receiving plate 802, the ball will enter the large winning opening 432 on the back side. If the game ball is received by the receiving member 801 but the large winning shutter 434 is not opened by the time the game ball reaches the left end of the receiving member 801, it is discharged to the outside of the second variable winning device 32b. To.

Even when the second variable winning device 32b is configured as described above, if the second variable winning device 32b such that the game ball is leaning against the large winning opening shutter 434 is opened, the large winning opening 432 is immediately opened. The second embodiment described above, in which the game ball can be moved along the longitudinal direction of the large winning opening shutter 434 while the ball can be entered, thus increasing the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b. Basically the same effect is achieved.

(G) In the second embodiment, the game ball mounted on the large winning shutter 434 in the closed position is moved from the vicinity of one end in the left-right direction, which is the longitudinal direction of the large winning shutter 434, toward the other end. So, although it is configured to make the time on the grand prize shutter 434 as long as possible, it is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a game ball mounted on the grand prize shutter 434 in the closed position can be used. The upper surface of the prize-winning shutter 434 may be configured to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the prize-winning shutter 434.

For example, in the second variable winning device 32b shown in FIG. 56, a ball entering opportunity to meander a game ball moving on the upper surface of the large winning shutter 434 by appropriately forming a plurality of convex portions on the upper surface of the large winning shutter 434. A guide groove 811 is provided as an imparting means. In this embodiment, the game ball that enters the second variable winning device 32b by the gaming member such as a game nail arranged on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b is the most of the guide groove 811 of the large winning shutter 434. It is configured to be guided to a portion 812 near the right end (which is wider than the other portions), which is an upstream position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56B, a portion of the mounting plate 431 for mounting the second variable winning device 32b to the game board 30 above the accommodation opening 408 in which the large winning shutter 434 appears (hereinafter referred to as “)”. The front surface of the upper base portion (referred to as 813) is inclined rearward toward the upper side. The lower end portion (upper edge portion of the accommodation opening 408) of the upper base portion 813 is located below the central portion of the game ball moving on the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434, and is located above the grand prize shutter 434. When the game ball moving is moved backward, the upper base portion 813 comes into contact with a portion below the center of the game ball. Therefore, when the large prize shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced to the rear open position, the game ball mounted on the large prize shutter 434 is caught on the step defining the leading edge portion of the guide groove 811. Even if the game ball moves backward and is pressed against the upper base portion 813 side, the game ball is guided upward by the front surface of the upper base portion 813 and is displaced upward while relative to the step defining the leading edge portion of the guide groove 811. It is designed to overcome the target and enter the big winning opening 432.

As described above, a meandering guide groove 811 is formed on the upper surface of the prize-winning shutter 434, and the game ball placed on the upper surface of the prize-winning shutter 434 meanders more than the width in the longitudinal direction of the prize-winning shutter 434. By moving a long distance, it is possible to keep the state in which the game ball can be entered into the large winning opening 432 for a longer time when the large winning shutter 434 is in the open position. Therefore, during the period in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened a plurality of times, the game ball is played at the timing of reaching the second variable winning device 32b when the second variable winning device 32b is in the closed state. Even if it is launched, the game ball moves as soon as possible to the second variable winning device 32b at a position where it can enter the second variable winning device 32b as soon as the second variable winning device 32b is opened, but stays within that range as much as possible. It is possible to wait for the timing when the second variable winning device 32b is opened next. As a result, the effects of the second embodiment, such as increasing the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b, are more reliably achieved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game ball mounted on the upper surface of the large prize shutter 434 meanders in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular large prize shutter 434 that is long left and right, and the large prize shutter 434 is used. Toward the downstream side in the longitudinal direction, the large prize shutter 434 is moved by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction. Generally, the width of the front and rear of the game area defined by the game board 30 and the transparent glass unit 137 arranged in front of the game board 30 is narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball (about 11 mm). For this reason, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the large winning shutter is meandered in a direction intersecting the lateral direction of the substantially rectangular large winning shutter, or the center side of the substantially circular large winning shutter. If an attempt is made to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the prize-winning shutter while turning toward the outer peripheral side, it becomes necessary to make the front-back width of the prize-winning shutter wider than the front-back width of the game area. There is a possibility that a point behind the front surface of the game board 30 must be selected as a suitable starting point for the game ball moving on the large prize shutter. In this case, the configuration may be complicated. In this regard, if the game ball mounted on the upper surface of the large prize shutter 434 is only meandered in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular large prize shutter 434, the front-rear width of the large prize shutter 434 may be increased. The game ball mounted on the prize-winning shutter 434 can be moved by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the prize-winning shutter 434 without making it wider than the front-back width of the game area. Therefore, such a defect can be eliminated.

Further, for example, instead of forming unevenness on the large winning shutter 434, a protrusion is formed above the large winning shutter 434 in the closed position so as to protrude inward from the opening peripheral edge of the large winning opening 432. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a ball entry opportunity granting means is configured and the game ball placed on the upper surface of the grand prize shutter 434 is guided by the protrusion and moved while meandering. In that case, the grand prize shutter is used. Even if the 434 is displaced to the open position, the protrusion remains in a state of protruding inward from the opening peripheral edge of the large winning opening 432. For this reason, the ease of entering the game ball into the large winning opening 432 may decrease. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, by forming the guide groove 811 directly in the large winning shutter 434, the guide groove 811 is formed. If the prize-winning shutter 434 is displaced to the open position, the guide groove 811 naturally moves out of the game area as a whole, so that such a problem can be eliminated.

Further, among the mounting plates 431, the front surface of the upper base portion 813, which may come into contact with the game ball mounted on the grand prize shutter 434 in the closed position, is inclined rearward toward the top, and the grand prize shutter Even if the game ball mounted on the 434 is caught by the step defining the leading edge of the guide groove 811 of the grand prize shutter 434 that moves to the rear open position and is pressed against the upper base portion 813, the upper base portion 813 It can be displaced upward so as to ride on the ground, and can get over the big prize shutter 434 (step of the guide groove 811) relatively smoothly. Therefore, when the large prize shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced to the rear open position, it is placed on the large prize shutter 434 between the step defining the leading edge of the guide groove 811 and the upper base portion 813. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is pressed so as to be pinched and the game ball pops off due to the force. Therefore, when the large winning shutter 434 is opened, the game ball mounted on the large winning shutter 434 can be more reliably entered into the large winning opening 432, and the second variable winning device 32b or the like is damaged. It can be suppressed.

As a modification of the configuration in which the ball can be moved by a predetermined distance in a state where the ball can be immediately entered into the large prize opening 432 as long as the large prize shutter 434 is opened, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, the front surface of the large prize shutter 434 or the receiver is received. A small protrusion 805 may be provided on the upper surface of the plate 802 as a means for imparting a ball entry opportunity. The presence of the small protrusion 805 suppresses the moving speed of the game ball moving on the receiving member 801. Therefore, as soon as the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the game ball is allowed to stay in the position where the ball can enter the large winning opening 432 for as long as possible, and the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b is increased. The effect of enhancing is further achieved.

Further, for example, the upper surface of the big prize shutter is formed in a substantially arc shape with a low center and high left and right, and the game ball placed on the big prize shutter rolls back and forth from side to side, and when the momentum weakens, the big prize shutter is used. It may be configured to fall. In addition, when the said configuration (a configuration in which a game ball is reciprocated to the left and right on a large prize shutter corresponds to a means for giving a chance to enter a ball), the game ball rolled on the large prize shutter is a large prize. Since it must be possible to spill from the top of the shutter forward or backward and eject it to the outside of the second variable winning device, a hole or hole is formed in the game board 30 to make the game ball second variable before and after the large winning shutter. It is necessary to form a passage for discharging to the outside of the winning device.

In addition, for example, a large winning shutter that can be displaced between a closed position that closes the large winning opening 432 that opens forward and an open position that displaces from below the closed position to open the large winning opening 432. Displacement between the 434 and the appearance position that appears upward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802 of the receiving member 801 to form the guide groove 811 on the receiving plate 802 and the immersion position that exits downward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802. If a possible guide member is provided and the large winning shutter 434 is set to the open position, the guide member may also be set to the immersive position, and so on.

(H) Further, in the second embodiment, the shape of the large winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is not particularly limited. For example, it is equipped with a rotating shaft extending to the left and right and a plurality of blade-shaped opening / closing plates extending in the centrifugal direction from the rotating shaft. By rotating the blade-shaped opening / closing plate downward, the game ball on which the ball is placed may be configured to win a prize in the large winning opening 432.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second variable winning device 32b is set to the open position, all the game balls mounted on the large winning shutter 434 enter the large winning opening 432. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and at least the possibility of entering a ball may be increased. For example, the large winning shutter 434 may be extended to the upper right so as to protrude upstream from the large winning opening 432. Further, instead of extending the large winning shutter 434, a starting table such as the reception table 479 of the fourth embodiment is provided adjacent to the upper end of the large winning shutter 434 in the closed position as a rectifying means. , The starting table may be configured to pass (drop) the game ball and then be guided to the big winning opening 432 side. In this case, it is possible to suppress variations in the speed, angle, and the like of the game ball entering the large winning opening 432 side, and further suppress damage to the large winning shutter 434. The start stand may be configured to be more resistant to impact than the grand prize shutter 434 (provided with a means for cushioning the impact or has a high strength of itself), or may be configured to be removable and replaceable. It may be possible.

(I) Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the second variable winning device 32b may be configured. That is, the large winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b shown in FIG. 57 is displaced back and forth between the closed position that closes the large winning opening 432 that opens upward and the open position that opens the large winning opening 432. A possible first shutter 821 and above the first shutter 821 are provided side by side at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the first shutter 821, and are located above the large winning opening 432 with the first shutter 821 in between. It is provided with a second shutter 822 that can be displaced back and forth between the closed position and the open position that exits from above the large winning opening 432. The first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position at the same time, and in this embodiment, both are integrally formed.

The second shutter 822 is slightly inclined downward toward the left. Further, the first shutter 821 is slightly inclined downward toward the right. Further, the first shutter 821 has a larger left-right width than the second shutter 822, the left end portion is located to the left by the diameter of the game ball or more from the left end portion of the second shutter 822, and the first shutter 821 Is formed with a stopper 823 protruding upward from the left end portion. Further, in this embodiment, the game ball that enters the second variable winning device 32b by the gaming member such as a game nail arranged on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b is moved to the upstream side of the second shutter 822. It is configured to be guided to the part near the right end, which is the position.

Then, the game ball that has fallen to the second shutter 822 in the closed position moves to the left on the second shutter 822 and falls from the left end portion, but the game ball is in the closed position. It lands near the left end of the 1 shutter 821 and moves to the right on the 1st shutter 821 this time. Further, when the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 in the closed position are displaced to the open position, almost all the game balls mounted on the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are placed in the large winning opening 432. It will enter the ball. The game ball that has moved on the first shutter 821 to the right end of the first shutter 821 will be discharged to the outside from the second variable winning device 32b.

When the above configuration is adopted, the position and speed of the game ball falling (entering) on the first shutter 821 can be limited to some extent by the second shutter 822, and the movement of the game ball on the first shutter 821 can be limited. It can be suitable. Further, not only the game ball mounted on the first shutter 821 in the closed position but also the game ball mounted on the second shutter 822 in the closed position, the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are moved to the open position. By displacing the ball, the ball enters the large winning opening 432, so that the same action and effect as in the second embodiment, such as efficiently entering the game ball into the large winning opening 432, can be achieved more reliably. ..

In the above embodiment, the game nail may be installed at a position directly below the second shutter 822. However, in the game nail, when the second shutter 822 in the closed position is in the open position, the game ball mounted on the second shutter 822 can enter the large winning opening 432 when the second shutter 822 is in the closed position. In addition, it is arranged so as not to hinder the movement of the game ball moving on the first shutter 821 in the closed position. When such a configuration is adopted, with the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 in the open position, from a position above the second shutter 822 without any contact with a game member such as a game nail on the way. When the game ball jumps directly from a relatively high position with respect to the large winning opening 432, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the impact when receiving the game ball becomes relatively large. Further, it is also possible to support the lower surface of the second shutter 822 with the game nail.

(J) In the second embodiment, the game ball is guided (falls) from the upper left position to the lower right by a game nail, an accessory, or the like on the upper surface of the large winning shutter 434 that is inclined to the lower left. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the game ball is dropped in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434, and the (first) speed of the game ball moving on the big prize shutter 434 can be slowed down as much as possible.

(K) In the third embodiment, the installation position of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459) is not particularly limited, and there is no basic problem as long as it is on the upstream side of the starting winning opening 402. However, if the distance between the switching plate 451 and the starting winning opening 402 changes, the timing of switching between the open state and the closed state of the switching plate 451 also changes, so that the relative position, shape, etc. may change. For example, it is necessary to make a corresponding design based on simulations.

(L) In the third embodiment, a synchronization means may be provided for synchronizing the opening / closing timing of the start winning shutter 405 with the operation timing of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459). The synchronization means may be, for example, an interlocking mechanism that is mechanically interlocked, an opening / operating trigger, and a control means that opens / operates under the same opening / operating conditions. It may be a control means for measuring the opening timing of the start winning shutter 405 and adjusting the timing.

(M) The second start winning device 33b of the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b of the second embodiment, and the second starting winning device 33b of the third embodiment may be used in combination as appropriate. It is possible.

(O) In the fourth embodiment, the shape of the second starting winning device 33b is not particularly limited. For example, the first starting winning opening 472 is arranged on the upper left side of the second starting winning opening 473. The game ball may be configured to flow from left to right. In addition, the connecting passage 477 may also be configured to flow down while turning the game ball, for example.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the second start winning device 33b, there are a first start winning opening 472 and a second starting winning opening 473. There is one start winning switch 224b to detect the entry of a ball), and the game ball can be entered at the right and left ends of the entrance, and the intermediate position is blocked by the connecting passage 477, and the ball can be entered. Each unit may be configured to be openable and closable by a shutter. The number of starting winning openings provided in the second starting winning device 33b may be three or more.

(P) In the fourth embodiment, the privilege given to either the first start winning opening 472 or the second starting winning opening 473 of the second starting winning device 33b is the same regardless of whether the game ball enters the ball. However, they may be configured differently. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, even if the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, it is discharged from the second starting winning device 33b without winning any of the starting winning openings 472 and 473. In the case of a configuration that has the possibility of winning, winning the 2nd starting winning slot 473, which may win at a later timing, has a generous (larger / more) benefit than winning the 1st starting winning slot 472. It may be configured to be granted. As a privilege, for example, the number of game balls paid out based on the detection of the start winning switch 224b is large, the winning probability of the winning / failing lottery performed based on the detection of the starting winning switch 224b is high, and the detection of the starting winning switch 224b. It is advantageous for the player to distribute the jackpot type when winning in the winning / failing lottery performed based on There is a start winning switch 224b and a through gate switch 225 that detect a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting winning opening 472 (variation display of special symbol and variation display of normal symbol are reserved). ) Etc. can be mentioned. The game ball can reach the second start winning opening 473 only when the first starting winning opening 472 is closed by the first shutter 474, and the game ball passes through the first shutter 474, and the first Since the ball cannot be entered unless the second shutter 475 is opened before passing through the two shutters 475, the privilege given based on the entry into the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. If you want to make a difference, the privilege given based on the entry into the 2nd start winning opening 473 (in terms of the difficulty of entering the ball or simply in terms of the fun of appearance) is the player. It is desirable that it is more advantageous for.

Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, a prize is always won in any of the starting winning openings having a plurality of game balls (or when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b during a predetermined period). , If the game ball is configured to win in any of the multiple start winning openings), it is possible to win at a timing earlier than the starting winning opening where the game ball may win at a later timing. It may be configured so that winning a prize in a sexual start winning opening is given a generous privilege. Further, when there are three or more starting winning openings of the second starting winning device 33b, the privilege of winning a prize in the starting winning opening at the intermediate point may be increased (many). In addition, the starting winning opening with the larger (more) winning privilege is configured to be located (prominently) on the front side of the player side than the starting winning opening with the smaller (less) winning privilege. Is desirable.

The configuration of the second starting winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment may be embodied in another object, for example, the second variable winning device 32b or the like. That is, in this case, there are a plurality of large winning openings of the second variable winning device 32b, and a shutter that opens and closes each large winning opening, a connecting passage connecting the large winning openings, and the like are used to reach the large winning opening on the upstream side by the shutter. The game balls for which the prize is rejected will be sequentially guided to the large prize opening on the downstream side. Further, instead of the configuration in which the game ball is guided to another winning slot when the ball cannot be entered into the predetermined winning slot as in the fourth embodiment, the starting winning device is embodied. Alternatively, it can also be applied to a variable winning device.

(Q) Further, in the fourth embodiment, a speed reducing means for slowing the passing speed of the game ball passing through the connecting passage 477 may be provided. For example, install a windmill that pushes the blades away with the game ball and rotates it, or a roller that rotates in the direction to send the game ball to the side opposite to the direction in which the game ball passes (for example, eccentric and send the game ball to the opposite side). There is no phase, and the game ball that has entered the connecting passage 477 always moves to the downstream side to reach the position above the second starting winning opening 473).

(R) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing patterns of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b of various jackpot types are not particularly limited, and are not particularly limited for each model. It can be set as appropriate. Further, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / losing lottery is configured to fluctuate, but the winning probability does not fluctuate (is constant), and the period of the high-entry state (variable) given after the jackpot state ends. The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns (number of times) are prepared.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a and the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b are separated. The table is referred to, and the distribution of jackpot types is configured to change, but they may be the same.

Further, in the above embodiment, two start winning devices 33a and 33b for displaying the variation of the special symbol based on the detection of the entered game ball are provided, and the variable winning device is opened in the big hit state or the small hit state. Two devices 32a and 32b are provided, and one through gate 34 is provided in which a variation display of a normal symbol is performed based on the detection of a passing game ball, but the number and arrangement of these are particularly limited. It is not a thing, but can be set for each model.

(S) In the above embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is held after the variation display (first variation display) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a that has already been suspended. The second variation display has priority so that the variation display based on the entry of the game ball (second variation display) is digested before the first variation display, and the reserved order is changed. However, it may be configured to be digested in the reserved order regardless of whether it is the first variable display or the second variable display.

(T) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to perform the main processing (see FIG. 9) and then the normal processing (see FIG. 10), but the configuration is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal process in the above embodiment is performed, for example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec. The processing performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the process of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which the flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the process of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt process as in the above embodiment.

(U) In the above embodiment, the information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs is overwritten in the hit / miss random number storage area that stores the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1, but such a configuration is particularly important. Not limited to. For example, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be provided for the execution area of the special fluctuation hold area and each hold area in addition to the winning random number storage area. In addition to the area, an execution area of the special variable hold area and a storage area corresponding to each hold area may be provided individually, and information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be stored in the storage area. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the jackpot type may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variable selection counter C3. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, it is reconfirmed whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the winning, and the processing corresponding to the confirmation processing is performed. It may be configured as.

(V) It may be carried out as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a movable means that can be changed into a specific area in which a gaming ball moving in a gaming area can enter, an open state that allows entry into a specific area, and a closed state that prohibits entry into a specific area ( Detects variable ball-entry means provided with a wing member), specific ball-entry means and non-specific ball-entry means that allow a game ball that has entered a specific area to enter, and a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. Detects a specific ball entry detection means (condition detection means), a special starting means that is provided outside the specific area and allows a game ball moving in the game area to enter, and a game ball that has entered the special starting means. It is provided with a special start detecting means for detecting the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means and the non-specific ball entry means. A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player regardless of which of the balls is entered, and the main control means uses the variable ball entry means for the first time based on the detection of the special start detection means. A specified number of variable winning means that are opened only once or multiple times, or that the variable ball-entry means are opened for a second time longer than the first hour, or are opened. One round is until the game ball enters, and a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state in which this is repeated a specified number of times. It may be applied to a gaming machine that generates a jackpot state when a jackpot is won in a win / fail lottery or when a specific ball entry detection means is detected. In addition to pachinko machines, it is also implemented as an arrange ball machine, various similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as rotating cylinder type game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines. You may.

(W) In the fifth embodiment, the configurations of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are not particularly limited, and the design can be changed as appropriate. For example, as in the second starting winning device 33b (see FIG. 38 and the like) of the first embodiment, the game ball may be configured to be able to pass the same position above the starting winning opening 911 twice. Further, for example, as in the second variable winning device 32b (see FIG. 40, etc.) of the second embodiment, the game ball that reaches the second variable winning device 32b during the big hit state interval is large during the interval. It may be configured to keep moving on the winning shutter 434. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 44, a mechanism capable of delaying the arrival of the game ball at the second start winning device 33b is provided on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b depending on the situation. May be good. However, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the game ball cannot enter the second variable winning device 32b without passing through the second starting winning device 33b as in the fifth embodiment, the game is as shown in FIG. 45. If the ball is stopped, there is a concern that the game itself will be delayed, so it is desirable to configure the game so that the flow of the ball itself is not stopped. It should be noted that a general configuration may be used, such as the first start winning device 33a (or one having an opening / closing member attached to the first starting winning device 33a; see the second starting winning device 33b in FIG. 41) or the first variable winning device 32a.

Further, for example, as the second variable winning device 32b, a first passage for guiding the game ball entered in the large winning opening 921 to a count switch in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the detection of the game ball. , The second passage that guides the game ball that entered the big prize opening 921 to the V prize detection switch that is granted the right to continue the probability change mode or the big hit round based on the detection of the game ball, and the big prize. A so-called V-attacker may be adopted, which is provided with a distribution means for distributing the game ball entered in the winning opening 921 to either the first passage or the second passage. Further, the jackpot state is not limited to a configuration in which only one of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b is opened between the start and the end of the jackpot state. The first variable winning device 32a may be opened in a predetermined round, and the second variable winning device 32b may be opened in another round. When this configuration is adopted, the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are unitized, and the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b of the fifth embodiment are described. As in the relationship, the game ball that did not enter one of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b may be guided to the other. In this case, if a big hit state occurs, the player may launch the game ball aiming at the unit in which the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are integrated, and the first variable winning device 32a and It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to know which of the second variable winning devices 32b should be aimed at.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the game ball that has arrived at the entry point of the second start winning device 33b but has not entered the second start winning device 33b is guided to the second variable winning device 32b. Although it is configured, for example, on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b and on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b, the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 is transferred to the second starting winning device 33b. It may be configured so that the branch of the starting side passage leading to the right-handed winning unit 901 and the variable side passage leading the game ball entered into the right-handed winning unit 901 to the second variable winning device 32b is located. When adopting this configuration, a distribution means may be provided at the branch point.

The winning means unitized by the right-handed winning unit 901 is not particularly limited, and for example, the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b may be unitized, or the first start. The winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b may be unitized. Further, the installation position of a unitized multiple winning means such as the right-handed winning unit 901 is not particularly limited, and for example, either a right-handed game ball or a left-handed game ball can be entered. It may be provided at a position where a ball is possible.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball detected by the second start winning switch 224b and the second count switch 223b is always detected by the approach detection switch 941 and detected by the approach detection switch 941. The ball is configured to be guided to a position where the second start winning device 33b can enter the ball if the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, but the ball is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, it may be configured so that there is a path to the second start winning device 33b without passing through the approach detection switch 941, or after passing through the approach detection switch 941, the second start winning device 33b may be configured. If it is in the open state, it may be configured so that there is a passage that is discharged to the outside of the right-handed winning unit 901 without passing through a point where the ball can be entered. However, if it is desired to grasp the remaining balls in the right-handed winning unit 901, all the game balls that have entered the right-handed winning unit 901 are detected by the approach detection switch 941 and the approach detection switch 941 is hit to the right as much as possible. It is desirable to place it near the entrance of the unit 901.

(X) In the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b are unitized, and the game ball passing through the winning point of the second starting winning device 33b is the second variable winning device. Although it is configured to move to the entry point of 32b, the target of the winning device to be unitized, the relative positional relationship between the winning devices such as the upstream side and the downstream side, and the like are not particularly limited.

For example, in the fifth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is arranged on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b, but the second starting winning device 33b is arranged on the downstream side of the second variable winning device 32b. You may do it. In this case, in the big hit state where the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, the game ball hardly enters the second starting winning device 33b, so that the second starting winning device 33b is entered. The payout of game balls based on the balls will be virtually stopped. Therefore, the jackpot state can be advanced more quickly, and the right-handed winning unit 901 (when there are two or more prize balls based on winning the second variable winning device 32b, or during the jackpot state with a payout). When there is a possibility that the game ball does not enter either the second variable winning device 32b or the second starting winning device 33b even if the game ball is inserted into the second variable winning device 33b) The game ball is entered into the second starting winning device 33b in the jackpot state. It is possible to avoid a relatively large change in the total number of game balls paid out during the jackpot state, depending on whether or not the ball enters. As a result, the total number of game balls to be paid out in the same type of jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is open can be made substantially constant, which facilitates the design regarding the payout (payout rate) of the game balls. Can be done. Further, as a game concept (characteristic of a predetermined jackpot state), it is possible to derive a jackpot state with little variation in the number of payouts of game balls.

In this embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the arrangement of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b is reversed, but the one that matches the concept of each model should be adopted. Just do it. That is, for example, in the "configuration in which one game ball is paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b", the increase of the game ball cannot be expected at all, and the second variable winning device. Considering that the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b in the jackpot state where the 32b is open is a waste of time, the second variable winning device 32b is arranged on the upstream side as in this embodiment. Alternatively, without increasing the payout rate of the game ball, the time required for digesting the jackpot state (the time during which the effect for the jackpot state can be derived) is made as long as possible so that the jackpot state itself can be enjoyed more. (Enjoy the effect during the jackpot state) The second start winning device 33b may be arranged on the upstream side as in the fifth embodiment.

Further, for example, the through gate 34 may be configured to be included in the right-handed winning unit 901. Further, a through gate 34 is arranged on the upstream side (behind the entrance accessory 931) of the second start winning device 33b of the fifth embodiment, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 34 is (almost always) the second start. A ball entry guiding means for guiding to the winning device 33b may be provided, and in the time saving mode or the probability variation mode, the game ball passing through the through gate 34 may be configured to enter the second starting winning device 33b as it is. The arrangement of the through gate 34 is not particularly limited, but if the through gate 34 is installed on the downstream side of the second start winning device 33b, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 34 will be the first as it is. Since there is no possibility of entering the 2 starting winning device 33b, it is desirable that the through gate 34 is arranged on the upstream side of the 2nd starting winning device 33b in order to suppress waste balls.

(Y) In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game ball is configured to always enter (enter) the right-handed winning unit 901, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the right-handed game ball is not limited to the right-handed winning unit 901. The game ball is played from the out opening 36 without passing through the right-handed winning unit 901 (without passing through the game area covered in front by the front decorative plate 903 of the right-handed winning unit 901 or the entrance accessory 931). It may be configured so that it may be discharged outside the game area. Further, when such a configuration is adopted, an assist winning device (general winning device) is provided in which a right-handed game ball can be entered and two or more prize balls are awarded based on the entry of the game ball. It may be that. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the number of game balls held by the player is reduced in a high-entry state in which the player strikes to the right.

Further, the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 may be configured so as not to reach the starting shutter 912 (upper connecting plate 912b) of the second starting winning device 33b on the upstream side, or right-handed. The game ball that enters the winning unit 901 and passes through the upper surface of the starting shutter 912 of the second starting winning device 33b on the upstream side reaches the large winning shutter 922 (upper connecting plate 922b) of the second variable winning device 32b on the downstream side. It may be configured so that it may not be used. In addition, when adopting this configuration, the first non-arrival detection switch that detects the game ball discharged to the outside of the right-handed winning unit 901 without reaching the start shutter 912 after being detected by the approach detection switch 941. Or, after passing through the upper surface of the start shutter 912 of the second start winning device 33b, the second non-arrival detection switch that detects the game ball discharged to the outside of the right-handed winning unit 901 without reaching the lower prize winning shutter 922 is set. It may be provided (of course, it may not be provided).

In addition, after the game ball has entered the right-handed winning unit 901, the right-handed winning unit 901 is installed with respect to whether or not the ball reaches the entry point to the starting winning opening 911 and the entry point to the large winning opening 921. It may be configured so that the change occurs depending on the arrangement of the game nails provided in the area and the like. Furthermore, among the game balls that entered the right-handed winning unit 901 in the time reduction mode and the probability variation mode (first ball entry enabled state), the ratio of the game balls that did not enter the start winning opening 911 can be calculated or exited. Of the game balls that entered the right-handed winning unit 901 in the jackpot state with balls (the second ball-possible state), the ratio of the game balls that did not enter the big winning opening 921 can be calculated, or the above-mentioned first. 1 The number of detections of the non-arrival detection switch or the second non-arrival detection switch may be counted. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 can obtain information on the status of the game nails provided in the installation area of the right-handed winning unit 901, for example, based on (according to) such information, the posture of the entrance accessory 931. May be configured to displace (suggest and teach information to the player by the posture of the entrance accessory 931), or include such information in the QR code (registered trademark) displayed at the end of the mobile-linked game. It may be configured to be sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal. Regarding the game nails provided in the installation area of the right-handed winning unit 901, the game nails exposed from the nail exposed hole 948 are inserted by interposing an iron rod or the like capable of inserting the tip portion into the exposed hole 948. It can be adjusted by hitting it with a hammer.

(Z) In the fifth embodiment, the front decorative plate 903 as the front decorative portion and the entrance accessory 931 form a part of the right-handed winning unit 901 (second starting winning device 33b and second). While forming the front wall of the variable winning device 32b, it is provided (so as to cover the front of the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b, the guide plate 919, etc.), but the installation position of the front decorative portion. Is not particularly limited. For example, it may be provided so as to cover the front of another winning device, or may be provided in a portion of the gaming area that does not overlap with a gaming member such as a winning device.

Further, although not particularly mentioned in the fifth embodiment, the design of the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed for each model. However, of the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931, at least the portion where the game ball can pass through the game area on the back surface side thereof, the game ball passing through the back surface side of the portion can be visually recognized (transparent or It shall be configured to be made of a translucent material or to form a slit (for the portion of the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 where the game ball cannot pass through the back side thereof). Does not have to be transparent). For example, information represented by symbol information such as letters and numbers (model information such as model name and probability of winning / failing lottery, copyright source, etc.) is attached to the front decorative board 903 (attach a printed sticker). ), For example, it may have information (decoration, background, etc.) represented by uneven processing, drawing a pattern, or coloring. Further, by configuring the information to be provided on the front side or the inside of the front decorative plate 903, even if the game ball moving in the game area comes into contact with the front decorative plate 903, the information is deleted. It is possible to suppress the situation where it becomes difficult to see.

Here, another embodiment of the entrance accessory 931 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. The entrance accessory 931 of the right-handed winning unit 901 shown in FIGS. 68 to 70 is integrally formed with the front decorative plate 903, and is arranged on the rear surface side of the semi-transparent, substantially disk-shaped fixed part 971 and the fixed part 971. It is equipped with a semi-transparent, substantially disk-shaped rotating part 972. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, a motor 973 that rotates the rotating parts 972 and a link mechanism 974 (rotating shaft, gears, etc.) that transmits the driving force of the motor 973 to the rotating parts 972 are provided.

The fixed part 971 has a notch portion 971a formed in a substantially V shape so as to open upward. Further, the rotating part 972 is also formed with a notch portion 972a in a substantially V shape. In this embodiment, the diameter of the fixed part 971 and the diameter of the rotating part 972 are the same. Further, the forming range (about 120 degrees) of the notch 972a of the rotating part 972 is wider than the forming range (about 105 degrees) of the notch 971a of the fixed part 971.

Further, in the entrance accessory 931 of this embodiment, the rotating part 972 is appropriately rotated and displaced, so that the entire notch portion 971a of the fixed part 971 is closed by the rotating part 972 as shown in FIG. 70 (a). In the closed state, the rotating part 972 is visible inside the notch 971a of the fixed part 971 as shown in FIG. 70 (b), but about half of the notch 971a is open (about half). Is covered with the rotating part 972), and the rotating part 972 is not partially visible inside the notch 971a of the fixed part 971 as shown in FIG. 70 (c), and the notch is not visible. It is configured to change to a large open state in which the entire portion 971a is open.

Then, in the time reduction mode and the probabilistic mode (first ball entry possible state), the entrance accessory 931 is in the small open state shown in FIG. 70 (b), and in the big hit state with a ball (second ball entry possible state), the entrance role The object 931 is in the large open state shown in FIG. 70 (c), and in other states, the entrance accessory 931 is in the closed state shown in FIG. 70 (a). As a result, if the entrance accessory 931 (the size of the opening) is visually recognized, which of the second starting winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b is in a state where the game ball can enter, or which one. It is possible to grasp whether the ball is impossible or difficult to enter.

Further, the fixed part 971 is formed with a curved elongated peephole 975. On the other hand, in the rotating part 972, when the entrance accessory 931 is in the small open state, the small open display area 976 is exposed forward through the peephole 975 and the character "chance" is written. When the entrance accessory 931 is in the large open state, it is exposed forward through the peephole 975 and is provided with a large open display area 977 in which the characters "big hit" are written. That is, even by visually recognizing the display areas 976 and 977, it is possible to enter the second start winning device 33b or the second variable winning device 32b, or neither of them can enter the ball. It is possible to grasp whether the situation is possible or difficult.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the entrance accessory 931 is provided so as to be rotatable, but it may be moved in a different manner or may be configured not to operate. For example, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, or when performing a fake effect thereof, an effect in which the entrance accessory 931 rotates is derived, and a big hit state with a ball is generated in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened. In that case, the entrance accessory 931 is stopped at the winning position, in the case of a probable change jackpot without a ball, the entrance accessory 931 is stopped at the high entry compatible position, and in other cases, the entrance accessory 931 is stopped. It may be configured to stop at the normal position. Further, for example, instead of the entrance accessory 931 operating, the entrance accessory 931 is provided with a light emitting means such as a three-color LED or a movable accessory that changes the light emitting mode according to the state, and the mode is changed. It may be configured to teach the state by LED.

Further, for example, the entrance accessory 931 may be configured to be mechanically interlocked with the start solenoid 913 that operates the start shutter 912 and the grand prize solenoid 923 that operates the grand prize shutter 922. In this case, it is possible to simplify the displacement control of the entrance accessory 931. In addition, it is desirable to provide a mark that makes the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 901 easy to understand, and further, in the right-handed winning unit 901, any of a high-entry state, a big hit state with a ball output, and any other state. It is desirable that a means for teaching whether the condition is provided is provided. Further, even when the front decorative plate 903 and the entrance accessory 931 are provided, it is desirable to configure the game board 30 so that only the same game nails are erected. In this case, the game nails can be unified, the productivity of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved, the cost can be reduced, and the like.

(Aa) Further, the formation position and number of the tool hole 947, the nail exposed hole 948, the ball clogging clearing hole 949, and the like are not particularly limited. For example, the ball clogging clearing hole 949 is formed along (parallel) the upper surfaces of the upper block plates 912b and the lower block plate 912c of the start shutter 912 and the upper block plates 922b and 922c of the grand prize shutter 922. It may be formed (it may be continuously formed in a line shape or intermittently in a dot shape). Further, it is assumed that the ball clogging clearing hole 949 is formed in a portion including the front surface of the introduction path 915a and the re-entry path 915b of the detour member 915, and the front surface of the introduction path 925a and the re-entry path 925b of the detour member 925. May be good. By adopting these configurations, it is possible to more reliably achieve the effect of eliminating ball clogging in the backside region of the right-handed winning unit 901. In addition, the ball clogging clearing hole 949 may be formed so as not to be engaged with the approach detection switch 941 or the discharge detection switch 943 for crime prevention.

(Bb) In the fifth embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 detects the number of winnings in the second variable winning device 32b or the remaining number of winnings up to the upper limit in each jackpot round in the jackpot state with balls. It may be configured to display the count as a corresponding display, and may be configured to update the count display based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941 as the prior detection means. For example, the decorative symbol display device 42 counts and displays the remaining number of game balls up to the upper limit of winning the second variable winning device 32b in each jackpot round with a big hit with a ball, and the jackpot is displayed as a count display. At the start of the round, "8" is displayed in "red", and one is subtracted based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941 during the big hit state with a ball ("7" if it is "8"). Is displayed in "yellow", and based on the detection of the second count switch 223b, the displayed value is not changed and the color is changed to "red".

If the second start winning switch 224b or the discharge detection switch 943 is detected while the color of the count display is "yellow", the count display is returned to the value added by one and "red". Change to. Even in the big hit state where the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, the ball winning support lottery is performed and the second starting winning device 33b is opened, so that the game ball can be played. After being detected by the approach detection switch 941, there is a good possibility that the ball will enter the second start winning device 33b before reaching the second variable winning device 32b. Further, in this embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b corresponds to the display target detection means, the "red" count display corresponds to the ball entry detection compatible display, and the "yellow" count display corresponds to the first ball detection compatible display. Corresponds to.

By adopting the above configuration, the time lag from when the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 to when it is detected by the second starting winning switch 224b becomes too long in the jackpot state with a payout. Therefore, the tempo after the game ball enters the right-handed winning unit 901 is slow (the entry sound effect A corresponding to the entry into the second starting winning device 33b is generated, but the count display is not accompanied, etc.), etc. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable or feels uneasy about whether the position where the game ball is aimed is correct. In addition, it is possible to give a feeling (close to) that the player has entered the game ball into the second variable winning device 32b.

Further, when the second start winning switch 224b or the discharge detection switch 943 is detected in the state where the "yellow count display" is derived, the count display is returned to the value added by one and ". By changing the color to "red", the player can be notified relatively quickly of the correct remaining number of the game balls up to the upper limit of entering the second variable winning device 32b, which triggers the end of the jackpot round. In other words, if the "yellow count is 0" remains, the variable winning device 32b is in a state where another game ball can be entered, but the time limit that triggers the end of the big hit round has arrived and the big hit. There is concern that situations such as the end of the round are likely to occur. In this regard, by returning from the "yellow count 0" to the "red count 1", it is possible to more positively notify that one more game ball can be entered into the variable winning device 32b.

By using the function (counting means) for counting the number of balls entered into the second variable winning device 32b for each round and the approach detection switch 941, the player becomes more than necessary in each round during the jackpot state. It is also possible to further suppress the act of launching a game ball. For example, when the maximum number of game balls in each jackpot round is 8 counts, the number of balls entered into the second variable winning device 32b in the current jackpot round is 6, and the remaining ball counter is "2". In the state of "", basically, the two remaining balls in the right-handed winning unit 901 enter the second variable winning device 32b and reach the jackpot round winning upper limit. Even if the ball is entered into the 901, the game ball cannot be entered into the second variable winning device 32b until the next big hit round is started. Therefore, when the count display becomes "0", "0" is displayed relatively large (in yellow), and when a game ball is being fired, a specific sound effect (for example, a buzzer sound) or an announcement is made. It may be configured to output or to display that the firing of the game ball in the current round is sufficient on the decorative symbol display device 42. In this case, it is possible to assist the efficient launch of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress waste balls. In particular, when the path of the game ball from the entrance of the right-handed winning unit 901 to the second variable winning device 32b is relatively long as in the fifth embodiment, the effect is more remarkable. It will be.

(Cc)
(Cc-1) In the fifth embodiment, the approach detection switch 941 and the emission detection switch 943 are electrically connected to the main control device 261 and the right-handed winning switch process is performed in the main control device 261. The approach detection switch 941 and the emission detection switch 943 are electrically connected to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 detects the approach detection switch 941 and the emission detection switch 943, for example, right-handed winning switch processing. It may be configured so that the processing performed based on is performed. In this case, in order to monitor the remaining balls in the right-handed winning unit 901 (of course, it is also possible to configure the configuration not to monitor the remaining balls in the right-handed winning unit 901), the second start winning switch 224b, the second. The detection information of the count switch 223b is output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and the remaining sphere is calculated on the sub control device 262 side.

Further, in the configuration in which the right-handed winning switch process is performed on the sub control device 262 side, the sub control device 262 and the external terminal board 240 are electrically connected, and the sub control device 262 is connected to the external terminal board 240 (via a hole). It may be configured to be able to output a signal corresponding to the occurrence of an error state to a computer or the like). In this case, when an error state occurs, not only the light emitting mode of the lamp changes in the pachinko machine 10 itself and the error occurrence sound is output, but also it is possible to notify the hall computer or the like. .. The processing of steps S4803 to S4808 of the right-handed winning unit may be configured to be performed by the sub-control device 262 (right-handed hold icon display processing) instead of the main control device 261.

(Cc-2) Further, in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, when the game ball that has entered the right-handed winning unit 901 (entrance accessory 931) is detected by the approach detection switch 941, there is a big hit with a ball. Is output with an approach sound effect A corresponding to (trying to enter) the second variable winning device 32b, and when the ball is in a high winning state, the second starting winning device 33b is output. The approach sound effect B corresponding to (or will enter) the ball is output, and the decorative symbol display device 42 suspends the variable display based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b. A pseudo-holding icon 963 will be displayed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, the approach sound effect A, the approach sound effect B, and the pseudo hold icon 963 may be omitted, or instead of such a configuration, or in addition, a light emitting means that emits light corresponding to the detection of the approach detection switch 941 may be provided. A movable accessory that operates in response to the detection of the approach detection switch 941 may be provided.

(Cc-3) Further, the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, a floating ring-shaped pseudo-holding icon 963 appears at a position to the right of the holding display area 961 in the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42, and appears in the holding display area 961 on the left side. When the display of moving toward (rolling) is performed and the second start winning switch 224b is detected, the pseudo hold icon 963 reaches the specified position of the hold display area 961 and stops. It may be configured to switch to the display mode as the hold icon 962. Basically, it means that the operation has stopped to become the official hold icon 962, but the shape, hue, and the like may be further changed. Further, for example, when the detection of the second start winning switch 224b is delayed, the pseudo hold icon 963 rotates on the spot at the hold icon 962 display scheduled position of the hold display area 961 as a time gain. It may be displayed. In addition, while the pseudo hold icon 963 works, the hold icon 962 does not work much, not only the pattern that it stops (the character as the hold icon 962 moves a little, such as waving and changing facial expressions). Alternatively, the hold icon 962 and the pseudo hold icon 963 may be differentiated by a large change in the movement (a movement that does not get out of the predetermined position of the hold display area 961). However, in the case of a configuration in which the pseudo-hold icon 962 also moves, it is desirable to accompany changes in aspects such as patterns and hues because it is weak as a differentiation.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, a snowman 966 is adopted as the hold icon, and snow or the like falls from above the hold display area 961 based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941 in the high entry state. At the same time as the incoming display is started, the snowman 967 being created as a pseudo-holding icon is displayed at a predetermined position in the hold display area 961, and the snowman may be gradually completed.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed at the position where the hold icon 962 is scheduled to be displayed, and the hold icon 962 is displayed at the position where the pseudo hold icon 963 was displayed in the high ball entry state. By doing so, the player can recognize that the pseudo hold icon 963 has been switched to the hold icon 962, but if the pseudo hold icon 963 itself is displaced, the movement is changed. By displaying the hold icon 962 so as to be connected, the player is made to recognize that the pseudo hold icon 963 has been switched to the hold icon 962. Although not particularly mentioned in the fifth embodiment, if the approach detection switch 941 is detected while the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed, the pseudo hold icon 963 for this time is also added. A plurality of pseudo hold icons 963 will be displayed in the hold display area 961.

(Cc-4) Further, in the above embodiment, the pseudo hold icon 963 and the bubble display 964 as an additional display displayed in front of the pseudo hold icon 963 are configured to be performed. It is not particularly limited. For example, an additional display such as a stage curtain, or an additional display during work (for example, a work scaffold is installed around the pseudo hold icon 963 and a worker is working) is performed. It may be that. It is also possible to omit the additional display such as the bubble display 964.

However, in order to suppress a situation in which it is difficult to tell whether the object currently displayed in the hold display area 961 is the pseudo hold icon 963 or the hold icon 962, additional display such as bubble display 964 is performed, or , It is desirable that the pseudo-hold icon 963 itself continues to be displaced (a floating ring rolls as in (cc-3) above, a snowman gradually forms, etc.). In this case, it is possible to give a strong impression that the mode of the pseudo-holding icon 963 has not been determined, and by extension, the pseudo-holding icon 963 may be further changed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles (such as the variable display not starting even though there is a hold, or the hold disappearing) caused by misunderstanding the pseudo hold icon 963 as the hold icon 962.

In case of the above trouble, for example, the detection history of the approach detection switch 941 (time for each detection), the detection history of the second start winning switch 224b, the detection history of the second count switch 223b, Further, the detection history of the emission detection switch 943 may be stored (predetermined amount) so that the detection history can be output by the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like. In this case, the data for explaining the circumstances and the like can be surely obtained, and it is possible to avoid the situation where the trouble is complicated.

(Cc-5) Further, in a state where one or more of the second variation displays are held, the pseudo hold icon 963 is displayed for a while even after the detection of the second start winning switch 224b is performed. In addition to continuing (of course, switching to the mode of the hold icon 962 by the start of the corresponding variable display), various lottery performed with the detection of the second start winning switch 224b for the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963. It may be configured so that the result can be reflected. For example, "egg" is displayed as a pseudo hold icon, and "something" when displaying "an egg is broken and something pops out" is determined based on the reception of the starting command, and then put on hold. As an icon, "a detailed display of something that pops out of the egg" may be performed. Here, it is intended that the timing of switching from the pseudo hold icon 963 to the hold icon 962 can be set relatively freely when one or more of the second variable displays are held. The switching timing does not necessarily have to be after the detection of the second start winning switch 224b is performed.

(Cc-6) The pattern of the hold icon 962 is drawn based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b (the detection information is received by the sub control device 262), and the detection of the approach detection switch 941 (detection information). May be determined based on the lottery performed based on the fact that the sub-control device 262 has received the above. For example, based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941, the sub control device 262 determines one of the bases of the pseudo hold icon 963 from a plurality of types. For example, it is assumed that there are "male", "female", "animal", and "robot" in the base, and the determination is made using a random number counter and a pattern table. Subsequently, based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b (reception of the starting command), details such as the "costume" of the pseudo hold icon 963 and the hold icon 962 are determined. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, in the hold display area 961 of the decorative symbol display device 42, when the intrusion detection switch 941 is detected, the pseudo hold icon 963 is "male", "female", "animal", Alternatively, when one of the silhouettes of the "robot" is displayed (FIG. 73 is the pseudo-hold icon 963 of the "man") and the second start winning switch 224b is detected, the details of the silhouette are gradually revealed. The hold icon 962 (Fig. 73 shows the "man" hold icon 962 on the left and the "animal" hold icon 962 on the right) that allows you to clearly see "costumes" and "possessed items". It is switched and displayed. By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to improve the staging by using the hold icon 962 and the pseudo hold icon 963.

Of the hold icons 962, the target determined based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b (the detection information is received by the sub control device 262) and the detection of the approach detection switch 941 (sub-control of the detection information). The target determined based on (received by the device 262) is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, when the "car" is adopted as the hold icon 962, only the "front half of the car" is displayed as the pseudo hold icon 963 based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941. Based on the reception of the starting command, the entire car as the hold icon 962 may be displayed with the addition of "the rear half of the car". In this case, the pseudo-hold icon 963 is clearly an unfinished mode, and it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the pseudo-hold icon 963 is confused with the hold icon 962.

Further, among the hold icons 962, the pattern determined based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b (the detection information is received by the sub control device 262) and the detection of the approach detection switch 941 (sub-control of the detection information). By combining with the pattern determined based on (received by the device 262), for example, the configuration may be such that the expectation degree such as the jackpot state and the latent probability mode is taught / suggested. That is, when the base (predetermined parts part) of the hold icon 962 is determined to be "airplane" based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b, it corresponds to the disconnection based on the reception of the starting command. If it is fluctuation information, it is easy to finish it as a relatively small and basic paint (post-determined parts part) airplane, while if it is fluctuation information corresponding to a big hit, it will be a relatively large and flashy pint airplane. It may be configured so that it is easy to finish and there is a possibility that a special paint that teaches the occurrence of a jackpot state may be selected. In this way, when determining the detailed pattern of the hold icon 962, which is determined when the starter command is received among the hold icon 962, the result of the win / fail lottery included in the starter command or the detection of the entry detection switch 941 has already been triggered. The hold icon 962 and the pseudo hold icon 963 are obtained by adopting a configuration in which the winning expectation degree for the jackpot state or the like is taught / suggested in the mode of the hold icon 962 with reference to the base of the hold icon 962 determined in. It is possible to have a stronger interest in.

The pattern of the hold icon 962 is basically determined based on the detection of the approach detection switch 941 together with the mode of the pseudo hold icon 963, and has already been determined when the second start winning switch 224b is detected. It may be configured to display the hold icon 962 of the determined pattern. Further, a lottery may be performed to display the hold icon 962 of the pattern already determined as it is, or to use the hold icon 962 corresponding to the content (starting command) of the winning / failing lottery or the like.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments are described below.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launcher enters the special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is generated, and the result of the lottery is performed by the variable display device. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

Further, in general, a pachinko machine has a so-called electronic tulip whose state changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A variable ball entry device called an attacker or the like is provided. Then, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player.

Further, although the variable ball-entry device is opened based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, many of them periodically repeat opening and closing a plurality of times based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition once. Therefore, by utilizing the fact that the variable ball entry device is opened and closed regularly, the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the variable ball entry device when the variable ball entry device is in the open state, and the variable ball entry device is variablely entered. By performing technical operations such as refraining from launching game balls at the timing when the ball device is closed and reaching the variable ball entry device, the number of game balls that do not enter the variable winning means can be reduced, and by extension, , You can increase the total number of game balls you will eventually get.

However, it is rare that there are a player who performs such a technical operation, a player who does not perform such a technical operation, or a player who cannot perform the technical operation well, and a relatively large difference occurs in the total number of game balls to be finally acquired. do not have.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an unfair feeling due to a technical disparity between players.

Means A1-1. A game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided,
A specific winning opening where a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
Closed, which is placed at a specific point on the specific entry route through which the game ball entering the specific winning opening will (always) pass, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening. It is equipped with an opening / closing member that can change the state between the state and the open state that allows the ball to enter or facilitates the entry.
When the opening / closing member is in the closed state, it is normal for a gaming ball (the specific point cannot pass to the specific winning opening side due to the closing state of the opening / closing member). Is a gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a time difference passing opportunity giving means for giving an opportunity to pass the specific point at another (later than now) timing.

When the opening / closing member is in the closed state, it is unlikely that the game ball will pass the specific winning opening side (virtually none), and the possibility of entering the specific winning opening is low (virtually none). On the other hand, according to the means A1-1, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the specific point is passed to the specific winning opening side due to the closing state of the opening / closing member. It is possible to give an opportunity to pass a specific point at a different timing (at a later timing than now) for a game ball that cannot be played. Therefore, even if the game ball reaches the specific point as usual, the game ball is specified as compared with the case where the game ball reaches the specific point at the timing when the specific point is closed by the opening / closing member in the closed state. By reaching the point, it is more likely that the opening / closing member is in the open state at that time. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball passes a specific point to the specific winning opening side and enters the specific winning opening. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of game balls that pass through the specific point and enter the specific winning opening, and the number of game balls that have reached the specific point, but the opening / closing member is restricted. Therefore, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening can be increased in proportion to the number of gaming balls excluded from the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. As a result, the game ball launched in the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched aiming at the specific winning opening, it does not reach the entry. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and suppress the situation where it is necessary to fire a large number of game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening to play the game. (If you want to embody it in an electric chew, you can raise the tempo of the variable display, and you can not eliminate the hold of the variable display, and if you want to embody it in an attacker, make the round proceed smoothly. Can) can).

Further, in general, a game ball is launched at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening / closing member is in the open state, and a game ball is launched at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening / closing member is in the closed state. By performing technical operations such as refraining from firing, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the specific winning opening. On the other hand, there are a player who performs such a technical operation and a player who does not perform such a technical operation, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall, etc., and the ratio of the total number of launched gaming balls to the total number of paid out gaming balls (so-called payout rate). ) Will be designed to include the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players performing the above technical operations increases, the winning probability is lowered and the game is played in various winning openings where the game balls are paid out in order to prevent the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the players. The probability that the ball will reach and enter the ball tends to be low, and the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation may be increased. For these reasons, there is probably a sense of unfairness between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

In this respect, in this means, even if the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball may enter the specific winning opening. , Even if the game ball is continuously fired, the generation of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning opening will be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the acquired game ball between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical disparity of the players and reduce or eliminate the feeling of unfairness with the players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well, or do not intentionally). can. In addition, even for a player who always pays attention to the fact that it will be a loss if the above technical operation is not performed, the player can play the game without worrying about such a thing. , You can proceed with the game more easily.

Means A1-2. An opening / closing lottery means for performing an opening / closing lottery as to whether or not to open the opening / closing member is provided based on a predetermined opportunity.
The means A1-1 is characterized in that there is a first state in which the opening / closing lottery is won with a first probability, and a second state in which the opening / closing lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability. The described gaming machine.

According to the means A1-2, there is a second state in which the opening / closing member is opened relatively frequently and a first state in which the opening / closing member is not opened so much, so that the game is aimed at a specific winning opening. It is possible to create a state in which the game can proceed in a pleasant manner by launching a ball, and a state in which the progress of the game does not remain even if the game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch position of the game ball must be substantially changed, or to add inflection to the game state, and it is possible to improve the game playability.

In the second state, almost all of the game balls launched aiming at the specific winning opening may be configured to enter the specific winning opening. In this case, the effect of suppressing the technical disparity of the players is more reliably achieved. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which one game ball is paid out in response to one game ball entering the specific winning opening (as part of the correction of the disparity by the above-mentioned technical operation), it was fired. If the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening (assuming that the other winning openings are basically in a situation where the ball does not enter), the number of game balls on hand will surely decrease, but in the second state, If almost all of the fired game balls are configured to enter the specific winning opening, such a situation can be dramatically suppressed. Therefore, when the ball is entered into the specific winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is one, and in the second state, it is possible to more reliably establish the game property that the number of game balls on hand is not desired to be reduced as much as possible.

Means A1-3. The gaming machine according to means A1-1 or A1-2, wherein a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball is provided on the upstream side of the specific point (opening / closing member).

According to the means A1-3, by providing a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball before reaching the specific point, the irregularity regarding the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball entering the specific point can be obtained. Can be reduced. Therefore, when the opening / closing member is closed by the staggered passage opportunity giving means, the game ball is given an opportunity to reach a specific point at another timing, and the probability of entering the specific winning opening is improved. It is possible to further ensure the action and effect. The rectifying means may be configured by an accessory, may be configured by a nail arrangement, or may be configured by combining a plurality of configurations.

Means A1-4. The opening / closing member is provided with a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction.
When the shutter is displaced to a closed position protruding into the game area, the opening / closing member is closed, and when the shutter is displaced to an open position where the shutter exits the game area, the opening / closing member is opened.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1-1 to A1-3, characterized in that a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes is provided.

According to the means A1-4, by sliding the shutter in the front-back direction, the game ball can be configured to enter the specific winning opening by the action of falling, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening. Can be realized. Further, for example, when the shutter extending back and forth is rotated upward to open the specific winning opening, the game ball that is thought to have entered the specific winning opening is launched by the shutter and is thrown to the outside. It is possible to avoid such a situation. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a shutter extending back and forth is rotated downward to open a specific winning opening, a large number of game balls fall on the shutter at one time and the shutter is opened even though it is not the timing to open the game. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball enters a specific winning opening.

Further, the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the game ball when in the closed position tends to be relatively heavily burdened, but as in this means, the receiver that supports the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter. By providing the member, the burden on the root portion side of the shutter can be reduced, and the situation where the shutter breaks on the root portion side can be prevented.

In addition, it may be said that "a rib is formed on the back surface side of the shutter". In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the game ball collides with the shutter. Further, it may be said that "a cushioning material is provided on the shutter or a member that abuts and supports the shutter in the closed position". In this case, the impact when the shutter receives the game ball can be reduced, and damage and collision noise can be suppressed.

Means A2-1. The time difference passage opportunity granting means is an introduction path in which a gaming ball whose passage of the specific point to the specific winning opening side is restricted by the opening / closing member in a closed state (although it has reached the specific point) is guided. The gaming machine according to the means A1, further comprising a re-entry path for guiding the gaming ball that has entered the introduction path to the specific point.

According to the means A2-1, the game ball has reached a specific point, but since the opening / closing member has not been opened yet, the game ball is to go to the specific point again after spending a little time. A series of operations can be derived. That is, the opening / closing member was in the closed state when the game ball first reached the specific point, but when the game ball reached the specific point again after a predetermined time via the time difference passing opportunity granting means, the opening / closing member was closed. May be open. Therefore, even if the first try to pass a specific point fails, the same game ball can access the specific point multiple times so that it can be retried later. The above-mentioned effects such as efficiently entering the game ball launched in the game area into the specific winning opening are surely produced. As a matter of course, if the opening / closing member is in the open state when the game ball first reaches a specific point, the game ball passes through the specific point and enters the specific winning opening at that stage. ..

Means A2-2. The gaming machine according to means A2-1, wherein the gaming ball that has reached the specific point is guided to the introduction path by the opening / closing member that is closed.

According to the means A2-2, when the opening / closing member that opens / closes the route to the specific winning opening is closed, the opening / closing member can guide the game ball to the introduction path, so that the game ball is guided to the introduction path. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a movable member for this purpose, and it is possible to simplify the configuration, suppress the increase in size, suppress the increase in cost, and the like. In this means, the opening / closing member in the closed state constitutes a part of the means for giving a chance to pass the game ball with a time lag.

It should be noted that "the opening / closing member is provided with a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction, and when the shutter is displaced to a closed position protruding into the game area, the opening / closing member is closed and the shutter exits the game area. The opening / closing member is opened in the open position by being displaced to the open position. " In this case, the game ball can be configured to enter the specific winning opening by the action of the game ball falling, and the game ball can be reliably guided by the upper surface of the shutter in the closed position.

Means A2-3. The feature is that the re-entry route of the gaming ball from the specific point to the specific point via the introduction path and the re-entry path is configured so as not to intersect at least at least other than the specific point. The gaming machine according to A2-1 or A2-2.

Means A2-3. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game balls collide head-on with each other in the middle of the re-entry route. Therefore, the game ball moving on the re-entry route can be more reliably guided to a specific point at the initial timing. Even if the game balls collide with each other at a specific point, if the opening / closing member is in the open state, the specific point will pass through the specific winning opening side as it is.

Means A2-4. A normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass through or enter the game area,
A special starting means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means or has entered the normal starting means.
A special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means, and a special start detection means.
A variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means, and a variable winning detecting means.
A support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery as to whether or not to open the special start means based on the detection by the normal start detection means, and
A winning / failing lottery executing means for performing a winning / failing lottery as to whether or not to open the variable winning means based on the detection by the special start detecting means is provided.
The specific winning opening and the opening / closing member are applied to the special starting means.
There is a first state in which the ball is won with a first probability in the ball entry support lottery, and a second state in which the ball is won with a second probability higher than the first probability in the ball entry support lottery.
In the state where the variable winning means is opened by winning in the winning / failing lottery, the configuration is such that the first state is set with respect to the support lottery.
The gaming machine according to means A2-1 to A2-3, wherein the variable winning means is arranged on the upstream side of the special starting means in the gaming area.

According to the means A2-4, in the state where the variable winning means is opened by winning the winning / failing lottery, the support lottery is in the first gaming state, and the opening / closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. , Most game balls will go through the introduction route and the re-entry route. On the other hand, for example, if the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the approach of the game ball to the variable winning means is delayed because the game ball passes through the introduction path and the re-entry path. In particular, in the re-entry route of the game ball that reaches the specific point again from the specific point through the introduction path and the re-entry path, if the re-entry route intersects even on the specific point, the game ball. There is a risk that it will be difficult for the game ball to enter the variable winning means due to contact with each other and a long residence time in the special starting means. In this respect, by arranging the variable winning means on the upstream side of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the variable winning means. Furthermore, when the variable winning means is in the open state, the burden on the opening / closing member is reduced by reducing the number of game balls that enter the special starting means (the opening / closing member prevents the ball from entering the specific winning opening). It can be reduced.

In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the game ball enters the variable winning means on the upstream side and flows to the special starting means side. Since the number of balls is reduced, it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the mode in which a large number of game balls enter the special starting means and the flow becomes poor.

Means A3-1. The opening / closing member includes a shutter that can be displaced between a closed position that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the specific winning opening and an open position that allows the ball to enter.
When the shutter is in the closed position, the game ball whose entry into the specific winning opening is restricted by the shutter moves along the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining the contact state with the shutter. And
The shutter constitutes the time difference passage opportunity granting means.
The gaming machine according to means A1, wherein the gaming ball in contact with the shutter is configured to enter the specific winning opening when the shutter is in the open position.

According to the means A3-1, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the specific point is restricted from entering the specific winning opening by the shutter, but it comes into contact with the shutter as it is. It will move along the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining the state. Then, when the opening / closing member is opened, that is, when the shutter is released, the game ball that is in contact with the shutter (leaning or resting on it) passes through a specific point and is specified. You will enter the winning opening. In this way, by making the staying time at a specific point of the game ball as long as possible, it is possible to enter the specific winning opening when the opening / closing member is in the open state, and wait for the timing when the opening / closing member is next opened. Can be done. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of efficiently entering the game ball launched into the game area in order to enter the specific winning opening is surely achieved.

Further, even if the opening time of the opening / closing member is relatively short, the game ball leaning on the shutter (for example, on the shutter) can be entered into the specific winning opening. That is, for example, a game ball can be placed on the shutter when the shutter is closed, and all of them can be entered into the specific winning opening by opening the shutter for a short time. Therefore, it is possible to intensively enter a predetermined number of game balls without lengthening the total opening time of the opening / closing member. For this reason, when the specific winning opening and the opening / closing member are embodied in an attacker that is opened when a special game state is reached by winning a winning / losing lottery, the game balls accumulated in the shutter during the interval between rounds are rounded. As soon as it starts, it will enter the attacker, and it will be possible to improve time efficiency. In addition, if you win the ball entry support lottery and embody it in an electric chew that will be released when the ball entry support state is reached, you can enter more game balls without lengthening the opening time. It will be feasible, and it will also be possible to create new playability.

Means A3-2. The shutter extends in the front-rear direction at the closed position (as well as being slidable back and forth), and the longitudinal direction is the left-right direction.
The game according to means A3-1, wherein the gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to enter the specific winning opening when the shutter is in the open position. Machine.

According to the means A3-2, the shutter in the closed position that closes the specific winning opening extends back and forth, and when the shutter is in the open position, the game ball that has lost the support of the shutter falls downward. It is designed to enter the specific winning opening. For this reason, for example, the movement and reaction of the game ball until the game ball is entered into the specific winning opening is faster than the shutter is extended up and down and the game ball is moved backward to enter the specific winning opening. Become. Therefore, by setting the shutter in the closed position to the open position, it is possible to relatively quickly enter the game ball whose entry into the specific winning opening is restricted by the shutter.

Means A3-3. The gaming machine according to means A3-1 or A3-2, which comprises a rectifying means for guiding a gaming ball to a portion of the shutter on the upstream side.

According to the means A3-3, by reliably guiding the game ball to a portion on the upstream side with respect to the shutter, the state in which the game ball is brought into contact with the shutter (the state in which the shutter shape is placed) is made as long as possible. The action and effect will be more reliably achieved.

Means A3-4. The gaming machine according to means A3-1 to A3-2, characterized in that it has a drop-out preventing means for maintaining a state in which the gaming ball is in contact with the shutter.

According to the means A3-4, it is possible to prevent the game ball from falling off from the upper surface of the shutter.

Means A3-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means A3-1 to means A3-4, wherein small irregularities are formed on the upper surface of the shutter.

According to the means A3-5, if the opening / closing member is in the open position, it is possible to keep the state in which the ball can enter the specific winning opening for as long as possible.

Means A3-6. A normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass through,
A special starting means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means, and a normal starting detecting means.
A special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means, and a special start detection means.
A variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means, and a variable winning detecting means.
A support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery as to whether or not to open the special start means based on the detection by the normal start detection means, and
A winning / failing lottery executing means for performing a winning / failing lottery as to whether or not to open the variable winning means based on the detection by the special start detecting means is provided.
The specific winning opening and the opening / closing member are adapted to the variable winning means.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A3-1 to A3-5, wherein the variable winning means is arranged downstream of the special starting means in the gaming area.

As described in the means A3-1, the shutter of the opening / closing member in the closed state needs to support the game ball (particularly, when the shutter extends back and forth, it supports the lower surface side of the game ball). There is a heavy burden when receiving a falling game ball. In this regard, by arranging the variable winning means on the downstream side of the special starting means as in the means A3-6, the number of game balls that move toward the variable winning means by the amount of the balls entering the special starting means can be increased. It can be reduced, and as a result, the load on the shutter can be reduced.

Means A4-1. The time difference passing opportunity granting means is installed on the upstream side of the specific point in the specific entry route.
When the opening / closing member is in an open state or a state substantially corresponding to the open state, the game ball reaches the specific point after a lapse of the first time after reaching the time difference passage opportunity granting means. The means of granting the opportunity to pass the time difference is opened,
When the opening / closing member is in a closed state or a state substantially corresponding to a closed state, the time difference passage opportunity granting means is closed, and the action of the time difference passage opportunity granting means in the closed state causes a game. The gaming machine according to means A1, wherein the ball is configured to reach the specific point after a lapse of a second time longer than the first time after reaching the time difference passage opportunity granting means.

When the opening / closing member is in the closed state, even if the game ball that has reached the staggered passage opportunity granting means flows down to a specific point as it is, it is blocked by the opening / closing member in the closed state and enters the specific winning opening. I can't. In such a case, according to the means A4-1, the opening / closing member is closed as much as possible by delaying the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific point, instead of causing the game ball to reach the specific point at the normal timing. The game ball can be configured to reach a specific point when it is not in a state, that is, when the opening / closing member is in an open state. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of efficiently entering the game ball launched into the game area in order to enter the specific winning opening is surely achieved.

It should be noted that the time it takes for the game ball to reach the specific point from the time difference passage opportunity granting means changes depending on the distance between the specific point and the time difference passage opportunity granting means and the like. Therefore, for example, when the opening / closing member is simply in the open state, if the game ball reaches a specific point as it is with the time difference passing opportunity giving means in the open state, the specific point can be passed. It cannot be said unconditionally that it will be a correspondence relationship. For that reason, "when the opening / closing member is in a state substantially corresponding to an open state" and "when the opening / closing member is in a state substantially corresponding to a closed state" are defined as a specific point. Considering the distance to the time difference passage opportunity granting means, the opening / closing member will be in the open state by the time the game ball located in the time difference passage opportunity granting means reaches a specific point. The purpose is to set the timing and period for closing the time difference passage opportunity granting means for each model based on the simulation of.

Further, a synchronization means may be provided to synchronize the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing member with the operation timing of the time difference passage opportunity giving means. The synchronization means may be, for example, an interlocking mechanism that is mechanically interlocked, an opening / operating trigger, and a control means that opens / operates under the same opening / operating conditions. It may be a control means for measuring the opening timing of the opening / closing member and adjusting the timing.

Means A4-2. The means according to the means A4-1, wherein the time difference passing opportunity granting means includes a stopper capable of changing the state between a first state in which the game ball is stopped and a second state in which the game ball is passed without stopping. Gaming machine.

According to the means A4-2, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball can be stopped on the upstream side of the specific point. Therefore, by shifting the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific point, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will reach the specific point and pass through when the opening / closing member is in the open state.

Means A4-3. The gaming machine according to means A4-1, wherein the time difference passing opportunity granting means includes a route changing means capable of lengthening or shortening the distance of the route through which the gaming ball reaches the specific point. ..

According to the means A4-3, the timing of reaching a specific point can be delayed by making the game ball detour more than usual.

Means A4-4. A support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery as to whether or not the opening / closing member is opened, and
It is provided with a variable display means for displaying a variable display that teaches the result of the ball entry support lottery.
In the state where the variable display means is performing the variable display, the time difference passage opportunity granting means is closed.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A4-1 to A4-3, wherein the time difference passing opportunity giving means is opened when the variable display is stopped and displayed in the variable display means.

According to the means A4-4, the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening when the game ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening, and the game ball is difficult to enter the specific winning opening. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the timing of reaching a specific winning opening is shifted (later).

It is conceivable that the means A2, A3, and A4 are basically used independently, but the means A2 is configured on the downstream side of the specific point, and the means A3 is configured on the specific point. Since the means A4 has a configuration on the upstream side of the specific point, it can be segregated, and in some cases, these can be used in combination.

Means B-1. A game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided,
A specific winning opening where a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
It is provided with an opening / closing member that can change the state between the open state that allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening and the closed state that makes it impossible to enter the ball.
When the opening / closing member is in the open state, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state when the game ball reaches the first specific point where the ball can enter the specific winning opening, the opening / closing member is used as the opening / closing member. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a means for giving a ball entry opportunity to guide the player to a second specific point where the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening if the player is in the open state.

According to the means B-1, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, if the opening / closing member is in the open state, the game ball has reached the first specific point where the ball can enter the specific winning opening. However, the game ball will be guided to the second specific point where the opening / closing member can enter the specific winning opening if the opening / closing member is in the open state. For this reason, the game ball that could not enter the specific winning opening will be given the opportunity to try to enter the specific winning opening again, increasing the possibility that the game ball will enter the specific winning opening. Can be done. Therefore, in the ratio of the number of game balls that entered the specific winning opening and the number of game balls that did not enter the specific winning opening, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening. , It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening.

Further, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at the timing when the opening / closing member is closed, the game ball may enter the specific winning opening, so that even if the game ball is continuously fired. , The generation of wasted balls that do not enter the specific winning opening will be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the acquired game ball between the player who performs a technical operation such as so-called stop striking and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

Means B-2. A game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided,
The first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening where a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The game ball that enters the first specific winning opening is placed at the first specific point on the first specific winning route that (always) passes through, and the game ball enters the first specific winning opening. A first opening / closing member that can change state between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to enter and an open state that makes it possible or easy to enter.
The game ball that enters the second specific winning opening is placed at the second specific point on the second specific winning route that (always) passes through, and the game ball enters the second specific winning opening. A second opening / closing member that can change the state between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to enter and an open state that makes it possible or easy to enter the ball.
When the first opening / closing member is in the closed state (due to the fact that the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, the first specific point cannot pass to the first specific winning opening side. ) A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a ball entry opportunity granting means for guiding the gaming ball to the second specific entry route.

When the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, it is unlikely (virtually) that the game ball will pass the first specific point to the first specific winning opening side, and it is expected that the game ball will enter the first specific winning opening. Is few (virtually none). On the other hand, according to the present means B-1, when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, the first specific point is set to the first specific point due to the fact that the first opening / closing member is in the closed state. 1 It is possible to guide a game ball that cannot pass to the specific winning opening side to the second specific winning opening route leading to the second specific winning opening. For this reason, a game ball that could not enter the first specific winning opening will be given an opportunity to try to enter the second specific winning opening, and the game ball will be given a specific winning opening (the first specific winning opening). And the possibility of entering the second specific winning opening) can be increased. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of game balls that pass through the specific point and enter the specific winning opening, and the number of game balls that have reached the specific point, but the opening / closing member is restricted. Therefore, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening can be increased in proportion to the number of gaming balls excluded from the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. As a result, the game ball launched in the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched aiming at the specific winning opening, it does not reach the entry. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and suppress the situation where it is necessary to fire a large number of game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening to play the game. (When embodied in an electric chew, the number of rotations of the variable display can be increased, and when embodied in an attacker, the round can be smoothly advanced).

Further, in general, a game ball is launched at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening / closing member is in the open state, and a game ball is launched at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening / closing member is in the closed state. By performing technical operations such as refraining from firing, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the specific winning opening. On the other hand, there are a player who performs such a technical operation and a player who does not perform such a technical operation, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall, etc., and the ratio of the total number of launched gaming balls to the total number of paid out gaming balls (so-called payout rate). ) Will be designed to include the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players performing the above technical operations increases, the winning probability is lowered and the game is played in various winning openings where the game balls are paid out in order to prevent the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the players. The probability that the ball will reach and enter the ball tends to be low, and the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation may be increased. For these reasons, there is probably a sense of unfairness between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

In this respect, in this means, even if the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the first specific point when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball enters the second specific winning opening. Since there is a possibility, even if the game ball is continuously fired, the generation of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning openings (first specific winning opening and second specific winning opening) is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the acquired game ball between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical disparity of the players and reduce or eliminate the feeling of unfairness with the players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well, or do not intentionally). can. In addition, even for a player who always pays attention to the fact that it will be a loss if the above technical operation is not performed, the player can play the game without worrying about such a thing. , You can proceed with the game more easily.

As a matter of course, if the first opening / closing member is in the open state when the game ball first reaches the first specific point, the game ball passes through the first specific point at that stage and the first specific prize is won. It will enter the ball in the mouth. Further, the timing at which the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are opened and the timing at which the second opening / closing member is closed may be the same. Further, the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening have the same role, and for example, regardless of whether the game ball enters the first specific winning opening or the second specific winning opening, the player can receive the ball. The number of game values (prize balls) to be paid out may be the same, and if a predetermined lottery is performed based on the balls entered into the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening, the same random number counter and the same A lottery table may be used, and as a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening are opened up to the lapse of a specified time or a specified number of balls. In the case of a configuration in which a plurality of round periods, which are periods, are granted while sandwiching an interval period that is closed, the round may be entered in either the first specific winning opening or the second specific winning opening. It may be counted as the number of balls entered up to the upper limit of the period. In addition, by connecting the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member so as to operate integrally, it is possible to standardize the drive means for operating them, or drive control separately. It is not necessary to perform control for measuring the timing of synchronization as in the case of the above, and it is possible to simplify the configuration and control.

Means B-3. An opening / closing lottery means for performing an opening / closing lottery as to whether or not to open the opening / closing member is provided based on a predetermined opportunity.
Means B-1 or means characterized in that there is a first state in which the opening / closing lottery is won with a first probability, and a second state in which the opening / closing lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability. The gaming machine described in B-2.

According to the means B-3, there is a second state in which the opening / closing member is opened relatively frequently and a first state in which the opening / closing member is not opened so much, so that the game is aimed at the specific winning opening. It is possible to create a state in which the game can proceed in a pleasant manner by launching a ball, and a state in which the progress of the game does not remain even if the game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch position of the game ball must be substantially changed, or to add inflection to the game state, and it is possible to improve the game playability.

In the second state, almost all of the game balls launched aiming at the specific winning opening may be configured to enter the specific winning opening. In this case, the effect of suppressing the technical disparity of the players is more reliably achieved. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which one game ball is paid out in response to one game ball entering the specific winning opening, the launched game ball must enter the specific winning opening (others). (Assuming that the winning opening is basically not in a situation), the number of game balls on hand will surely decrease, but almost all of the game balls fired in the second state will enter the specific winning opening. In the case of the configuration, such a situation can be dramatically suppressed. Therefore, when the ball is entered into the specific winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is one, and in the second state, it is possible to more reliably establish the game property that the number of game balls on hand is not desired to be reduced as much as possible.

Means B-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3, wherein a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball is provided on the upstream side of the first specific point.

According to the means B-4, the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball entering the first specific point are provided by providing a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball before reaching the first specific point. Irregularities can be reduced. Therefore, when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball is sent to the second specific entry route by the means for giving a chance to enter the ball, and the probability of entering the second specific winning opening is improved. The action and effect can be further ensured.

The rectifying means may be configured by an accessory, may be configured by a nail arrangement, or may be configured by combining a plurality of configurations.

Means B-5. The opening / closing member (at least the first opening / closing member corresponding to the means B-2) is provided with a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction.
When the shutter is displaced to a closed position protruding into the game area, the opening / closing member is closed, and when the shutter is displaced to an open position where the shutter exits the game area, the opening / closing member is opened.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4, comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes.

According to the means B-5, by sliding the shutter in the front-rear direction, the game ball can be configured to enter the specific winning opening by the action of falling, and for example, the specific winning opening can be opened by the rotating shutter. When it is closed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a game ball that is thought to have entered a specific winning opening is launched by a shutter and is thrown to the outside.

Further, the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the game ball when in the closed position tends to be relatively heavily burdened, but as in this means, the receiver that supports the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter. By providing the member, the burden on the root portion side of the shutter can be reduced, and the situation where the shutter breaks on the root portion side can be prevented.

In addition, it may be said that "a rib is formed on the back surface side of the shutter". In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the game ball collides with the shutter. Further, it may be said that "a cushioning material is provided at a portion of the opening / closing member that comes into contact with the game ball and restricts the passage of the specific point of the game ball". In this case, the impact when the shutter receives the game ball can be reduced.

Means B-6. The gaming ball that has reached the first specific point when the opening / closing member is in the closed state is closed to the second point (corresponding to the means B-2, the second specific entry route). The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, which is guided by the opening / closing member.

According to the means B-6, when the opening / closing member that opens / closes the first specific point (the first specific entry route to the first specific winning opening) is closed, the opening / closing member causes the game ball to move to the second specific point ( Since it is possible to guide to the second specific entry route), it is not necessary to separately provide a movable member for guiding the game ball to the second specific point (second specific entry route), and the configuration is simplified. , It is possible to suppress the increase in size and the increase in cost. Further, in the present means, the (first) opening / closing member in the closed state constitutes the ball entry opportunity granting means.

Means B-7. The second specific point (corresponding to the means B-2, the second specific entry route) is configured to be accessible only when the gaming ball is guided by the entry opportunity granting means. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-6.

There is a possibility that a game ball that could not enter the (1st) specific winning opening at the 1st specific point will enter the (2nd) specific winning opening at the 2nd specific point, but at the 2nd specific point (1st) 2) Since there is no possibility that a game ball that could not enter the specific winning opening will enter the (1st) specific winning opening at the first specific point, for example, directly without going through a means for giving a chance to enter the ball. If the game ball is configured to be able to enter the (second) specific winning opening at the second specific point, the possibility that the game ball will enter the specific winning opening is reduced. In this regard, according to means B-7, first, the ball is entered into the (first) specific winning opening at the first specific point, and if that is not the case, the (second) specific winning is made at the second specific point. It is possible to comply with the order of trying to enter the ball into the mouth, and the action effect such as improving the possibility of entering the specific winning opening is more reliably achieved.

Means B-8. A normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass through or enter the game area,
A special starting means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means or has entered the normal starting means.
A special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means, and a special start detection means.
A variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means, and a variable winning detecting means.
A support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery as to whether or not to open the special start means based on the detection by the normal start detection means, and
A winning / failing lottery executing means for performing a winning / failing lottery as to whether or not to open the variable winning means based on the detection by the special start detecting means is provided.
The specific winning opening and the opening / closing member are applied to the special starting means.
There is a first state in which the ball is won with a first probability in the ball entry support lottery, and a second state in which the ball is won with a second probability higher than the first probability in the ball entry support lottery.
In the state where the variable winning means is opened by winning in the winning / failing lottery, the configuration is such that the first state is set with respect to the support lottery.
The gaming machine according to means B-1 to B-7, wherein the variable winning means is arranged on the upstream side of the special starting means in the gaming area.

According to the means B-8, in the state where the variable winning means is opened by winning in the winning / losing lottery, the support lottery is in the first gaming state, and the opening / closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. , Most of the game balls will be discharged to the outside of the special starting means without entering the second specific winning opening via the second specific entry route. On the other hand, for example, when the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the game ball passes through the special starting means (the first specific entry route and the second specific entry route). The approach to the variable winning means of the ball is delayed. In this respect, by arranging the variable winning means on the upstream side of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the variable winning means.

In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the game ball enters the variable winning means on the upstream side and flows to the special starting means side. Since the number of balls is reduced, it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the mode in which a large number of game balls enter the special starting means and the flow becomes poor.

C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launcher enters the special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is generated, and the result of the lottery is performed by the variable display device. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

Further, in general, the pachinko machine changes its state between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and the game ball enters. A variable ball entry device is provided in which a predetermined number of prize balls are given by playing a ball.

By the way, in the special game state in which the variable ball entry device is opened, even if the game ball is continuously fired at a constant rhythm, various game members such as game nails are arranged in the game area. There is a concern that the opening timing of the variable ball entry device and the timing of the game ball reaching the variable ball entry device do not mesh well with each other, and it may be difficult to enter the ball.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of more efficiently entering a gaming ball into a variable ball entry device. be.

Means C-1. A game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided,
It is provided with a variable ball entry device that changes the state of a game ball moving in the game area into an open state in which the ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter.
The variable ball entry device is
A specific winning opening where a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
It is provided with a shutter that can be displaced between the closed position that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening and the open position that allows the ball to enter.
When the shutter is in the closed position, a ball entry opportunity granting means for displacing the game ball whose entry into the specific winning opening is restricted by the shutter in a predetermined direction while maintaining the contact state with the shutter is provided. Prepare,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the shutter is in the open position, the gaming ball in contact with the shutter is configured to enter the specific winning opening.

According to the means C-1, when the variable ball entry device is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the variable ball entry device is restricted from winning the specific winning opening by the shutter, but the shutter is directly moved to the shutter. It will move in the specified direction while maintaining the contact state of. Then, when the shutter is in the open position and the variable ball entry device is in the open state, almost all of the game balls that are in contact with the shutter (leaning or resting on it) are placed in the specific winning opening. It will enter the ball. In this way, by making the staying time of the game ball as long as possible at the position (state) where the ball will enter the specific winning opening if the shutter is in the open position, it is specified if the variable ball entry device is in the open state. While maintaining the state of the game ball that can enter the winning opening, it is possible to wait for the timing when the variable ball entry device is next opened. Therefore, the game ball launched in the game area in order to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening.

Further, even if the opening time of the variable ball entry device is relatively short, the game ball leaning on the shutter (for example, on it) can be entered into the specific winning opening. .. That is, for example, as long as the game ball is placed on the shutter when the shutter is closed, all of them can be put into the specific winning opening with a short opening of the shutter. Therefore, it is possible to intensively enter a predetermined number of game balls without lengthening the total opening time of the variable ball entry device. For this reason, when the specific winning opening and the opening / closing member are embodied in an attacker that is opened when a special game state is reached by winning a winning / losing lottery, the game balls accumulated in the shutter during the interval between rounds are rounded. As soon as it starts, it will enter the attacker, and it will be possible to improve time efficiency. In addition, if you win the ball entry support lottery and embody it in an electric chew that will be released when the ball entry support state is reached, you can enter more game balls without lengthening the opening time. It will be feasible, and it will also be possible to create new playability.

Further, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at the timing when the variable ball entry device is closed, the game ball may enter the specific winning opening, so that the game ball is continuously fired. However, the generation of wasted balls that do not enter the specific winning opening will be suppressed. Therefore, in a state in which the variable ball entry device is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, a special gaming state advantageous to the player) while sandwiching a period in which the variable ball entry device is closed, technical operations such as so-called stop striking are performed. It is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the acquired game ball between the player who performs the technique and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

Means C-2. The ball entry opportunity granting means moves a game ball in contact with the shutter in the closed position by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining the contact state with the shutter. The gaming machine according to means C-1.

According to the means C-2, when the shutter is in the open position, it is possible to keep the state in which the game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening for as long as possible. Therefore, even if the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the variable ball entry device when the variable ball entry device is in the closed state during the period when the variable ball entry device is opened a plurality of times. When the variable ball entry device is opened, the game ball immediately moves at a position where it can enter the variable ball entry device, but stays within that range as much as possible, and the variable ball entry device is then opened. You can wait for the timing to be done. As a result, the above-mentioned action and effect such as increasing the possibility of entering the ball into the variable ball entry device can be more reliably achieved.

For example, "at least the shutter in the closed position extends back and forth so that a game ball can be placed on the upper surface thereof, and the ball entry opportunity granting means can place the game ball on the upper surface of the shutter. It may be "moving a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter (for example, while meandering) on the upper surface of the shutter".

It should be noted that "small irregularities are formed on the upper surface of the shutter as the means for imparting a ball entry opportunity". In this case, when the shutter is in the open position, the effect of keeping the state in which the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening for as long as possible is surely achieved. Further, for example, the upper surface of the shutter is formed in a substantially arc shape with a low center and high left and right, so that the game ball placed on the shutter rolls back and forth to the left and right and falls from the shutter when the momentum weakens. May be.

Means C-3. The shutter has a closed position that protrudes into the game area and extends in the front-rear direction above the specific winning opening, and an open position that all or most of the shutter exits from the game area and opens the specific winning opening upward. It is configured to slide back and forth between
Means C-1 or C-, characterized in that the gaming ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to enter the specific winning opening when the shutter is in the open position. The gaming machine according to 2.

According to the means C-3, the game ball is placed (stored) on the upper surface of the shutter in the closed state of the variable ball entry device, and the support of the shutter is lost when the variable ball entry device is in the open state. When the game ball falls downward, it enters the specific winning opening. For this reason, for example, the movement and reaction of the game ball until the game ball is entered into the specific winning opening is faster than the shutter is extended up and down and the game ball is moved backward to enter the specific winning opening. Become. Therefore, by setting the shutter in the closed position to the open position, the game ball whose entry into the specific winning opening is restricted by the shutter can be made to win in the specific winning opening relatively quickly.

Further, for example, when the shutter extending back and forth is rotated upward to open the specific winning opening, the game ball that is thought to have entered the specific winning opening is launched by the shutter and is thrown to the outside. It is possible to avoid such a situation. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a shutter extending back and forth is rotated downward to open a specific winning opening, a large number of game balls fall on the shutter at one time, and the shutter is not at the timing of opening due to weight or impact. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is opened to the public and the game ball enters the specific winning opening.

It should be noted that "the shutter has a configuration in which the longitudinal direction is the left-right direction, and the ball entry opportunity granting means causes the game ball mounted on the upper surface of the shutter to have a substantially rectangular shape with respect to the longitudinal direction of the shutter. The shutter may be moved by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter toward the downstream side in the longitudinal direction while meandering in the intersecting direction. " Generally, the width of the front and back of the game area defined by the game board and the transparent plate-shaped body arranged in front of the game board is narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball resting on the upper surface of the shutter is meandered in a direction intersecting the lateral direction of the shutter having a substantially rectangular shape, or from the center side to the outer peripheral side of the shutter having a substantially circular shape. If an attempt is made to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter while turning toward the shutter, the front-back width of the shutter needs to be wider than the front-back width of the game area, and the game ball moving on the shutter. There is a risk that a point behind the front of the game board will have to be selected as a suitable starting point. In this case, the configuration may be complicated. In this regard, if the game ball resting on the upper surface of the shutter is merely meandered in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular shutter, the front-rear width of the shutter is made wider than the front-rear width of the game area. Even without it, the game ball mounted on the shutter can be moved by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter. Therefore, such a defect can be eliminated.

Means C-4. The gaming machine according to means C-3, wherein the ball entry opportunity granting means is formed by forming irregularities on the upper surface of the shutter.

For example, instead of forming unevenness on the shutter side, a protrusion for projecting from the peripheral edge of the opening of the specific winning opening to the inner peripheral side is formed above the shutter in the closed position to form a ball entry opportunity granting means. However, in the case where the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is guided by the protrusion and moved while meandering, even if the shutter is displaced to the open position, the protrusion is inside from the opening peripheral edge of the specific winning opening. Since it remains in a state of protruding to the peripheral side, there is a possibility that the ease of entering the game ball into the specific winning opening is reduced.

In this regard, if the shutter is displaced to the open position by forming an unevenness constituting the ball entry opportunity granting means on the shutter side as in the present means C-4, the ball entry opportunity granting means may be entirely or Since most of them leave the game area, such problems can be eliminated.

Means C-5. The variable ball entry device includes a substantially plate-shaped base plate that can be attached to a game board.
The base plate is formed with an accommodating opening in which the shutter appears and disappears.
Of the front surface of the base plate, the upper portion of the accommodation opening is inclined backward and upward.
The gaming machine according to means C-4, wherein the gaming ball moving on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to be in contact with a portion below the center of the gaming ball.

When the shutter is configured to extend back and forth and be displaceable back and forth as in the means C-3, and when unevenness is formed on the upper surface of the shutter as in the means C-4, the shutter is formed. When the shutter is pulled toward the game board to open the position, there is a concern that the game ball on the shutter will be pressed against the convex portion on the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate, and will pop off due to that force. Displacement.

In this regard, according to the means C-5, when the shutter is in the open position, it is assumed that the game ball on the shutter is in a position where it is likely to be sandwiched between the convex portion on the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate. Also, the shutter is relatively smooth so that the game ball is placed on the upper part of the accommodating opening of the base plate that tilts backward toward the top and comes into contact with the part below the center part of the game ball. It is possible to get over the convex part to the specific winning opening side. Therefore, when the shutter is set to the open position, the game ball resting on the shutter can be more reliably entered into the specific winning opening, and damage to the variable ball entry device or the like can be suppressed.

Means C-6. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-5, wherein the shutter is provided with a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter is displaced to the closed position. ..

According to the means C-6, the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower side of the game ball when it is in the closed position tends to be relatively heavily burdened, but the receiver that supports the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter. By providing the member, the burden on the root portion side of the shutter can be reduced, and the situation where the shutter breaks on the root portion side can be prevented.

In addition, it may be said that "a rib is formed on the back surface side of the shutter". In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the game ball collides with the shutter. Further, it may be said that "a cushioning material is provided on the shutter or a member that abuts and supports the shutter in the closed position". In this case, the impact when the shutter receives the game ball can be reduced, and damage and collision noise can be suppressed.

Means C-7. A normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass through,
A special starting means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means, and a normal starting detecting means.
A special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means, and a special start detection means.
A variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means, and a variable winning detecting means.
A support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery as to whether or not to open the special start means based on the detection by the normal start detection means, and
A winning / failing lottery executing means for performing a winning / failing lottery as to whether or not to open the variable winning means based on the detection by the special start detecting means is provided.
The variable ball entry device is configured by the variable winning means, and the variable ball entry device is configured.
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-6, wherein the variable winning means is arranged downstream of the special starting means in the gaming area.

As described in the means C-3, the shutter in the closed position needs to catch the falling game ball, which is a heavy burden. In this respect, by arranging the variable winning means as the variable ball-entry device on the downstream side of the special starting means as in the present means C-7, the variable winning means is directed to the variable winning means as much as the ball enters the special starting means. The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the load on the shutter can be reduced.

Means C-8. A normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass through,
A special starting means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means that can change the state between the open state in which the game ball that moves the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball cannot enter,
A normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means, and a normal starting detecting means.
A special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means, and a special start detection means.
A variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means, and a variable winning detecting means.
A support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery as to whether or not to open the special start means based on the detection by the normal start detection means, and
A winning / failing lottery executing means for performing a winning / failing lottery as to whether or not to open the variable winning means based on the detection by the special start detecting means is provided.
The variable ball entry device is configured by the special starting means, and the variable ball entry device is configured.
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-6, wherein the variable winning means is arranged on the upstream side of the special starting means in the gaming area.

The shutter in the closed position needs to catch the falling game ball, which is a heavy burden. In this regard, by arranging the special starting means as the variable ball-entry device on the downstream side of the variable winning means as in the present means C-8, the special starting means is directed toward the special starting means as much as the ball enters the variable winning means. The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the load on the shutter can be reduced.

Means C-9. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 or C-8, wherein a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball is provided on the upstream side of the variable ball entry device.

According to the means C-9, the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball entering the variable ball entering device are provided by providing a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball before reaching the variable ball entering device. Irregularities can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress variations in the drop point to the shutter, that is, the start point of the game ball that moves while abutting on the shutter. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress variations in the initial velocity of the game ball that moves while contacting the shutter. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects such as increasing the time for the game ball to move while contacting the shutter as much as possible and improving the probability of entering the specific winning opening are further achieved.

It should be noted that "the rectifying means may guide the game ball to a portion of the shutter on the upstream side". Further, the rectifying means may be configured by an accessory, may be configured by a nail arrangement, or may be configured by combining a plurality of configurations.

Means C-10. The shutter is
A first shutter that extends back and forth at least in the closed position and can close the specific winning opening,
It is provided with a second shutter that extends back and forth at least in the closed position and is provided above the first shutter at a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball from the first shutter.
The first shutter and the second shutter are configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position at the same time.
The game ball that has fallen to the second shutter in the closed position moves on the second shutter, falls to the first shutter in the closed position, moves on the first shutter, and at the same time.
When the first shutter and the second shutter in the closed position are displaced to the open position, the gaming balls mounted on the first shutter and the second shutter enter the specific winning opening. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-9.

According to the means C-10, the position and speed of the game ball falling on the first shutter can be limited to some extent by the second shutter, and the movement of the game ball on the first shutter can be made suitable. .. Further, not only the game ball on the first shutter in the closed position but also the game ball on the second shutter in the closed position, the first shutter and the second shutter are displaced to the open position. Since the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening, the action and effect of efficiently entering the game ball into the specific winning opening can be achieved more reliably.

D. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game area is provided in which the game ball can move, and the game area is guided to the game area on which the game ball launched by the launching device is applied. Further, in general, the pachinko machine is provided with various prize-winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in a game area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

By the way, among the game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls that have entered any winning means and the number of game balls that are discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. There may be a relatively large variation in the ratio, which may lead to a decline in interest.

In particular, in a state in which the winning means that changes between an open state in which the game ball is relatively easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be entered is frequently opened, the ball can be entered in the winning means. As long as the game ball is launched on the expected route, it is basically possible to proceed with the game with almost no reduction in the game ball on the player's hand, but it is applicable under such circumstances. Even if a game ball is launched on the route of, if the number of game balls on hand is steadily decreasing, there is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a function capable of suppressing variations in ball entry into a winning means of a gaming ball. To do.

Means D-1. A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
A start winning means that can change the state between an open state that allows the entry of a game ball moving in the game area and a closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball, and a variable winning means.
A normal starting means that allows a game ball that moves in the game area to pass through,
The start prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the start prize means, and the start prize detection means.
A variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means, and a variable winning detecting means.
It is provided with a normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through the normal starting means.
Based on the detection of the start winning prize detecting means, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable winning means generates a special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened.
Based on the detection of the normal start detecting means, a ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the start winning means is performed.
Even though one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the gaming area has reached a ball entry point where the ball can be entered in the open state, the ball is entered. A ball entry guiding means that guides a gaming ball that could not enter the one because one was in the closed state to a ball entry point that allows the ball to enter the other if the other is in the open state. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the means D-1, a game ball that cannot enter one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means because one of them is in the closed state reaches the other entry point (entrance). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the product is discharged from the game area. As a result, it is possible to surely increase the possibility that the game ball that could not enter one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means will enter the other, and was launched into the game area. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game ball is discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. As a result, among the game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls that have entered any winning means and the number of game balls that are discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a relatively large variation in the ratio of the above, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by such variation.

Means D-2. The variable winning means is arranged at a specific winning opening where a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter and a winning point through which a game ball entering the specific winning opening passes, and the specific winning means is provided. A specific opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position that closes the winning opening and an open position that opens the specific winning opening is provided.
For a gaming ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening at the timing when the specific opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the specific winning opening again is given at a timing later than the timing. The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the means for giving a specific ball entry opportunity to be given is provided.

When the specific opening / closing member is in the closed position, there is no possibility that the game ball passes the entry point to the specific winning opening side, and there is no possibility of entering the specific winning opening. On the other hand, according to the means D-2, when the opening / closing member is in the closed position, the game ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening is given a specific winning at a later timing. It is possible to give an opportunity to enter the ball into the mouth. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball passes the entry point to the specific winning opening side and enters the specific winning opening.

Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of game balls that pass through the entry point and enter the specific winning opening, and the number of game balls that reach the entry point, but the opening / closing member It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening in the ratio to the number of game balls that are excluded from the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. As a result, the game ball launched in the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched aiming at the specific winning opening, it does not reach the entry. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and suppress the situation where it is necessary to fire a large number of game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening to play the game. Can be progressed in a pleasant manner.

In general, the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the entry point when the opening / closing member is in the open position, and at a timing that reaches the entry point when the opening / closing member is in the closed position. By performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching a game ball, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the specific winning opening. On the other hand, there are a player who performs such a technical operation and a player who does not perform such a technical operation, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall, etc., and the ratio of the total number of launched gaming balls to the total number of paid out gaming balls (so-called payout rate). ) Will be designed to include the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players performing the above technical operations increases, the winning probability is lowered and the game is played in various winning openings where the game balls are paid out in order to prevent the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the players. The probability that the ball will reach and enter the ball tends to be low, and the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation may be increased. For these reasons, there is probably a sense of unfairness between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

In this respect, in this means, even if the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the entry point when the opening / closing member is in the closed position, the game ball may enter the specific winning opening. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously fired, the generation of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning opening is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the acquired game ball between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical disparity of the players and reduce or eliminate the feeling of unfairness with the players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well, or do not intentionally). can. In addition, even for a player who always pays attention to the fact that it will be a loss if the above technical operation is not performed, the player can play the game without worrying about such a thing. , You can proceed with the game more easily.

In the special game state, (almost) all of the game balls that have reached the entry point to the specific winning opening may be configured to enter the specific winning opening. In this case, the effect of suppressing the technical disparity of the players is more reliably achieved.

Means D-3. The start winning means is arranged at a start winning opening where a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and at the entry point through which the game ball entering the start winning opening passes, and the start is started. It is provided with a start opening / closing member that can be displaced between the closed position that closes the winning opening and the opening position that opens the starting winning opening.
For a game ball that has reached the entry point to the start winning opening at the timing when the starting opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the starting winning opening again is given at a timing later than the timing. The gaming machine according to means D-1, characterized in that the means for giving a starting ball entry opportunity to be given is provided.

According to the means D-3, basically the same action and effect as those of the above means D-2 are exhibited by using the target as the starting winning means. In the ball entry support state in which the starting winning means is opened relatively frequently, (almost) all of the game balls that have reached the entry point to the starting winning opening enter the starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the effect of suppressing the technical disparity of the players is more reliably achieved.

Means D-4. The variable winning means is arranged at a specific winning opening where a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter and a winning point through which a game ball entering the specific winning opening passes, and the specific winning means is provided. A specific opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position that closes the winning opening and an open position that opens the specific winning opening is provided.
For a game ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening at the timing when the specific opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the specific winning opening again is given at a timing later than the timing. Equipped with a means to give a specific entry opportunity to give
The start winning means is arranged at a start winning opening where a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and at the entry point through which the game ball entering the start winning opening passes, and the start is started. It is provided with a start opening / closing member that can be displaced between the closed position that closes the winning opening and the opening position that opens the starting winning opening.
For a game ball that has reached the entry point to the start winning opening at the timing when the starting opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the starting winning opening again is given at a timing later than the timing. The gaming machine according to means D-1, characterized in that the means for giving a starting ball entry opportunity to be given is provided.

According to the means D-4, the effects of the means D-2 and the means D-3 are exhibited. Further, as described in the above means D-1, the game ball that did not enter one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area is removed by the ball entry guiding means. Will be guided to. That is, in a situation where the ball entry support state in which the starting winning means is opened relatively frequently and the special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened are continuously derived, the game is played. Just by launching the ball at the same position in the game area, there is a high probability that (almost all) the game ball will enter either the starting winning means or the variable winning means. Therefore, in the ball entry support state and the special game state, almost no wasted ball is generated, and a very efficient game can be performed. As a result, it is possible to play a comfortable game in the ball entry support state or the special game state, and the situation where the game ball does not easily enter the winning means continues, which makes me feel uncomfortable (directing to teach the result of the winning / failing lottery, etc.). It is possible to avoid situations such as (cannot concentrate on).

Means D-5. The starting winning means is located on the upstream side of the gaming area with respect to the variable winning means, and the gaming ball that has not entered the starting winning means is guided to the variable winning means. 2 or the gaming machine according to D-4.

When the variable winning means of means D-2 or D-4 is adopted, it takes a relatively large amount of time for the game ball that has reached the variable winning means in the closed state to exit the variable winning means that maintains the closed state. Will be. Therefore, when the starting winning means is located on the downstream side of the variable winning means via the winning guiding means, the game ball may not easily reach the starting winning means. In particular, in general, the interval when the starting winning means is opened multiple times (the period during which the starting winning means is closed) and the special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened multiple times. Even when compared with the interval, the interval in the special gaming state is longer, and if the specific ball-entry opportunity granting means of the variable winning means is designed accordingly, this tendency becomes more remarkable.

In this regard, by arranging the starting winning means on the upstream side of the variable winning means as in the means D-5, from launching the game ball aiming at the starting winning means until the game ball reaches the starting winning means. The time can be relatively short, and the smooth progress of the game can be achieved. In addition, for example, when the starting winning means is on the downstream side of the variable winning means via the winning guiding means, if the game ball reaches the variable winning means in the closed state, the starting winning means It is almost certain that the ball will enter the ball, but it will take a relatively long time to actually enter the starting prize means (until it is detected by the starting winning detection means), so there will be a time lag. Although there is a concern that it may give a sense of discomfort, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a sense of discomfort by setting the starting winning means to the upstream side of the variable winning means.

Further, even when the variable winning means of the means D-2 or D-4 is adopted, it is possible to put the game ball into the starting winning means in the special gaming state. Therefore, in a configuration in which almost all of the game balls that have reached the entry point of the variable winning means in the special gaming state enter the variable winning means and almost no waste balls are generated (there is no loss to the player), the starting prize is won. If there are two or more game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the means, the one that is advantageous to the player (the extra game balls to be paid out by the amount entered into the start winning means) Can be given a slight change to (increase).

Means D-6. The variable winning means is located on the upstream side of the gaming area with respect to the starting winning means, and the gaming ball that has not entered the variable winning means is guided to the starting winning means. 2 or the gaming machine according to D-4.

According to the means D-6, when the variable winning means of the means D-2 or D-4 is adopted, the game ball hardly enters the starting winning means during the special gaming state, so that the starting winning means is used. The payout of the game ball based on the entry of the ball is virtually stopped. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a relatively large change in the total number of payouts of the game balls in the special game state depending on whether or not the game balls enter the start winning means in the special game state. As a result, the total number of payouts of game balls in the special game state of the same type in which the variable winning means is open can be made substantially constant, and it is possible to facilitate the design regarding the payout (payout rate) of game balls. .. Further, as a game concept (characteristic of a predetermined special game state), it is possible to derive a special game state in which the number of payouts of game balls has little variation.

In addition, in the special gaming state, there is no situation in which a game ball (which should enter the variable winning means if it reaches the variable winning means) enters the variable winning means on the upstream side of the variable winning means. , The special game state can be advanced relatively smoothly and quickly.

In the means D-6 and the above means D-5, the arrangement of the variable winning means and the starting winning means is reversed, but the one that matches the concept of each model may be adopted. That is, for example, in the "configuration in which one game ball is paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning means", the increase of the game ball cannot be expected at all, and the variable winning means is opened. It is considered a waste of time that the game ball enters the starting winning means in the special gaming state, and the variable winning means may be arranged on the upstream side as in the means D-6, or the game ball may be placed on the upstream side. Without increasing the payout rate, the time required to digest the special game state (the time when the effect for the special game state can be derived) is made as long as possible so that the special game state itself can be enjoyed more (effect during the special game state). The starting prize means may be arranged on the upstream side like the means D-5.

Means D-7. Among the starting winning means and the variable winning means, a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball is provided on the upstream side of one of the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the gaming area. The gaming machine according to any one of D-1 to D-6.

According to the means D-7, a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball is provided before the game ball reaches one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the irregularity regarding the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball entering one of the above. Therefore, the flow of the game ball in the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the entering ball guiding means can be made relatively smooth.

In particular, with respect to the means D-2 to D-4, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, an opportunity is given to bring the game ball to the entry point at another timing, and the ball enters the winning opening. It is possible to further ensure the action and effect such as improving the probability. The rectifying means may be configured by an accessory, may be configured by a nail arrangement, or may be configured by combining a plurality of configurations.

Means D-8. Of the starting winning means and the variable winning means, the other, which is located on the downstream side of the gaming area, is configured to be reachable only when the gaming ball is guided by the entering guiding means. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-7.

According to the means D-8, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball reaches the other located on the downstream side of the game area without passing through one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area. can do. Therefore, it is possible to comply with the order of first attempting to enter the ball to the other and, if that is not the case, attempting to enter the other, and it is possible to enter the starting winning means and the variable winning means. Actions and effects such as improving sex are more reliably achieved.

Means D-9. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-8, wherein the starting winning means and the variable winning means are unitized and attached to the gaming board.

According to the means D-9, the workability of attaching / detaching the starting winning means and the variable winning means to / from the gaming machine can be improved, and the relative position between the starting winning means and the variable winning means can be determined more accurately. ..

Means D-10. In the game area, it is provided at a distance between the game board and the game board so that the game ball can pass through, and includes at least the start winning means, the variable winning means, and a front decorative portion covering the front of the ball entry guiding means. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-9.

According to the means D-10, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the ball entry guiding means. In other words, the starting winning means is opened relatively frequently without being confused by the structure of the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the winning guidance means, and the complicated movement of the game ball that moves them. In a state or a special game state in which the variable winning means is open, if the game ball reaches the part covered by the front decorative part (if the game ball enters the back side of the front decorative part), the starting winning means Alternatively, it can be a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that the ball is entered into either of the variable winning means. Further, since the portion covered by the front decoration portion has the functions of both the starting winning means and the variable winning means, there is only a conventional configuration in which the starting winning means and the variable winning means exist separately. Compared to the pachinko and pachislot machines, it is possible to add novelty and derive new effects using this.

In addition, it may be said that "the front decorative portion is configured to have fluoroscopy at least in the portion where the game ball can pass through the game area behind the front decorative portion". For example, at least the portion where the game ball passes through the back side may be made of a transparent or translucent material, or a slit may be formed. In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which a player or the like who plays a game for the first time becomes anxious because he / she cannot see what is happening behind the front decoration portion. Further, for example, the front decoration portion may be used as a place for teaching predetermined information to the player. For example, the front decoration unit may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning / failing lottery, etc.). In addition, the front wall of the ball receiving portion that receives a part of the starting winning means and the variable winning means (for example, a game ball moving in the game area and guides the game ball to the opening side formed in the game board) by the front decoration part. ) May be configured.

Means D-11. In the ball entry support lottery, a low ball entry state in which the player wins with the first probability and a high ball entry state in which the player wins with a higher probability than the first probability are set.
Within the installation range of the front decorative portion, there are a high-entry ball-compatible state corresponding to the high-entry state, a special game-compatible state corresponding to the special game state, and a normal-compatible state corresponding to other states. The gaming machine according to means D-10, which comprises means for suggesting a state that can be changed.

According to the means D-11, whether the game ball is in the starting winning means or the variable winning means, or both, depending on the mode of the state suggesting means, even if the front decoration portion is continuously visually recognized. It is possible to grasp whether the ball cannot enter.

Means D-12. The front decorative portion is characterized in that the entrance accessory is provided at a position corresponding to the approach path of the gaming ball to one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the gaming area. The gaming machine according to D-10 or D-11.

According to the means D-12, since the entrance accessory serves as a mark of where to move the game ball, it is possible to help the player's understanding of the game playability.

Means D-13. The gaming machine according to means D-12, wherein the gaming machine is provided with an accessory driving means capable of changing the state of the entrance accessory to change the visual aspect of the entrance accessory.

According to the means D-13, it is possible to improve the decorativeness and the directing effect. Further, by changing the state of the entrance accessory, it is possible to make it more conspicuous as a mark of the launch position of the game ball, or to suggest / teach predetermined information by the state change.

The "change in the state of the entrance accessory" means a displacement of the entrance accessory, a change in the mode of the display member such as an illumination provided on the entrance accessory (for example, the entrance accessory imitates a predetermined character). , A three-color LED is provided at the position of the eye, and the emission color changes depending on the situation, etc.). Further, as for the displacement of the entrance accessory, not only the case where the entire entrance accessory is displaceable, but also the entrance accessory is configured to be partially displaceable (either one place or a plurality of places). The purpose is to include the case.

Means D-14. The entrance accessory is configured so that at least a part of it can be displaced.
The gaming machine according to means D-13, characterized in that the movement path of the gaming ball in the gaming area is not changed even if the entrance accessory is displaced.

According to the means D-14, the entrance accessory is merely an accessory (decoration), and although it is configured to be displaceable, the displacement does not affect the movement path of the game ball. For this reason, even if the entrance accessory is moved in a complicated manner, the game ball can be satisfactorily entered into the starting winning means or the variable winning means, and the entrance role can be designed relatively freely. It is also possible to suggest and teach various information depending on the aspect of the object.

It should be noted that "the accessory driving means may rotate and displace the inlet accessory". In this case, it is possible to avoid increasing the size and complexity of the mechanism for rotating the entrance accessory while configuring the movement path of the game ball so as not to change due to the displacement of the entrance accessory. Further, "the start driving means for changing the state of the starting winning means from the open state to the closed state and the variable driving means for changing the state of the variable winning means to the open state and the closed state are provided. , The accessory driving means is configured by the starting driving means or the variable driving means in conjunction with the opening / closing operation of one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means. " In this case, it is possible to simplify the displacement control of the entrance accessory.

Means D-15. In the ball entry support lottery, a low ball entry state in which the player wins with the first probability and a high ball entry state in which the player wins with a higher probability than the first probability are set.
The entrance accessory can be changed into a high-entry ball-compatible state corresponding to the high-entry state, a special game-compatible state corresponding to the special game state, and a normal-compatible state corresponding to other states. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-12 to D-14, characterized in that it is configured.

According to the means D-15, it is possible to grasp whether the game ball is in the starting winning means or the variable winning means, or in a state where both of them cannot be entered, depending on the mode of the entrance accessory. can do. In addition, corresponding to the above-mentioned means D-11, the "state suggestion means" is configured by the entrance accessory.

Means D-16. The front decorative portion is attached to the game board, the start winning means and the variable winning means attached to the game board, and is attached to the game board.
Means D-10 to be characterized in that the front decorative portion is formed with a nail exposed hole that penetrates back and forth and exposes a game nail erected on the front surface side of the game board to the front. The gaming machine according to any one of D-15.

According to the means D-16, it is not necessary to change the shape of the game board mounting frame to which the game board is mounted, the front frame provided in front of the game board mounting frame, or the like in order to mount the front decorative portion. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly reuse the gaming machine by exchanging only the gaming board and various members attached to the gaming board and reusing the gaming board mounting frame or the like as it is.

Further, by forming the exposed nail hole in the front decorative portion, the front decorative portion can be spread over a relatively wide range without providing a game nail in the vicinity of the starting winning means or the variable winning means or worrying about the arrangement of the game nail. It can be provided (so that the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion is separated from the starting winning means and the variable winning means as much as possible). Moreover, since it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion so as to avoid the game nails, it is possible to achieve both improvement in the design of the front decorative portion and formation of a movement route of the game ball by the game nails. Can be done. Further, even if maintenance (angle adjustment, etc.) of the game nail is required due to a change in the angle of the game nail due to long-term use, the work can be performed without removing the front decorative portion.

As for the positional relationship between the front decorative portion and the game nail, if the game ball is configured to pass between the front decorative portion and the game board, the front portion of the game nail penetrates the nail exposed hole. It may be located in front of the front decorative portion, or the entire game nail may be located behind the front decorative portion. Further, it may be stated that "the front decorative portion is formed with a ball clogging clearing hole that penetrates back and forth corresponding to the path of the game ball". In this case, even if a ball clogging occurs on the back side of the front decorative portion, it can be eliminated without removing the front decorative portion through the ball clogging clearing hole. In addition, the visibility of the game ball passing behind the front decorative portion can be improved.

It should be noted that "the front decorative portion may be attached to the starting winning means and the variable winning means attached to the game board". That is, if the front decorative portion is directly attached to the game board with screws or the like, there is a concern that the screws or the like are basically exposed to the front and the design is deteriorated. By mounting it on the variable winning means, it is possible to perform such mounting on the back surface side of the front decorative portion so that the screws and the like used for mounting are not visible. However, when such a configuration is adopted, there is a concern that the work of attaching the starting winning means and the variable winning means to the game board will be relatively difficult. That is, when the front decorative portion also covers the front of the mounting portion of the starting winning means and the variable winning means to the game board, a tool such as a screwdriver cannot be suitably positioned in front of the mounting portion. On the other hand, "the front decorative portion is formed with a tool hole that penetrates back and forth and exposes the attachment portion of the starting winning means and the variable winning means to the game board forward." May be. In this case, even if the front decoration portion covers the front of the start winning means and the variable winning means, the work of attaching the starting winning means and the variable winning means to the game board can be performed relatively easily, and further, the front decoration can be performed. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the design due to the attachment portion of the portion and the attachment portion of the starting winning means and the variable winning means being visually recognized from the front.

Means D-17. With respect to the range covered in front by the front decorative portion, the approach path of the gaming ball that ensures that the entry point of one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the gaming area is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-10 to D-16, which comprises means for detecting a destination detecting a passing gaming ball.

According to the means D-17, the reaction to the entry of the game ball into the area covered by the front decoration portion can be generated relatively quickly, and in that case, the game ball can be generated in the area where the front decoration portion exists. You can strengthen the image that you have entered the ball. Therefore, the area where the front decorative portion exists can be more reliably recognized as a winning area in which the starting winning means and the variable winning means are combined.

Further, from the time when the game ball enters the area where the front decoration portion exists, until the game ball is detected by the starting prize detection means or the variable prize detection means (particularly, the one located on the downstream side of the game area). There is a concern that a relatively long time lag will occur, and even if the ball is notified at the timing of detection by the start winning detection means or the variable winning detection means (the game ball has entered the area where the front decoration part exists). It is difficult to grasp what the notification corresponds to, and if there is no reaction when entering the front decoration part, the player feels uneasy. In this regard, by showing a predetermined reaction based on the detection of the prior detection means, such a concern can be dispelled.

In addition, when there are multiple movement routes of the game ball in the game area and the player hits the game ball aiming at the target movement route according to the situation such as the game mode, the starting winning means or In a situation where the movement route on which the variable winning means is installed is not the target movement route, it is possible to more reliably grasp that the game ball has been launched on the movement route, and based on this, the correct movement can be performed. It is also possible to notify the route.

Means D-18. The gaming machine according to means D-17, characterized in that it includes an approach sound effect generating means capable of generating a sound effect based on the detection of the prior detection means.

According to the means D-18, the image that the game ball has entered the area where the front decorative portion exists can be further strengthened. Further, as a player, it is possible to obtain a sense of security because it can be seen that the gaming ball that has entered the back side of the front decoration portion is firmly recognized (counted) on the gaming machine side. It is also possible to teach whether the game ball is in the starting winning means or the variable winning means, or whether both of them cannot be entered, depending on the voice mode of the approach sound effect generating means. It is possible.

Means D-19. The means D 17 or the gaming machine according to D-18.

According to the means D-19, based on the detection information of the advance detection means, the start winning detection means, the variable winning detection means, and the emission detecting means, whether there is an illegal winning ball, the starting winning means, the variable winning means, In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not ball clogging has occurred in the ball entry guiding means.

Means D-20. The launching strength adjusting means capable of adjusting the launching strength of the game ball by the launching means is provided.
The game area is
The first route where the first accessory was installed and
Equipped with a second route where a second character is installed,
The game ball moving on the first route is configured so that it cannot reach the second accessory.
The game ball moving on the second route is configured so that it cannot reach the first accessory.
The firing strength adjusting means is configured to be operable by the player, and includes an operation unit that is displaced according to the operation of the player.
By displacing the operation unit along a specific direction, the strength of launching the game ball by the launching means can be adjusted, and the launching strength can be adjusted to move the game ball to the first route. It is configured so that it can be separated from the second route.
The starting winning means includes, at least, a first starting winning means capable of entering a game ball that has passed through the first route, and a second starting winning means as the second accessory provided on the second route. Prepare,
The variable winning means includes a first variable winning means that can be entered by at least a game ball that has passed through the first route and is subject to a winning / failing lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning means. It is provided on the second route and is provided with a second variable winning means as the second accessory, which is a target of a winning / failing lottery based on a ball entering the second starting winning means.
The normal starting means is provided on the second route, and the second normal starting means as the second accessory in which a ball entry support lottery for the second starting winning means is performed based on the passage of the game ball. Equipped with
The ball entry guiding means is provided so as to guide the movement of the gaming ball between the second starting winning means and the second variable winning means, D-1 to D. The gaming machine according to any one of -18.

According to the means D-20, a ball entry guiding means is provided between the second starting winning means and the second variable winning means, and as described in the above means 1 and the like, the game ball is made more efficient. It is possible to enter the ball into the second starting winning means and the second variable winning means. However, in this configuration, although the generation of wasted balls can be suppressed and the game can proceed smoothly (at a good tempo), the behavior of the game balls on the second route is the second. If one of the starting winning means and the second variable winning means, which is located on the upstream side, is reached, the movement route will be almost the same.

In this respect, as in the means D-20, not only the second starting winning means and the second variable winning means but also the first starting winning means and the first variable winning means reachable from the first route are provided. For this, you can select various behaviors (movement routes) of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the behavior of the pachinko ball becomes almost constant, which causes a decrease in interest, and the behavior of the pachinko ball is enjoyed in a state where the pachinko ball is launched on the first route. It is possible to maintain the original fun of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, by launching the game ball on the second route when the player is in an advantageous state, the game can be expected to enter the second starting winning means and the second variable winning means. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball does not enter the second starting winning means or the second variable winning means well. Therefore, in the state where the game ball is launched on the second route, the stress that the game ball does not enter the second start winning means or the second variable winning means can be eliminated, and the game can proceed comfortably.

Next, an example of the mode of the starting ball entry opportunity granting means and the specific ball entry opportunity granting means described in the above means D-2 to D-4 will be given.

Means D-21. The ball entry opportunity granting means (specific entry opportunity granting means, starting ball entry opportunity granting means) is the opening / closing member (specific opening / closing member, starting opening / closing member) at the closed position (although the ball has reached the entry point). The introduction path where the game ball whose passage of the entry point to the winning opening (specific winning opening, starting winning opening) is restricted by () is guided, and the gaming ball that has entered the introduction path is the entry point. A gaming machine comprising the description of any of means D-2 to D-4, characterized in that it comprises a re-entry path to guide to.

According to the means D-21, the game ball has reached the entry point, but since the opening / closing member is not yet in the open position, it takes a little time and then goes to the entry point again. A series of movements of the game ball can be derived. That is, when the game ball first reaches the entry point, the opening / closing member is in the closed position, but at the timing when the game ball reaches the entry point again after a predetermined time via the entry opportunity granting means, The opening / closing member may be in the open position. Therefore, even if the try to pass the first entry point fails, the same game ball can access the entry point multiple times so that it can be retried later. The above-mentioned effects such as efficiently entering the game ball launched into the game area into the winning opening are surely produced. As a matter of course, if the opening / closing member is in the open position when the game ball first reaches the entry point, the game ball enters the winning opening at that stage.

Means D-22. The gaming machine according to means D-21, wherein the gaming ball that has reached the entry point is guided to the introduction path by the opening / closing member in a closed position.

According to the means D-22, when the opening / closing member for opening / closing the route to the winning opening is in the closed position, the opening / closing member can guide the game ball to the introduction path, so that the game ball can be guided to the introduction path. It is not necessary to separately provide a movable member for guiding, and it is possible to simplify the configuration, suppress the increase in size, suppress the increase in cost, and the like. In this means, the opening / closing member in the closed position constitutes a part of the ball entry opportunity giving means.

It should be noted that the opening / closing member may be configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction between the closed position protruding into the game area and the open position exiting the game area. In this case, the game ball can be configured to enter the winning opening by the action of the game ball falling, and the game ball can be reliably guided by the upper surface of the opening / closing member in the closed position.

Means D-23. The re-entry route of the gaming ball from the entry point to the entry point via the introduction path and the re-entry path must be configured so as not to intersect at least other than the entry point. The gaming machine according to means D-21 or D-22.

According to the means D-23, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game balls collide head-on with each other in the middle of the re-entry route. Therefore, the game ball moving on the re-entry route can be more reliably guided to the entry point at the initial timing. Even if the game balls collide with each other at the entry point, if the opening / closing member is in the open position, the entry point will pass through the winning opening side as it is.

Means D-24. When the opening / closing member (specific opening / closing member, starting opening / closing member) is in the closed position, the game ball whose entry to the winning opening (specific winning opening, starting winning opening) is restricted by the opening / closing member is the opening / closing. It is a configuration that moves along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member while maintaining the contact state with the member.
The opening / closing member constitutes the ball entry opportunity granting means (specific ball entry opportunity granting means, starting ball entry opportunity granting means).
Means D-2 to D-are characterized in that when the opening / closing member is in the open position, the gaming ball in contact with the opening / closing member is configured to enter the winning opening. A gaming machine including any of the description of 4.

According to the means D-24, when the opening / closing member is in the closed position, the game ball that has reached the entry point is restricted from entering the winning opening by the opening / closing member, but the opening / closing member is directly entered. It will move along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member while maintaining the contact state. Then, when the opening / closing member is set to the open position, the game ball that is in contact with (leaning or resting on) the opening / closing member passes the entry point to the winning opening side and enters the winning opening. It will enter the ball. In this way, by making the staying time at the entry point of the game ball as long as possible, it is possible to enter the winning opening when the opening / closing member is in the open position, and wait for the timing when the opening / closing member is next in the open position. Can be done. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of efficiently entering the game ball launched into the game area to enter the winning opening is surely achieved.

Further, even if the opening time, which is the opening position of the opening / closing member, is relatively short, the game ball leaning on (for example, resting on) the opening / closing member can be entered into the winning opening. That is, for example, a game ball can be placed on the opening / closing member when the opening / closing member is closed, and all of them can be entered into the winning opening by opening the opening / closing member for a short time. Therefore, it is possible to intensively enter a predetermined number of game balls without lengthening the total opening time of the opening / closing member. For this reason, for example, when the winning opening and the opening / closing member are embodied as a variable winning means that is opened when a winning / fail lottery is won and a special gaming state is entered, the winning opening and the opening / closing member are accumulated in the opening / closing member during the interval between rounds. As soon as the round starts, the game ball enters the variable winning means (specific winning opening), which can improve time efficiency. Further, for example, when the starting winning means that is opened when the ball is won in the ball entry support lottery is embodied, it becomes possible to enter more game balls without lengthening the opening time. It is also possible to create new playability.

Means D-25. If the opening / closing member (specific opening / closing member, starting opening / closing member) is in the open position, the ball entry opportunity granting means (specific ball entry opportunity granting means, starting ball entry opportunity granting means) is the winning opening (specific winning opening, When the opening / closing member is in the closed position when the gaming ball reaches the first entry point where the ball can be entered into the starting winning opening), the winning is made if the opening / closing member is in the open position. A gaming machine comprising the description of any of means D-2 to D-4, characterized in that the player is guided to a second ball entry point where the ball can be entered into the mouth.

According to the means D-25, when the opening / closing member is in the closed position, the game ball has reached the first entry point where the opening / closing member can enter the winning opening if the opening / closing member is in the open position. However, if the opening / closing member is in the open position, the game ball will be guided to a second ball entry point where the ball can enter the winning opening. Therefore, the game ball that could not enter the winning opening is given an opportunity to try to enter the winning opening again, and the possibility that the game ball enters the winning opening can be increased. Therefore, among the game balls fired aiming at entering the winning opening, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the winning opening and the number of game balls not entering the winning opening is the winning opening. It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of game balls that enter the ball.

Means D-26. The winning opening (specific winning opening, starting winning opening) includes a first winning opening and a second winning opening.
The opening / closing member (specific opening / closing member, starting opening / closing member) is
It is placed at the first entry point on the first entry route through which the game ball entering the first winning opening is (always) passed, and the gaming ball cannot enter the first winning opening. A first opening / closing member that can be displaced between the closed position that allows the ball to enter and the open position that allows the ball to enter.
It is placed at the second entry point on the second entry route through which the game ball entering the second winning opening is (always) passed, and the gaming ball cannot enter the second winning opening. It is equipped with a second opening / closing member that can be displaced between the closed position that enables the ball and the open position that allows the ball to enter.
The ball entry opportunity granting means (specific ball entry opportunity granting means, starting ball entry opportunity granting means) is such that when the first opening / closing member is in the closed position (the first opening / closing member is in the closed position). Accordingly, the means D-2 to D- comprising guiding the gaming ball (which cannot pass the first entry point to the first winning opening side) to the second entry route. A gaming machine including any of the description of 4.

According to the means D-26, when the first opening / closing member is in the closed position, the first entry point is set to the first winning opening side due to the fact that the first opening / closing member is in the closed position. The game ball that cannot pass through is guided to the second entry route leading to the second winning opening. For this reason, the game ball that could not enter the first winning opening will be given an opportunity to try to enter the second winning opening, and the game ball will be given the winning opening (first winning opening and second winning opening). It is possible to increase the possibility of entering the ball (mouth). Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the winning opening, the number of game balls that pass through the entry point and enter the winning opening, and the number of game balls that have reached the entry point, but the opening / closing member is restricted. Therefore, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the winning opening can be increased in proportion to the number of gaming balls excluded from the route that does not enter the winning opening. As a result, the game ball launched in the game area to enter the winning opening can be efficiently entered into the winning opening, and the wasted ball that was launched aiming at the winning opening but did not reach the winning opening. Can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which a large number of game balls need to be fired in order to enter the winning opening.

Means D-27. The second entry point (corresponding to the means D-25, the second entry route) is configured to be accessible only when the gaming ball is guided by the entry opportunity granting means. The gaming machine according to means D-25 or D-26.

There is a possibility that a game ball that could not enter the (1st) winning opening at the 1st entry point will enter the (2nd) winning opening at the 2nd entry point, but at the 2nd entry point ( 2) Since there is no possibility that a game ball that could not enter the winning opening will enter the (1st) winning opening at the first entry point, for example, directly without going through a means for giving a chance to enter the ball. If the game ball is configured to be able to enter the (second) winning opening at the second entry point, the possibility that the game ball will enter the winning opening is reduced. In this regard, according to the means D-27, the ball is first entered into the (first) winning opening at the first entry point, and if that is not the case, the (second) winning is achieved at the second entry point. It is possible to comply with the order of trying to enter the ball into the mouth, and the action effect such as improving the possibility of entering the winning opening is more reliably achieved.

E. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is provided with a game board, and a game area in which a game ball launched by a launcher is guided is formed in front of the game board. In addition, on the front side of the game board, there are game nails that make the behavior of the game ball moving in the game area various, winning means that the game ball moving in the game area can enter, and suggestions of the game state. A display means for producing the effect is provided, and a large number of illuminations are provided on the front side of the gaming machine, including the front surface of the gaming machine, in order to improve the decorativeness. Members, decorative members with various designs, and the like are provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In recent years, the number and size of winning means and display means arranged on the front surface of the game board have tended to increase / increase, and as a result, the game area in which the game ball moves tends to decrease. In other words, if the area of the game area where the game ball can move is increased, the area where the winning means and the display means can be installed is reduced by that amount, and there is a concern that it will be inferior to other models. For this reason, when trying to secure the minimum movable area of the game ball while suppressing "inferiority", all models have a similar board structure, and it is becoming difficult to give originality.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a highly original visual recognition mode.

Means E-1. A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game board with multiple game nails erected on the front side,
A transparent substantially plate-shaped transparent body arranged in front of the game board at a predetermined distance is provided.
A gaming machine in which a gaming region in which a gaming ball launched by the launching means is guided is formed between the gaming board and the transparent body.
In the game area, it is provided with a distance between the game board and the game board so that the game ball can pass through, and is provided with a front decoration portion configured so that the game ball moving behind itself can be visually recognized from the front.
The front decorative portion is attached to the game board or a game member attached to the game board, and is attached to the game board.
A gaming machine characterized in that the front decorative portion is formed with a nail exposed hole that penetrates back and forth and exposes a game nail erected on the front surface side of the gaming board to the front.

According to the means E-1, a range in which the game nail is installed in the front decoration portion where predetermined information (decoration, etc.) can be shown to the player in front of the portion where the game ball can pass in the game area. It can also be provided in the above, and the area of the front decorative portion can be secured to some extent without worrying about the arrangement of the game nails. For this reason, information that was conventionally placed in a place that is difficult for the player to see, or information that is difficult to secure space and whose installation is restricted, is installed within the range of the game area where the game ball moves. be able to. In particular, since the front decoration part is located in front of the part where the game ball in the game area passes, it is closer to the player, and the front of the game board, around the game area, and the game machine main body to which the game board is attached. Along with the front surface of the door body that can be opened and closed in front of the machine, it is possible to perform three-dimensional decoration and express motifs that straddle the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side of the game area.

Further, the front decorative portion is attached to the game board or the game member attached to the game board. Therefore, in order to mount the front decorative portion, it is not necessary to change the shape of the game board mounting frame on which the game board is mounted, the front frame provided in front of the game board mounting frame, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly reuse the gaming machine by exchanging only the gaming board and various members attached to the gaming board and reusing the gaming board mounting frame or the like as it is.

Further, the game area behind the front decoration portion is configured so that the game ball can be moved and the game ball moving in the area can be visually recognized. Therefore, in exchange for the installation of the front decorative portion, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the movable area of the game ball (when the game board is viewed from the front) is narrowed. Further, a nail exposure hole for exposing the game nail to the front is formed in the front decorative portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball can move behind the front decorative portion, but the game nail cannot be installed. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative part by avoiding the game nails (there is no need to arrange the game nails so as to avoid the front decorative part), and the design of the front decorative part is improved. And the formation of the movement route of the game ball by the game nail can be compatible with each other.

Further, even if maintenance (angle adjustment, etc.) of the game nail is required due to a change in the angle of the game nail due to long-term use, the work can be performed without removing the front decorative portion. Further, for example, as compared with the case where a resin rod-shaped body integrally formed with the front decorative portion is provided instead of the game nail, the durability can be improved and the front decoration can be improved. There is no need to increase the distance between the game board and the transparent body in order to install the part, and the basic design of the game machine will be changed and the front-back width of the game machine will be widened (in the game hall, etc.). If the installation space of the gaming machine is fixed and the front-rear width increases, the front of the gaming machine may move toward the player in front and it may be difficult to see the entire gaming area). can.

In addition, since the front decorative portion is provided at a position where it cannot be contacted from the player side behind the transparent body, the front decorative portion may be damaged by external contact or may be separated from the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent such a situation. It should be noted that the front decorative part may be accompanied by information by printing characters on the front side or inside (sticking a printed sticker) or processing the front side or inside (unevenness). good. In this case, even if the game ball moving in the game area comes into contact with the front decorative portion, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the information is deleted and it becomes difficult to see.

As for the positional relationship between the front decorative portion and the game nail, if the game ball is configured to pass between the front decorative portion and the game board, the front portion of the game nail penetrates the nail exposed hole. It may be located in front of the front decorative portion, or the entire game nail may be located behind the front decorative portion. In addition, the front decoration section may have information represented by symbolic information such as letters and numbers (model information, copyright source, etc.), for example, uneven processing, drawing a pattern, or the like. It may have information (decoration, background, etc.) represented by coloring. Further, it may be stated that "the same nails as other game nails are used for the game nails arranged so as to face forward from the nail exposure hole". In this case, the game nails can be unified, the productivity of the game machine can be improved, the cost can be reduced, and the like. In addition, it is not necessary to have fluoroscopy for the portion of the front decorative portion where the game ball cannot pass through the back side thereof. Further, in order to have transparency, for example, at least the portion where the game ball passes through the back side may be made of a transparent or translucent material, or a slit may be formed. In addition, the front wall of the ball receiving portion that receives a part of the starting winning means and the variable winning means (for example, a game ball moving in the game area and guides the game ball to the opening side formed in the game board) by the front decoration part. ) May be configured.

Means E-2. The game according to means E-1, wherein the front decorative portion is formed with a ball clogging clearing hole penetrating back and forth corresponding to a game ball path through which the game ball can pass behind the front decorative portion. Machine.

According to the means E-2, even if a ball clogging occurs on the back side of the front decorative portion, it can be eliminated through the ball clogging clearing hole without removing the front decorative portion. In addition, the visibility of the game ball passing behind the front decorative portion can be improved.

Means E-3. The front decorative portion is attached to a game member attached to the game board, and is attached to the game member.
The means E-1 or E-2 is characterized in that the front decorative portion is formed with a tool hole that penetrates back and forth and exposes the attachment portion of the gaming member to the gaming board to the front. The gaming machine described in.

If the front decorative part is directly attached to the game board with screws or the like, there is a concern that the screws or the like are basically exposed to the front and the design is deteriorated. By doing so, it is possible to perform such mounting on the back surface side of the front decorative portion so that the screws and the like used for mounting are not visible. However, when such a configuration is adopted, there is a concern that the work of attaching the game member to the game board will be relatively difficult. That is, when the front decorative portion also covers the front of the mounting portion of the game member to the game board, a tool such as a screwdriver cannot be suitably positioned in front of the mounting portion.

On the other hand, according to the means E-3, a tool hole is formed in a portion of the front decorative portion located in front of the portion where the game member is attached to the game board. In this case, even if the front decorative portion covers the front of the game member, the attachment work of the game member to the game board can be performed relatively easily, and further, the attachment portion of the front decorative portion and the attachment of the game member can be performed. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the design due to the portion being visually recognized from the front.

If the front decorative portion is attached to the game member by being locked by a locking means, there is a concern that the disassembling work will be relatively difficult. Further, if the mounting portion of the game member to the game board is configured to be located outside the installation range of the front decorative portion, the design may be deteriorated. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a tool hole in the front decorative portion as in the present means, and to attach the game member to which the front decorative portion is attached to the game board by using a mounting member such as a screw.

Means E-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-3, wherein the front decorative portion is separated from the transparent body.

According to the means E-4, it is possible to prevent the generation of abnormal noise caused by the vibration of the front decorative portion being transmitted to the transparent body, or to press the front decorative portion and the transparent body due to a manufacturing error or the like. It is possible to prevent the front decorative portion from being damaged or the like.

Means E-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-4, wherein the front decorative portion is configured to cover the front of a plurality of winning means.

According to the means E-5, a wider range of dynamic decoration and the like can be performed.

Means E-6. Within the installation range of the front decorative portion, it is possible to individually determine that the gaming ball has entered the plurality of winning means whose front is covered by the front decorative portion. The gaming machine according to Means E-5, which is provided with a ball-entry teaching means that can be dressed and taught.

According to the means E-6, it is possible to more clearly grasp where the game ball has entered among the plurality of winning means whose front is covered with the front decorative portion by the ball entry teaching means.

Means E-7. In a state where it is possible to enter the winning means whose front is covered by the front decorative portion, the gaming ball will surely eventually enter the area covered by the front decorative portion. The gaming machine according to means E-5 or E-6, characterized in that the ball is entered into the winning means.

According to the means E-7, if it is practically possible to launch the game ball into the area covered by the front decoration part (the player does not make a profit or loss even if the aim is made), the front decoration part will be used. It is possible to add playability such as launching a game ball aiming at an area covered in front.

Means E-8. The gaming machine according to means E-7, wherein the entrance accessory is provided at a position where the gaming ball can enter the area covered in front by the front decorative portion.

According to the means E-8, since the entrance accessory serves as a marker of where to move the game ball, it is possible to help the player's understanding of the game playability.

Means E-9. The gaming machine according to means E-8, which comprises means for driving the accessory that can change the state of the entrance accessory.

According to the means E-9, it is possible to improve the decorativeness and the directing effect. Further, by changing the state of the entrance accessory, it is possible to make it more conspicuous as a mark of the launch position of the game ball, or to suggest / teach predetermined information by the state change.

The "change in the state of the entrance accessory" means a displacement of the entrance accessory, a change in the mode of the display member such as an illumination provided on the entrance accessory (for example, the entrance accessory imitates a predetermined character). , A three-color LED is provided at the position of the eye, and the emission color changes depending on the situation, etc.). Further, as for the displacement of the entrance accessory, not only the case where the entire entrance accessory is displaceable, but also the entrance accessory is configured to be partially displaceable (either one place or a plurality of places). The purpose is to include the case.

Means E-10. The entrance accessory is configured so that at least a part of it can be displaced.
The gaming machine according to means E-9, which is configured so that the movement path of the gaming ball in the gaming area does not change even if the entrance accessory is displaced.

According to the means E-10, the entrance accessory is merely an accessory (decoration), and although it is configured to be displaceable, the displacement does not affect the movement path of the game ball. For this reason, even if the entrance accessory is moved in a complicated manner, the game ball can be satisfactorily entered into the winning means on the back side of the front decoration part, and the entrance accessory can be designed relatively freely. It is also possible to suggest and teach various information depending on the aspect of the object.

It should be noted that "the accessory driving means may rotate and displace the inlet accessory". In this case, it is possible to avoid increasing the size and complexity of the mechanism for rotating the entrance accessory while configuring the movement path of the game ball so as not to change due to the displacement of the entrance accessory.

Means E-11. A start winning means that can change the state between an open state that allows the entry of a game ball moving in the game area and a closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball, and a variable winning means.
A normal starting means that allows a game ball that moves in the game area to pass through,
The start prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the start prize means, and the start prize detection means.
A variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means, and a variable winning detecting means.
It is provided with a normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through the normal starting means.
Based on the detection of the start winning prize detecting means, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable winning means generates a special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened.
Based on the detection of the normal start detecting means, a ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the start winning means is performed.
Even though one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area has reached a ball entry point where the ball can be entered in the open state, the ball is entered. A ball entry guidance means that guides a game ball that could not enter the one because one was in the closed state to a ball entry point that can enter the other if the other is in the open state. Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-10, wherein the front decorative portion covers at least the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the front of the ball entry guiding means.

According to the means E-11, a game ball that could not enter one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means because one of them was closed reaches the other entry point (entrance). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the product is discharged from the game area. As a result, it is possible to surely increase the possibility that the game ball that could not enter one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means will enter the other, and was launched into the game area. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game ball is discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. As a result, among the game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls that have entered any winning means and the number of game balls that are discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a relatively large variation in the ratio of the above, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by such variation.

Further, the presence of the front decorative portion can enhance the sense of unity of the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the ball entry guiding means. In other words, the starting winning means is opened relatively frequently without being confused by the structure of the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the winning guidance means, and the complicated movement of the game ball that moves them. In a state or a special game state in which the variable winning means is open, if the game ball reaches the part covered by the front decorative part (if the game ball enters the back side of the front decorative part), the starting winning means Alternatively, it can be a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that the ball is entered into either of the variable winning means. Further, since the portion covered by the front decoration portion has the functions of both the starting winning means and the variable winning means, there is only a conventional configuration in which the starting winning means and the variable winning means exist separately. Compared to the pachinko and pachislot machines, it is possible to add novelty and derive new effects using this.

Means E-12. The front decorative portion is characterized in that the entrance accessory is provided at a position corresponding to the approach path of the gaming ball to one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the gaming area. The gaming machine according to E-11.

According to the means E-12, since the entrance accessory serves as a mark of where to move the game ball, it is possible to help the player's understanding of the game playability.

Means E-13. The gaming machine according to means E-12, which comprises means for driving the accessory that can change the state of the entrance accessory.

According to the means E-13, it is possible to improve the decorativeness and the directing effect. Further, by changing the state of the entrance accessory, it is possible to make it more conspicuous as a mark of the launch position of the game ball, or to suggest / teach predetermined information by the state change.

The "change in the state of the entrance accessory" means a displacement of the entrance accessory, a change in the mode of the display member such as an illumination provided on the entrance accessory (for example, the entrance accessory imitates a predetermined character). , A three-color LED is provided at the position of the eye, and the emission color changes depending on the situation, etc.). Further, as for the displacement of the entrance accessory, not only the case where the entire entrance accessory is displaceable, but also the entrance accessory is configured to be partially displaceable (either one place or a plurality of places). The purpose is to include the case.

Means E-14. The entrance accessory is configured so that at least a part of it can be displaced.
The gaming machine according to means E-13, characterized in that the movement path of the gaming ball in the gaming area is not changed even if the entrance accessory is displaced.

According to the means E-14, the entrance accessory is merely an accessory (decoration), and although it is configured to be displaceable, the displacement does not affect the movement path of the game ball. For this reason, even if the entrance accessory is moved in a complicated manner, the game ball can be satisfactorily entered into the starting winning means or the variable winning means, and the entrance role can be designed relatively freely. It is also possible to suggest and teach various information depending on the aspect of the object.

It should be noted that "the accessory driving means may rotate and displace the inlet accessory". In this case, it is possible to avoid increasing the size and complexity of the mechanism for rotating the entrance accessory while configuring the movement path of the game ball so as not to change due to the displacement of the entrance accessory. Further, "the start driving means for changing the state of the starting winning means from the open state to the closed state and the variable driving means for changing the state of the variable winning means to the open state and the closed state are provided. , The accessory driving means is configured by the starting driving means or the variable driving means in conjunction with the opening / closing operation of one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means. " In this case, it is possible to simplify the displacement control of the entrance accessory.

Means E-15. In the ball entry support lottery, a low ball entry state in which the player wins with the first probability and a high ball entry state in which the player wins with a higher probability than the first probability are set.
The entrance accessory can be changed into a high-entry ball-compatible state corresponding to the high-entry state, a special game-compatible state corresponding to the special game state, and a normal-compatible state corresponding to other states. The gaming machine according to means E-13 or E-14, characterized in that it is configured.

According to the means E-15, it is possible to grasp whether the game ball is in the starting winning means or the variable winning means, or in a state where both of them cannot be entered, depending on the mode of the entrance accessory. can do.

Means E-16. With respect to the range covered in front by the front decorative portion, the approach path of the gaming ball that ensures that the entry point of one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the gaming area is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-11 to E-15, which comprises a destination detecting means for detecting a passing gaming ball.

According to the means E-16, a reaction to the entry of the game ball into the area covered by the front decoration part can be generated relatively quickly, in which case the game ball is placed in the area where the front decoration part exists. You can strengthen the image that you have entered the ball. Therefore, the area where the front decorative portion exists can be more reliably recognized as a winning area in which the starting winning means and the variable winning means are combined.

Further, from the time when the game ball enters the area where the front decoration portion exists, until the game ball is detected by the starting prize detection means or the variable prize detection means (particularly, the one located on the downstream side of the game area). There is a concern that a relatively long time lag will occur, and even if the ball is notified at the timing of detection by the start winning detection means or the variable winning detection means (the game ball has entered the area where the front decoration part exists). It is difficult to grasp what the notification corresponds to, and if there is no reaction when entering the front decoration part, the player feels uneasy. In this regard, by showing a predetermined reaction based on the detection of the prior detection means, such a concern can be dispelled.

In addition, when there are multiple movement routes of the game ball in the game area and the player hits the game ball aiming at the target movement route according to the situation such as the game mode, the starting winning means or In a situation where the movement route on which the variable winning means is installed is not the target movement route, it is possible to more reliably grasp that the game ball has been launched on the movement route, and based on this, the correct movement can be performed. It is also possible to notify the route.

Means E-17. The gaming machine according to means E-16, which comprises an approach sound effect generating means capable of generating a sound effect based on the detection of the prior detection means.

According to the means E-17, the image that the game ball has entered the area where the front decorative portion exists can be further strengthened. Further, as a player, it is possible to obtain a sense of security because it can be seen that the gaming ball that has entered the back side of the front decoration portion is firmly recognized (counted) on the gaming machine side. It is also possible to grasp whether the game ball is in the starting winning means or the variable winning means, or whether both of them cannot be entered, depending on the voice mode of the approach sound effect generating means. It is possible.

Means E-18. Means E-meaning to be provided with an discharge detecting means for detecting a gaming ball that has not entered either the starting winning means or the variable winning means among the gaming balls detected by the prior detection means. 16 or the gaming machine according to E-17.

According to the means E-18, based on the detection information of the advance detection means, the start winning detection means, the variable winning detection means, and the emission detecting means, whether there is an illegal winning ball, the starting winning means, the variable winning means, In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not ball clogging has occurred in the ball entry guiding means.

Means E-19. Among the starting winning means and the variable winning means, a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball is provided on the upstream side of one of the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the gaming area. The gaming machine according to any one of E-11 to E-18.

According to the means E-19, a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball is provided before the game ball reaches one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the irregularity regarding the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball entering one of the above. Therefore, the flow of the game ball in the starting winning means, the variable winning means, and the entering ball guiding means can be made relatively smooth. The rectifying means may be configured by an accessory, may be configured by a nail arrangement, or may be configured by combining a plurality of configurations.

Means E-20. Of the starting winning means and the variable winning means, the other, which is located on the downstream side of the gaming area, is configured to be reachable only when the gaming ball is guided by the entering guiding means. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-11 to E-19.

According to the means E-20, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball reaches the other located on the downstream side of the game area without passing through one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area. can do. Therefore, it is possible to comply with the order of first attempting to enter the ball to the other and, if that is not the case, attempting to enter the other, and it is possible to enter the starting winning means and the variable winning means. Actions and effects such as improving sex are more reliably achieved.

Means E-21. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-11 to E-20, wherein the starting winning means and the variable winning means are unitized.

According to the means E-21, the workability of attaching / detaching the starting winning means and the variable winning means to / from the gaming machine can be improved, and the relative position between the starting winning means and the variable winning means can be determined more accurately. ..

Means E-22. The variable winning means is arranged at a specific winning opening where a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter and a winning point through which a game ball entering the specific winning opening passes, and the specific winning means is provided. A specific opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position that closes the winning opening and an open position that opens the specific winning opening is provided.
For a game ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening at the timing when the specific opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the specific winning opening again is given at a timing later than the timing. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-11 to E-21, which comprises means for giving a specific ball entry opportunity to be given.

When the specific opening / closing member is in the closed position, there is no possibility that the game ball passes the entry point to the specific winning opening side, and there is no possibility of entering the specific winning opening. On the other hand, according to the means E-22, when the opening / closing member is in the closed position, the game ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening is given a specific winning at a later timing. It is possible to give an opportunity to enter the ball into the mouth. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball passes the entry point to the specific winning opening side and enters the specific winning opening.

Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of game balls that pass through the entry point and enter the specific winning opening, and the number of game balls that reach the entry point, but the opening / closing member It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening in the ratio to the number of game balls that are excluded from the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. As a result, the game ball launched in the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched aiming at the specific winning opening, it does not reach the entry. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and suppress the situation where it is necessary to fire a large number of game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening to play the game. Can be progressed in a pleasant manner.

In general, the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the entry point when the opening / closing member is in the open position, and at a timing that reaches the entry point when the opening / closing member is in the closed position. By performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching a game ball, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the specific winning opening. On the other hand, there are a player who performs such a technical operation and a player who does not perform such a technical operation, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall, etc., and the ratio of the total number of launched gaming balls to the total number of paid out gaming balls (so-called payout rate). ) Will be designed to include the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players performing the above technical operations increases, the winning probability is lowered and the game is played in various winning openings where the game balls are paid out in order to prevent the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the players. The probability that the ball will reach and enter the ball tends to be low, and the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation may be increased. For these reasons, there is probably a sense of unfairness between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

In this respect, in this means, even if the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the entry point when the opening / closing member is in the closed position, the game ball may enter the specific winning opening. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously fired, the generation of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning opening is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the acquired game ball between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical disparity of the players and reduce or eliminate the feeling of unfairness with the players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well, or do not intentionally). can. In addition, even for a player who always pays attention to the fact that it will be a loss if the above technical operation is not performed, the player can play the game without worrying about such a thing. , You can proceed with the game more easily.

In the special game state, (almost) all of the game balls that have reached the entry point to the specific winning opening may be configured to enter the specific winning opening. In this case, the effect of suppressing the technical disparity of the players is more reliably achieved.

Means E-23. The start winning means is arranged at a start winning opening where a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and at the entry point through which the game ball entering the start winning opening passes, and the start is started. It is provided with a start opening / closing member that can be displaced between the closed position that closes the winning opening and the opening position that opens the starting winning opening.
For a game ball that has reached the entry point to the start winning opening at the timing when the starting opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the starting winning opening again is given at a timing later than the timing. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-11 to E-22, which comprises means for giving a starting ball entry opportunity to be given.

According to the means E-23, basically the same action and effect as those of the above means E-21 are exhibited by using the target as a starting winning means. In the ball entry support state in which the starting winning means is opened relatively frequently, (almost) all of the game balls that have reached the entry point to the starting winning opening enter the starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the effect of suppressing the technical disparity of the players is more reliably achieved.

Means E-24. The variable winning means is arranged at a specific winning opening where a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter and a winning point through which a game ball entering the specific winning opening passes, and the specific winning means is provided. A specific opening / closing member that can be displaced between a closed position that closes the winning opening and an open position that opens the specific winning opening is provided.
For a game ball that has reached the entry point to the specific winning opening at the timing when the specific opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the specific winning opening again is given at a timing later than the timing. Equipped with a means to give a specific entry opportunity to give
The start winning means is arranged at a start winning opening where a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and at the entry point through which the game ball entering the start winning opening passes, and the start is started. It is provided with a start opening / closing member that can be displaced between the closed position that closes the winning opening and the opening position that opens the starting winning opening.
For a game ball that has reached the entry point to the start winning opening at the timing when the starting opening / closing member is in the closed position, the opportunity to enter the starting winning opening again is given at a timing later than the timing. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-11 to E-21, which comprises means for giving a starting ball entry opportunity to be given.

According to the means E-24, the effects of the means E-22 and the means E-23 are exhibited. Further, as described in the above means E-11, the game ball that did not enter one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means located on the upstream side of the game area is removed by the ball entry guiding means. Will be guided to. That is, in a situation where the ball entry support state in which the starting winning means is opened relatively frequently and the special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened are continuously derived, the game is played. Just by launching the ball at the same position in the game area, there is a high probability that (almost all) the game ball will enter either the starting winning means or the variable winning means. Therefore, in the ball entry support state and the special game state, almost no wasted ball is generated, and a very efficient game can be performed. As a result, it is possible to play a comfortable game in the ball entry support state or the special game state, and the situation where the game ball does not easily enter the winning means continues, which makes me feel uncomfortable (directing to teach the result of the winning / failing lottery, etc.). It is possible to avoid situations such as (cannot concentrate on).

Means E-25. The starting winning means is located on the upstream side of the gaming area with respect to the variable winning means, and the gaming ball that has not entered the starting winning means is guided to the variable winning means. 22 or the gaming machine according to E-24.

When the variable winning means of means E-22 or E-24 is adopted, it takes a relatively large amount of time for the game ball that has reached the variable winning means in the closed state to exit the variable winning means that maintains the closed state. Will be. Therefore, when the starting winning means is located on the downstream side of the variable winning means via the winning guiding means, the game ball may not easily reach the starting winning means. In particular, in general, the interval when the starting winning means is opened multiple times (the period during which the starting winning means is closed) and the special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened multiple times. Even when compared with the interval, the interval in the special gaming state is longer, and if the specific ball-entry opportunity granting means of the variable winning means is designed accordingly, this tendency becomes more remarkable.

In this regard, by arranging the starting winning means on the upstream side of the variable winning means as in the means E-25, from launching the game ball aiming at the variable winning means until the game ball reaches the variable winning means. The time can be made relatively short, and the smooth progress of the game can be achieved. In addition, for example, when the starting winning means is on the downstream side of the variable winning means via the winning guiding means, if the game ball reaches the variable winning means in the closed state, the starting winning means It is almost certain that the ball will enter the ball, but it will take a relatively long time to actually enter the starting prize means (until it is detected by the starting winning detection means), so there will be a time lag. Although there is a concern that it may give a sense of discomfort, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a sense of discomfort by setting the starting winning means to the upstream side of the variable winning means.

Further, even when the variable winning means of the means E-22 or E-24 is adopted, it is possible to insert the game ball into the starting winning means during the special gaming state. Therefore, in a configuration in which almost all of the game balls that have reached the entry point of the variable winning means in the special gaming state enter the variable winning means and almost no waste balls are generated (there is no loss to the player), the starting prize is won. If there are two or more game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the means, the one that is advantageous to the player (the extra game balls to be paid out by the amount entered into the start winning means) Can be given a slight change to (increase).

Means E-26. The variable winning means is located on the upstream side of the gaming area with respect to the starting winning means, and the gaming ball that has not entered the variable winning means is guided to the starting winning means. 22 or the gaming machine according to E-24.

According to the means E-26, when the variable winning means of the means E-22 or E-24 is adopted, the game ball hardly enters the starting winning means during the special gaming state, so that the starting winning means is used. The payout of the game ball based on the entry of the ball is virtually stopped. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a relatively large change in the total number of payouts of the game balls in the special game state depending on whether or not the game balls enter the start winning means in the special game state. As a result, the total number of payouts of game balls in the special game state of the same type in which the variable winning means is open can be made substantially constant, and it is possible to facilitate the design regarding the payout (payout rate) of game balls. .. Further, as a game concept (characteristic of a predetermined special game state), it is possible to derive a special game state in which the number of payouts of game balls has little variation.

In addition, in the special gaming state, there is no situation in which a game ball (which should enter the variable winning means if it reaches the variable winning means) enters the variable winning means on the upstream side of the variable winning means. , The special game state can be advanced relatively smoothly and quickly.

In the means E-26 and the above means E-25, the arrangement of the variable winning means and the starting winning means is reversed, but the one that matches the concept of each model may be adopted. That is, for example, in the "configuration in which one game ball is paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning means", the increase of the game ball cannot be expected at all, and it is regarded as useless, and the means E- The variable winning means may be arranged on the upstream side as in 26, or the time required for digesting the special game state without increasing the payout rate of the game ball (time during which the effect for the special game state can be derived). ) May be made as long as possible so that the special game state itself can be enjoyed more (enjoy the production), and the starting winning means such as the means E-25 may be arranged on the upstream side.

F. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game area is provided in which the game ball can move, and the game area is guided to the game area on which the game ball launched by the launching device is applied. Further, in general, the pachinko machine is provided with various prize-winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in a game area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

By the way, among the game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls that have entered any winning means and the number of game balls that are discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. There may be a relatively large variation in the ratio, which may lead to a decline in interest. In particular, when the winning means is an opening / closing type winning means that changes a state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter, the opening / closing type winning means. This concern becomes even more pronounced as the player's attention is more focused on how well he enters the ball.

On the other hand, by arranging a plurality of open / close type winning means together and configuring the game balls to be guided in order to the plurality of open / close type winning means, the game ball can be opened / closed. It is possible to increase the possibility of entering the ball in the ceremony winning means. However, when multiple open / close type winning means are arranged together, it is difficult to know where to win the game ball (or which open / close type winning means the game ball enters). There is concern that it will become.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is that it is difficult to understand the aim of the gaming ball while suppressing variations in the entry of the gaming ball into the winning means. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the situation.

Means F-1. A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
The first open / close type winning means that can change the state between the open state that allows the entry of the game ball moving in the game area and the closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball.
It is arranged on the downstream side of the game area from the first opening / closing type winning means, and can change the state between an open state that allows the entry of a game ball moving in the game area and a closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball. The second opening and closing type winning means and
The first prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the first open / close type prize means, and the first prize detection means.
It is provided with a second winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second opening / closing type winning means.
If the first open / close type winning means is in the open state, the first open / close type winning means is in the closed state even though the first opening / closing point where the ball can be entered in the first open / close winning means has been reached. If the second opening / closing type winning means is in the open state, the game ball that could not enter the first opening / closing type winning means can be entered into the second opening / closing type winning means. Equipped with a ball entry guidance means that guides you to the second ball entry point that can be done
The second opening / closing type winning means is configured to be reachable only when the game ball is guided by the ball entry guiding means.
The entrance accessory is provided at a position corresponding to the approach path of the game ball to the first open / close type winning means (the entry path of the game ball surely reaching the first open / close type winning means). A featured gaming machine.

According to the means F-1, the game ball that could not enter the first opening / closing winning means because the first opening / closing winning means was closed is the entry point (entrance) of the second opening / closing winning means. ), And it is possible to prevent the situation where the game is discharged from the game area. As a result, it is possible to surely increase the possibility that the game ball that could not enter the first open / close type winning means will enter the second open / close type winning means, and the game ball launched into the game area. However, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball is discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. As a result, among the game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls that have entered any winning means and the number of game balls that are discharged from the game area without entering any winning means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a relatively large variation in the ratio of the above, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by such variation.

Further, according to the present means 1, since the entrance accessory is provided at a position corresponding to the approach path of the game ball to the first open / close type winning means, the entrance accessory moves the game ball to where 1 It serves as a mark from where to enter the ball from the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is difficult to understand the aim of the game ball.

Further, according to the present means 1, the situation that the game ball reaches the second open / close type winning means located on the downstream side of the game area without passing through the first open / close type winning means located on the upstream side of the game area. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to comply with the order of first trying to enter the first opening / closing type winning means, and if that is not the case, trying to enter the second opening / closing type winning means, and the first opening / closing type winning means. The action and effect of improving the possibility of entering the ball into the means and the second opening / closing type winning means are more reliably achieved.

In addition, "when the first opening / closing type winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means is in the open state, all or almost all of the game balls that have passed through the entrance accessory are said. It may be "to enter the first opening / closing type winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means". In addition, "a start winning means that can change the state between an open state that allows the entry of a game ball moving in the game area and a closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball, a variable winning means, and a game area. A normal starting means through which a moving game ball can pass, a normal starting detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through the normal starting means, a starting winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the starting winning means, and a start winning detecting means. Whether or not a special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened is generated based on the detection of the starting winning detecting means, which is provided with the variable winning detecting means for detecting the game ball that has entered the variable winning means. The winning / failing lottery is performed, and based on the detection of the normal start detecting means, a ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the starting winning means is performed, and the first opening / closing type winning is performed. One of the means and the second opening / closing type winning means constitutes one of the starting winning means and the variable winning means, and among the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means. The other may constitute the other of the starting winning means and the variable winning means. "

Means F-2. A means characterized by having at least the first opening / closing type winning means, the second opening / closing type winning means, and a front decorative portion provided with the entrance accessory while covering the front of the ball entry guiding means. The gaming machine described in F-1.

According to the means F-2, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between the first opening / closing type winning means, the second opening / closing type winning means, and the ball entry guiding means. That is, the first opening / closing type winning means and the first opening / closing type winning means and the first opening / closing type winning means without being confused by the structure of the first opening / closing type winning means, the first opening / closing type winning means, and the complicated movement of the game ball moving these. 2 In the state where the opening / closing type winning means is in the open state, if the game ball reaches the entrance accessory (if the game ball enters the part covered by the front decorative portion), the first opening / closing type winning means or the first It is possible to make a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that the ball is entered in either of the two open / close type winning means. Further, since the portion covered by the front decorative portion has the functions of both the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means, the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means are provided. Compared to conventional gaming machines that have only a configuration in which means exist separately, it is possible to add novelty and derive new effects and the like using this.

In addition, if the front decorative portion of this means is provided, it becomes more difficult to know where to enter the game ball into the first open / close type winning means and the second openable winning means. Although there is concern, such concern can be dispelled by the presence of the entrance accessory described in the above means F-1.

It should be noted that "the front decorative portion may be attached to the game board or the first open / close type winning means attached to the game board and the second open / close type winning means". In this case, it is not necessary to change the shape of the game board mounting frame to which the game board is mounted, the front frame provided in front of the game board mounting frame, or the like in order to mount the front decorative portion. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly reuse the gaming machine by exchanging only the gaming board and various members attached to the gaming board and reusing the gaming board mounting frame or the like as it is.

Further, it may be stated that "the game area behind the front decoration portion is configured so that the game ball can be moved and the game ball moving in the area can be visually recognized". For example, at least the portion where the game ball passes through the back side may be made of a transparent or translucent material, or a slit may be formed. In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which a player or the like who plays a game for the first time becomes anxious because he / she cannot see what is happening behind the front decoration portion. Further, for example, the front decoration portion may be used as a place for teaching predetermined information to the player. For example, the front decoration unit may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning / failing lottery, etc.).

In addition, since the game ball can pass through the game area behind the front decoration part, the area where the game ball can move (when the game board is viewed from the front) is created in exchange for the installation of the front decoration part. It is possible to avoid a situation where the situation is narrowed. Further, it may be stated that "a nail exposure hole for exposing the game nail to the front is formed in the front decorative portion". In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball can move behind the front decorative portion, but the game nail cannot be installed. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative part by avoiding the game nails (there is no need to arrange the game nails so as to avoid the front decorative part), and the design of the front decorative part is improved. And the formation of the movement route of the game ball by the game nail can be compatible with each other. Further, even if maintenance (angle adjustment, etc.) of the game nail is required due to a change in the angle of the game nail due to long-term use, the work can be performed without removing the front decorative portion.

In addition, "the front decorative portion is attached to the first open / close type winning means attached to the game board and the second open / close type winning means, and penetrates the front decorative portion back and forth. A tool hole for exposing the attachment portion of the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means to the game board to the front may be formed. " That is, if the front decorative portion is directly attached to the game board with screws or the like, there is a concern that the screws or the like are basically exposed to the front and the design is deteriorated. By attaching to the winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means, it is possible to perform such mounting on the back surface side of the front decorative portion so that the screws and the like used for mounting are not visible. .. However, when such a configuration is adopted, there is a concern that it will be relatively difficult to attach the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means to the game board. That is, when the front decorative portion also covers the front of the mounting portion of the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means to the game board, a tool such as a screwdriver is placed in front of the mounting portion. It cannot be positioned appropriately.

On the other hand, if the tool hole is formed in the portion of the front decorative portion located in front of the attachment portion of the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing winning means to the game board, the front decoration is formed. Even if the portion covers the front of the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means, the work of attaching the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means to the game board is relatively performed. It can be easily performed, and further, the design is deteriorated because the mounting part of the front decorative portion, the first opening / closing type winning means, and the mounting part of the second opening / closing type winning means are visually recognized from the front. Can be reduced.

Means F-3. The gaming ball moving in the gaming area entered the portion covered in the front by the front decorative portion, and did not enter either the first opening / closing type winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means. In the case, the gaming machine according to the means F-2, wherein the gaming machine is moved to a gaming area not covered by the front decorative portion.

According to the means F-3, the game ball moving in the game area entered the portion covered in the front by the front decorative portion, but entered both the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means. It is possible to grasp that the ball did not hit in a relatively easy-to-understand manner. That is, for example, even if the game ball is allowed to enter the portion covered in the front by the front decorative portion when the first opening / closing type winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means is not in the open state. As a matter of course, the game ball should not enter either the first or second opening / closing type winning means. At this time, assuming that the portion covered with the front decorative portion is continuously moved until the gaming ball that has not entered either the first or second opening / closing type winning means is discharged to the outside of the gaming area, the first and second It is difficult to visually recognize whether or not one of the second opening / closing type winning means has won a prize.

In this regard, the game ball that entered the part covered by the front decoration part, but did not enter either the first opening / closing type winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means, is again at the front decoration part. It is configured to move to an uncovered gaming area. For this reason, when the first opening / closing type winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means is not in the open state, or when the game ball is temporarily clogged in the approach route, the game ball is placed in the front decorative portion. It is possible to avoid troubles caused by the misunderstanding that there is no prize ball (payout of the game ball) for entering the covered part, and the occurrence of a decrease in interest.

Means F-4. Described in means F-2 or F-3, wherein the front decorative portion is formed with a confirmation hole penetrating back and forth corresponding to a game ball path through which the game ball can pass behind the front decorative portion. Gaming machine.

According to the means F-4, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the existence of the game ball moving behind the front decoration portion. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the anxiety of the player (beginner or the like) who is worried about where the game ball moved to the rear of the front decoration portion has gone.

It should be noted that "the front decorative portion is formed with a ball clogging clearing hole that penetrates back and forth corresponding to the game ball path through which the game ball can pass behind the front decorative portion". In this case, even if a ball clogging occurs on the back side of the front decorative portion, it can be eliminated through the ball clogging clearing hole without removing the front decorative portion.

Means F-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means F-1 to F-4, characterized in that the entrance accessory is provided with an accessory driving means capable of changing the state of the entrance accessory.

According to the means F-5, it is possible to improve the decorativeness and the directing property. Further, by changing the state of the entrance accessory, it is possible to make it more conspicuous as a mark (target) of the launch position of the game ball, or to suggest / teach predetermined information by the state change.

The "change in the state of the entrance accessory" means a displacement of the entrance accessory, a change in the mode of the display member such as an illumination provided on the entrance accessory (for example, the entrance accessory imitates a predetermined character). , A three-color LED is provided at the position of the eye, and the emission color changes depending on the situation, etc.). Further, as for the displacement of the entrance accessory, not only the case where the entire entrance accessory is displaceable, but also the entrance accessory is configured to be partially displaceable (either one place or a plurality of places). The purpose is to include the case.

Means F-6. The entrance accessory is configured so that at least a part of it can be displaced.
The gaming machine according to means F-5, characterized in that the movement path of the gaming ball in the gaming area is not changed even if the entrance accessory is displaced.

According to the means F-6, the entrance accessory is merely an accessory (decoration), and although it is configured to be displaceable, the displacement does not affect the movement path of the game ball. For this reason, even if the entrance accessory is moved in a complicated manner, it is possible to satisfactorily enter the game ball into the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means, and the design is relatively free. It is also possible to suggest and teach various information depending on the mode of the entrance accessory.

It should be noted that "the accessory driving means may rotate and displace the inlet accessory". In this case, it is possible to avoid increasing the size and complexity of the mechanism for rotating the entrance accessory while configuring the movement path of the game ball so as not to change due to the displacement of the entrance accessory. Further, "a first drive means for changing the state of the first open / close type winning means into an open state and a closed state, and a second drive means for changing the state of the second open / close type winning means into an open state and a closed state". The entrance accessory is linked to the opening / closing operation of one of the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means, and the accessory is driven by the first driving means or the second driving means. The means may be configured. " In this case, it is possible to simplify the displacement control of the entrance accessory.

Means F-7. A first ball-entry state in which the ball can be expected to enter the first open / close-type winning means and a first ball-impossible state in which the ball cannot be expected to enter the first open / close-type winning means are set.
A second ball-entry state in which the ball can be expected to enter the second open / close-type winning means and a second ball-impossible state in which the ball cannot be expected to enter the second open / close-type winning means are set.
The entrance accessory is divided into a first corresponding state corresponding to the first ball-entry state, a second corresponding state corresponding to the second ball-entry state, and a normal corresponding state corresponding to other states. The gaming machine according to means F-5 or F-6, which is configured to be state-changeable.

According to the means F-7, depending on the mode of the entrance accessory, whether the game ball is in the state of entering the first opening / closing type winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means, or both of them can be entered. It is possible to grasp whether it is in a non-existent state. The operation pattern of the entrance accessory when the state changes from the normal correspondence state to the first correspondence state, and the operation of the entrance accessory when the state changes from the normal correspondence state to the second correspondence state. There may be a plurality of patterns for each. In this case, the behavior of the entrance accessory can be used more effectively as an effect.

Means F-8. Means F-1 to F provided with a destination detection means for detecting a passing game ball in the approach path of the game ball to the first open / close type winning means whose front is covered with the entrance accessory. -The gaming machine described in any of 7.

According to the means F-8, the game ball has entered the area covered with the entrance accessory, which is the entrance for the game ball to enter the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means. The reaction can be generated relatively quickly, and in that case, the game ball is in the area where the first opening / closing type winning means and the second opening / closing type winning means are put together (the area where the front decorative portion such as means F-2 exists). Can strengthen the image that the ball has entered. Therefore, if the game ball is entered (entered) into (the back side of) the entrance accessory, the game ball can be entered into either the first opening / closing type winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means. It can be recognized more reliably.

Further, from the time when the game ball enters the entrance accessory until the game ball is detected by the first prize detection means and the second prize detection means (particularly, the second prize detection means located on the downstream side of the game area). There is a concern that a relatively long time lag will occur, and even if the ball is notified at the timing of detection by the first prize detection means or the second prize detection means (the game ball has entered the entrance accessory). It is difficult to grasp what the notification corresponds to, and if there is no reaction at the time of entering the entrance character, the player feels uneasy. In this regard, by showing a predetermined reaction based on the detection of the prior detection means, such a concern can be dispelled.

Further, when there are a plurality of movement routes of the game ball in the game area and the player hits the game ball aiming at the target movement route according to the situation such as the game mode, the first open / close type is used. In a situation where the moving route in which the winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means is installed is not the target moving route, it is possible to more reliably grasp that the game ball has been launched on the moving route. It is also possible to give a notification indicating the correct movement route based on the above.

Means F-9. The gaming machine according to means F-8, which comprises an approach sound effect generating means capable of generating a sound effect based on the detection of the prior detection means.

According to the means F-9, the image that the game ball has entered the entrance accessory can be further strengthened. Further, as a player, it is possible to obtain a sense of security because it is known that the gaming ball that has entered the entrance accessory is firmly recognized (counted) on the gaming machine side.

Means F-10. Means F-meaning to be provided with an discharge detecting means for detecting a gaming ball that has not entered either the starting winning means or the variable winning means among the gaming balls detected by the prior detection means. 8 or the gaming machine according to F-9.

According to the means F-10, based on the detection information of the advance detection means, the start winning detection means, the variable winning detection means, and the emission detecting means, whether there is an illegal winning ball, the starting winning means, the variable winning means, In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not ball clogging has occurred in the ball entry guiding means.

Means F-11. It was paid out according to the number of game balls that entered the first open / close type winning means in the first game state in which the first open / close type winning means is open, or the number of balls that entered the game ball. A first display means capable of displaying the number of game balls, and
It was paid out according to the number of gaming balls that entered the second opening / closing winning means or the number of balls that entered the second opening / closing winning means in the second gaming state in which the second opening / closing winning means was opened. The gaming machine according to any one of means F-1 to F-10, characterized in that at least one of the second display means capable of displaying the number of gaming balls is provided.

According to the means F-11, the gaming ball that has entered the entrance accessory enters the first opening / closing type winning means or the second opening / closing type winning means, and is firmly recognized (counted) by the gaming machine side. You can get a sense of security because you know that you are there.

It should be noted that "displayed by the first display means or the second display means based on the information on whether or not the player is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state and the detection information of the prior detection means. Numerical values can be changed (updated), and other than the numerical values displayed by the first display means or the second display means based on the detection information of the first prize detection means and the second prize detection means. It may be configured so that the mode of the above can be changed. " That is, for example, if a game ball enters the entrance accessory in the first game state or the second game state, almost all of the game balls enter the first open / close type winning means or the second open / close type winning means. Even in the configuration of a ball, when the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the game ball does not actually enter the first open / close type winning means or the second open / close type winning means. At this time, in the case of counting the first display means or the second display means in response to the first detection means, after the game ball is detected by the entry detection means, the player enters the corresponding open / close type winning means. If you did not hit the ball (you happened to enter the openable winning means on the upstream side before entering the openable winning means on the downstream side (preferably not in such an arrangement), the ball is jammed in the middle. Since the player has reached the upper limit of the number of balls that can be entered, he decides that it is not necessary to shoot any more balls and stops firing the balls. As a result, there is a concern that the player may suffer profit or loss. In this respect, the above-mentioned problem can be avoided by displaying the number of balls entered in the open / close type winning means by the first display means or the second display means.

Means F-12. The gaming machine according to any one of means F-1 to F-11, wherein a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball is provided on the upstream side of the entrance accessory.

According to the means F-12, the moving direction and movement of the game ball entering the entrance accessory is provided by providing a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the game ball before the game ball reaches the entrance accessory. Irregularities related to speed can be reduced. Therefore, the flow of the game ball in the entrance accessory, the first and second opening / closing type winning means, and the ball entry guiding means can be made relatively smooth. The rectifying means may be configured by an accessory, may be configured by a nail arrangement, or may be configured by combining a plurality of configurations.

G. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine or the like is known. The pachinko machine is configured such that a game is played using a game ball, the game area is provided in which the game ball can move, and the game area is guided to the game area on which the game ball launched by the launching device is applied. Further, in general, the pachinko machine is provided with various prize-winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in a game area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

By the way, in order to efficiently enter the game ball launched into the game area into the winning means, the game ball that has entered the specific area can enter the specific area where the game ball moving in the game area can enter. It is conceivable to provide multiple prize-winning means. That is, by limiting the movement path of the game ball to some extent, the possibility of entering the winning means is increased, and further, for example, the game ball is used for these plurality of winning means (the one on the upstream side is openable). If it is configured to be guided in order, it is possible to more efficiently enter the game ball into the winning means.

However, there may be a relatively large time lag between the time the game ball enters the specific area and the time it reaches the winning means, and there is no reaction or intention even though the game ball should have entered the specific area. If a reaction that has not been done (which can be regarded as a bad meaning) is derived, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to be able to promote a more suitable game in a configuration having a specific area in which a plurality of winning means are arranged. It is to provide a game machine.

Means G-0. A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
A specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter (in the fifth embodiment, the rear area of the right-handed winning unit 901 in the game area) and
A first winning means (in the fifth embodiment, a second starting winning device 33b) capable of entering a game ball moving in the specific area, and
A second winning means (in the fifth embodiment, a second variable winning device 32b) capable of entering a game ball moving in the specific area, and
The first winning detection means (in the fifth embodiment, the second starting winning switch 224b) for detecting the game ball that has entered the first winning means, and
A second winning detection means (in the fifth embodiment, a second count switch 223b) for detecting a game ball that has entered the second winning means,
A variable display means (in the fifth embodiment, a decorative pattern display device 42) capable of variablely displaying identification information is provided.
When at least one of the first winning detection means and the second winning detecting means is detected, a ball entry detection corresponding process corresponding to the detection (in the fifth embodiment, the hold icon 962 is displayed). It is configured as a target detection means (in the fifth embodiment, a second start winning detection switch 224b) for executing the process).
A destination detection means (in the fifth embodiment, an approach detection switch 941) that is arranged upstream of the target detection means in the specific area and can detect a game ball moving in the specific area is provided.
The game ball detected by the prior detection means is configured to be able to enter the first winning means or the second winning means corresponding to the target detecting means.
When the detection of the first detection means is performed, the first ball detection correspondence process (in the fifth embodiment, the process of displaying the pseudo hold icon 963) related to the first ball detection correspondence process is configured to be executable. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the means G-0, the process related to the ball entry detection response process (first ball entry detection response process) performed based on the detection of the target detection means is the detection of the first detection means arranged on the upstream side of the target detection means. It is supposed to be done based on. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect (suggestion, etc.) such that the target detection means may be detected (the ball entry detection response process may be executed), and the effect can be diversified. .. In addition, the reaction corresponding to the detection of the target detection means can be quickly derived. Therefore, the target detecting means is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see, and there is too much time lag between the time when the game ball enters a specific area and the time when the reaction corresponding to the detection of the target detecting means is performed. It is possible to dispel concerns that it is difficult to understand what the reaction corresponds to, or that the target detection means is properly detected. In particular, "a game ball that enters the specific area at a specific timing and is detected by the prior detection means enters the first winning means or the second winning means corresponding to the target detecting means. In the case of "consisting of", such action and effect will be further exerted.

Means G-1. A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
A specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter (in the fifth embodiment, the rear area of the right-handed winning unit 901 in the game area) and
A first winning means (in the fifth embodiment, a second starting winning device 33b) capable of entering a game ball moving in the specific area, and
The second winning means (in the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b) is configured so that the game ball moving in the specific area can be entered and is arranged on the downstream side of the specific area from the first winning means. )When,
The first winning detection means (in the fifth embodiment, the second starting winning switch 224b) for detecting the game ball that has entered the first winning means, and
A second winning detection means (in the fifth embodiment, a second count switch 223b) for detecting a game ball that has entered the second winning means,
A variable display means (in the fifth embodiment, a decorative pattern display device 42) capable of variablely displaying identification information is provided.
When at least one of the first prize detection means and the second prize detection means is detected, the variable display means displays the ball entry detection corresponding display corresponding to the detection (in the fifth embodiment, the fifth embodiment). It is configured as a display target detection means (in the fifth embodiment, a second start winning detection switch 224b) from which the hold icon 962) is derived.
A destination detection means (in the fifth embodiment, an approach detection switch 941) that is arranged upstream of the first winning means in the specific area and can detect a game ball moving in the specific area is provided.
The game ball detected by the prior detection means is configured to be able to enter the first winning means or the second winning means corresponding to the display target detecting means.
When the detection of the first detection means is performed, the first-in-ball detection correspondence display in the variable display means is different from the first-in ball detection correspondence display imitating the entry detection correspondence display (in the fifth embodiment). , Pseudo hold icon 963) can be derived and
When the display target detection means is detected while the first-in-ball detection compatible display is displayed, the variable display means replaces the first-in-the-ball detection compatible display with the first-in-ball detection compatible display. A gaming machine characterized by being derived from.

According to the means G-1, from the time when the game ball enters the specific area to the time when the game ball enters the first winning means or the second winning means, and by extension, the first winning detecting means or the second winning detecting means (display target detection). Even if a relatively long time lag occurs before it is detected by the means), the game ball that has entered the specific area is placed on the upstream side of the first winning detection means. At the stage of being detected by the detection means, it is configured to derive a first-in-ball detection compatible display that imitates the ball entry detection compatible display that will be displayed on the variable display means when the display target detection means is detected. ing. In other words, it prevents the situation where the game ball enters a specific area, but there is no reaction to it, and the player is anxious about whether it makes sense to let the game ball enter the specific area. However, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player does not feel that the game ball is being inserted into the first winning means or the second winning means. Therefore, in a configuration having a specific area in which a plurality of winning means are arranged, more suitable progress of the game can be achieved.

In addition, it is possible to perform an effect (suggestion, etc.) such that the display target detection means may be detected (the ball entry detection compatible display may be displayed) based on the detection of the preceding detection means. Can be diversified. In addition, "instead of the first-in-ball detection compatible display, the first-in-ball detection compatible display is derived" means that the player can recognize that the first-in-ball detection compatible display has been switched to the first-in-ball detection compatible display. For example, when the displayed position is the same or the display corresponding to the first-in ball detection is displaced, the movement is displayed so as to be connected. .. Further, the "mode different from the above-mentioned ball entry detection compatible display" is intended to include not only the case where the shape, pattern, hue, etc. are different, but also the case where the movement is different even if the outer shape is the same.

Means G-2. The first winning means and the second winning means can be opened and closed so that the state can be changed between an open state that allows the entry of a game ball moving in the specific area and a closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball. It ’s a winning method for the ceremony,
In the specific area, the first winning means is closed even though the first winning point where the ball can be entered in the first winning means is reached if the first winning means is open. A second ball entry point that allows a game ball that could not enter the first prize-winning means to enter the second prize-winning means if the second prize-winning means is open. Equipped with a ball entry guidance means to guide you to
The second prize-winning means is configured to be reachable only when the game ball is guided by the ball-entry guidance means.
The first open state in which the first winning means is in the open state, the second open state in which the second winning means is in the open state, and the normal state which is neither the first open state nor the second open state. It is equipped with a state determination means for determining which of the states it is in.
When the first detection means is detected in the open state in which the detection of the game ball can be expected by the display target detection means among the first open state and the second open state, the first-in-ball detection corresponding display is derived. Be done,
Means G-meaning that the first-in-ball detection corresponding display is not derived when the first detection means is detected in the other open state or the normal state. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the means G-2, only when the game ball that has entered the specific area is detected by the display target detecting means and there is a possibility that the ball entry detection corresponding display is derived, the first entry is based on the detection of the first detection means. It is configured to derive a ball detection compatible display. Therefore, for example, even in the normal state, the first-in-ball detection correspondence display is derived due to the fact that the first-in ball detection correspondence display is derived based on the detection of the first-in-the-ball detection means, but the first-in-ball detection correspondence display is displayed at all. A display mode is derived in which the display corresponding to the first-in ball detection itself is erased without switching the display, and it is more certain that the player will be confused or the player will be uncomfortable. Can be prevented. In this way, by allowing the player to enter the game ball into the specific area in the predetermined open state, it corresponds to the entry into the winning means corresponding to the predetermined open state (expected to enter the corresponding winning means). Since the reaction is derived, it is possible to further strengthen the (pseudo) feeling that the player has made the game ball win the winning means, and by extension, the game is proceeding.

Means G-3. A means characterized by comprising an discharge detecting means for detecting a gaming ball discharged from the specific area without entering the specific area and entering the first winning means and the second winning means. The gaming machine according to G-1 or G-2.

According to the means G-3, it is possible to grasp the number (increase / decrease) of the game balls existing in the specific area. That is, in the state where the first-come-first-served ball detection compatible display is displayed, the winning detection means or the emission detecting means of the first winning detection means and the second winning detecting means that do not correspond to the display target detecting means is detected. In the case of a failure, the first-come-first-served ball detection compatible display can be erased (one). As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the first-in-ball detection compatible display is continuously displayed in the variable display means even though there is no possibility that the first-in-ball detection compatible display is switched to the incoming ball detection compatible display.

Means G-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-1 to G-3, characterized in that it includes an approach sound effect generating means capable of generating a sound effect based on the detection of the prior detection means.

According to the means G-4, it is possible to increase the reaction to the game ball entering the specific area, and to make the player more surely recognize that it is meaningful to make the game ball enter the specific area. Can be done. In addition, corresponding to the means G-2, if it is in the first open state, it corresponds to the sound effect corresponding to the ball entering the first winning means, and if it is the second open state, it corresponds to the ball entering the second winning means. The sound effect may be configured so that there is no sound effect in the normal state.

Means G-5. When the first-in-ball detection compatible display is displayed, an additional display in a mode different from the first-in-ball detection compatible display is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first-in-ball detection compatible display.
When the ball entry detection compatible display is derived instead of the first ball detection compatible display, the additional display displayed corresponding to the first ball detection compatible display is deleted. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-1 to G-4.

According to the means G-5, the mode of the display corresponding to the first-in ball detection is not determined by setting the mode of the display corresponding to the first-in ball detection to a mode in which at least a part of the display corresponds to the first-in ball detection is not clarified. It can give a strong impression that the corresponding display may change further. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player confuses the first-in-ball detection compatible display with the first-in-ball detection compatible display, and it occurs when the first-in-ball detection compatible display is mistaken for the first-in-ball detection compatible display. Possible troubles (for example, only the first-in-ball detection correspondence display was performed, but by misunderstanding this as the in-ball detection correspondence display, the processing that can be executed when the in-ball detection correspondence display is performed is not executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as "I think".

It should be noted that "a detection history storage means capable of storing the detection history (time of each detection) of the preceding detection means and the detection history (time of each detection) of the display target detection means is provided, and the storage information of the detection history storage means is provided. It may be configured to be able to output. " That is, for example, in the unlikely event that a trouble occurs due to misunderstanding the first ball detection compatible display as the incoming ball detection compatible display, data for explaining the circumstances can be reliably obtained (for example, display by a variable display means or the like). It is possible to make it possible or send it to a hall computer), and it is possible to avoid the situation where the trouble is complicated. In addition, the detection history of the winning detection means, which is provided in a specific area but is not the display target detection means of the target, and the detection history of the emission detection means of the means G-3 are also detected in the detection history storage means. Each may be configured to be memorable (individually).

Means G-6. The first-in-ball detection compatible display itself has an aspect in which the first-in-ball detection compatible display itself continues to be displaced.
When the ball entry detection compatible display is derived instead of the first ball detection compatible display, it is before the embodiment in which the first ball detection compatible display is stopped or almost stopped at the position where the first ball detection compatible display was displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-1 to G-5, wherein the entry ball detection compatible display is derived.

According to the means G-6, the player can detect the first-in-ball detection by distinguishing the display corresponding to the first-in ball detection so as to be in the operating mode and the display corresponding to the first-in ball detection to be stopped or almost stopped. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the display is confused with the display corresponding to ball entry detection. Therefore, basically the same action and effect as those of the above means G-5 are exhibited.

Means G-7. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-1 to G-6, wherein a front decorative portion having transparency is provided so as to cover the front of the specific area.

According to the means G-7, the sense of unity of the specific area can be enhanced, and the entire specific area including the first winning means and the second winning means can be impressed as a winning unit. For this reason, regardless of whether you are aiming for the first prize-winning means or the second prize-winning means, you can aim for a relatively large target such as a specific area. Can be enjoyed.

Further, when the front decorative portion is provided, the visibility of a specific area is visible even though it is transparent (consisting of a transparent or translucent material, or the openings are formed in a grid pattern, etc.). Will drop somewhat. That is, it is somewhat difficult to determine whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific area will enter the first winning means or the second winning means, and as a result, the part other than the entrance of the specific area should be observed. Opportunities are also easy to reduce. In this respect, unlike the above means G-1, even if the inside of the specific area is not directly visually confirmed, the game ball enters the specific area shortly after the game ball enters the specific area. It is possible to grasp that the ball detection compatible display and the corresponding processing are performed only by visually observing the variable display means.

Means G-8. A start winning means that can change the state between an open state that allows the entry of a game ball moving in the game area and a closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball.
A start winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start winning means, and a start winning detection means.
A winning / failing lottery for whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is performed based on the detection of the starting prize detecting means, and a main control means for generating the special gaming state based on the result of the winning / failing lottery. ,
In a gaming machine provided with display control means for varyingly displaying identification information in the variable display means and stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the winning / failing lottery after a predetermined time.
The main control means
The winning / failing random number generation means used in the winning / failing lottery,
As the winning value in the winning / failing lottery, a winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the winning / failing random number generation means, and
The variable display means includes a reserved storage area having a plurality of reserved areas that can store variable information used for determining the content of the variable display.
A discriminant value extraction process for extracting the value of the winning / failing random number generation means based on the detection of the starting prize detecting means, and
A discriminant value storage process for storing the value of the hit / miss random number generation means extracted in the discriminant value extraction process in any of the reserved storage areas, and a discriminant value storage process.
The first hit / fail determination process for determining whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number generation means extracted by the discriminant value extraction process matches the value stored in the winning value storage means.
The result storage process for storing the result of the first pass / fail determination process and the result storage process.
Whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number generation means as the variation information corresponding to the variation display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means prior to the execution of the variation display in the variable display means. The second hit / fail determination process that determines whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the information,
It is a configuration that can execute the variable display setting process for setting the variable display based on the result of the second pass / fail determination process.
One of the first winning means and the second winning means is composed of the starting winning means and is also composed of the starting winning means.
The display target detecting means is configured by the starting prize detecting means.
In the variable display means, a hold information object indicating that fluctuation information is stored in each hold area of the hold storage area is displayed.
The hold information object constitutes the ball entry detection compatible display.
When the first detection means is detected, the variable display means is configured to be able to derive a pseudo-hold information object as the first-entry ball detection-corresponding display that imitates the hold information object. The gaming machine according to any one of G-1 to G-7.

According to the means G-8, the hold storage area has a plurality of hold areas, and the values of the random number generation means and the like related to the setting of the variation display can be stored a plurality of times. As a result, the variation display is reserved. Will be done. In addition, in this means, when the value of the winning / failing random number generation means is stored in the hold storage area, the result of the winning / failing lottery can be grasped. Can teach and suggest to the player. Therefore, for example, when a new variable display is suspended while the variable display is already suspended, it is more than a stage before the newly reserved variable display is executed, that is, the variable display is suspended. It is possible to teach / suggest the content of the corresponding variable display in the reserved information displayed based on the fact that the variable display is newly suspended when the previously reserved variable display is performed. In this case, it is possible to improve the effectability.

By the way, for example, if the game ball is made to enter the specific area in a specific state (first open state or first open state), the game ball is almost entered into the starting winning means. If there is a relatively long time lag between entering a specific area and entering the starting winning means provided in the specific area and being detected by the display target detecting means, the game ball is really the starting winning means. There is a concern that you may be worried about whether you will enter the ball.

In this regard, in this means, a ball entry detection compatible display is configured by a hold information object (for example, in a high entry state in which a game ball can enter a start winning means in a specific area), the game ball is in a specific area. When the player enters and is detected by the first detection means, the pseudo-holding information object as the first-in ball detection correspondence display is displayed at the stage when the first detection means is detected. Therefore, the player has the right to execute the variable display when the game ball enters the specific area shortly after the game ball enters the specific area (at the stage when the game ball enters the specific area). You can see what you can get (almost). As a result, it is possible to make it easy to understand the correspondence between the game ball entering a specific area and the result (its privilege, etc.).

Means G-9. The pending information object is
The pre-determined parts section where the pattern is determined based on the result of the lottery performed triggered by the detection of the pre-detection means, and the pre-determined parts section.
It is equipped with a post-determined parts section in which a pattern is determined based on the result of a lottery performed triggered by the detection of the start winning detection means.
The gaming machine according to means G-8, wherein the pseudo-holding information object is composed of the predetermined parts.

According to the means G-9, it is possible to improve the effectability by using the hold information object and the pseudo hold object. In addition, "The pattern of the pre-determined parts part is determined by referring to the result of the winning / failing lottery and the pattern of the pre-determined parts part, and the special game state is determined by the combination of the pre-determined parts part and the post-determined parts part. The degree of expectation of winning for the occurrence of In this case, it becomes possible to make the hold information object and the pseudo hold information object more interested.

Means G-10. A variable winning means that can change the state between an open state that allows the entry of a game ball that moves in the game area and a closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball.
A variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means, and a variable winning detecting means.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable winning means generates a special gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened, and the special gaming state is generated based on the result of the winning / failing lottery. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means
One of the first prize-winning means and the second prize-winning means is composed of the variable prize-winning means and
The display target detecting means is configured by the variable winning detection means.
In the variable display means, a count display for counting the detection information of the variable winning detection means is derived.
The count display constitutes the ball entry detection compatible display.
When the first detection means is detected, the variable display means is configured to be able to derive a pseudo count display as the first ball detection compatible display that imitates the count display. The gaming machine according to any one of G-1 to G-9.

According to the means G-10, for example, if a game ball is made to enter a specific area in a special gaming state in which the variable winning means in a specific area is open, the game ball enters the (almost) variable winning means. In such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a game ball has entered a specific area, but there is no reaction to the entry of the game ball, and it is not possible to grasp what kind of benefits will be granted. Can give the feeling (close to) that a game ball has been entered into the variable winning means.

Means H. The "starting winning means and variable winning means" of the means D, the "game member or winning means (starting winning means and variable winning means)" of the means E, and the "first opening / closing type winning means and first opening / closing type winning means" of the means F. The "2 opening / closing type winning means" and the "first winning means and the second winning means" of the means G are composed of the specific winning opening described in the means A2 or the means A3, an opening / closing member, and a ball winning opportunity granting means. It is composed of any of the winning means to be performed, the specific winning opening described in the means B, the winning means composed of the opening / closing member, and the ball winning opportunity granting means, and the variable winning means described in the means C. A gaming machine characterized by that.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied are shown below.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the firing An example is a ball-and-ball game machine provided with a game area in which a pachinko ball is guided and each ball-entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operating opening, etc.) arranged in the gaming area.

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine provided with a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the firing are performed. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. A ball-and-ball game machine provided with a variable winning device (a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) and configured so that the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The game machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball game machines, is a pachinko machine or a game machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 32a ... 1st variable winning device, 32b ... 2nd variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning device, 33b ... 2nd starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decorative symbol display device, 43L ... 1st special display device, 43R ... 2nd special display device, 46 ... Hold lamp, 223a, 223b ... Count switch, 224a, 224b ... Start winning switch, 225 ... Through gate switch, 261 ... Main control device, 262 ... Sub Control device.

Claims (1)

A launching means to launch a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
A first winning means that can change the state between an allowable state in which a game ball moving in the game area is allowed to enter and a restricted state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted.
The state can be changed between an allowable state in which the game ball is arranged on the downstream side of the game area and is allowed to enter the game area and a restricted state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted from the first winning means. Second prize-winning means
The first prize detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the first prize means, and the first prize detection means.
It is provided with a second prize detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second prize means.
Because the first winning means was in the restricted state even though the first winning means reached the first winning position where the ball could be entered in the first winning means if the first winning means was in the permissible state. The game ball that could not enter the first winning means is guided to the second winning position where the second winning means can enter the second winning means if the second winning means is in the allowable state. Equipped with a ball entry guidance means
The second prize-winning means is configured to be reachable only when the game ball is guided by the ball-entry guidance means.
An accessory provided at a position corresponding to the approach path of the game ball to the first winning means, and
An accessory driving means capable of changing the state of the accessory,
A gaming machine provided on the upstream side of the first winning means and provided with a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball.

Images